Home

KYOCERA TASKalfa 250ci

1. sssse 2 13 EM cw OR AG RE E E EOS 2 16 e COMMAND CENTER Settings for E mail 2 17 EE OO E TEE 2 20 dip eo Vy MEINE IU IUE 2 32 2 1 Preparation before Use Check the Accessories Check that the following accessories are included Operation Guide This Guide Quick Guide to Adjusting Image Quality e CD ROM Product Library Documents Contained in the Included CD ROM The following documents are contained in the included CD ROM Product Library Refer to them as necessary Documents KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide Printer Driver User Guide Network FAX Driver Operation Guide TWAIN WIA Driver Operation Guide KM NET for Direct Printing Operation Guide KMnet Viewer User Guide Scan to SMB PC Setup Guide PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference Data Security Kit E Operation Guide Preparation before Use Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables Check the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network and prepare the necessary cables Connection Example Determine the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network by referring to the illustration below Connecting a scanner to your PC network with a network cable 100BASE TX or 10BASE T COMMAND CENTER Network Send E mail Administrator s PC Network settings Scanner default settings User and destination registration
2. Ejw Eia the originals either Top Edge Top or Top Edge e Left Then press OK 6 Press OK Press the Start key Copying begins 3 19 Basic Operation Punch Punch holes in sets of finished copies in preparation for binding NOTE Requires the optional 3 000 sheet document finisher and punching unit The orientations of the original and corresponding punch positions are as follows Original Copy Orientation of Original Platen Document processor Oo lt NOTE The inch model provides two hole and three hole punching The metric model provides two hole and four hole punching Follow the steps as below for punching 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Org Paper Finishing and then press Staple Punch 3 20 Ready to copy Staple Punch EH 2 staples To p 6 ort 5 Top Igi 2stenes EN ES 25 2 staples Left ANUAL Zoom Paper 2 holes ERE Cancel Copies Top Edge Top Original Orientation 10 10 2008 10 10 3 21 Basic Operation Select the type of hole punching Press Original Orientation to choose orientation of the originals either Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left Then press OK Press OK Press the Start key If the original is placed on the platen Place the next original and press the Start ke
3. 5 If there is no problem with the preview image press the Start key Copying begins 3 5 Basic Operation Selecting Color Mode When you scan and then copy send or store documents you can select the color mode used for scanning from the operation panel System Menu Counter Help Automatically recognizes whether scanned documents are color or black amp white Scans all documents in full color Scans all documents in black amp white Accessibility Display The basic procedure for selecting the color mode is explained below using an example in which the scanned document is copied 1 Press the Copy key 2 Placethe originals in the document processor or on the platen 3 Press the Auto Color key Full Color key or Black amp White key to select the color mode 4 Specify the required settings for copying Press the Start key NOTE You can fine tune the color mode from the touch panel e Copying You can use Single Color copying in Cyan Green etc page 4 29 e Sending Storing You can select Auto Color Color Gray Auto Color Color B amp W or Grayscale page 5 21 You can also change the default color mode for copying and sending storing For details refer to Color Selection Copy on page 8 17 or Color Selection Send Store on page 8 18 Basic Operation Copying Follow the steps as below for basic copying 1 Press the Copy key when the Copy key indicator is of
4. 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Advanced Setup and then Job Finish Notice 4 Toselect the destination from the address book press Address Book on the left of the screen and then press Address Book in the next screen Select the destination to be notified then press OK You can view information on the notification destination by pressing Detail 5 Specify the destination to send the finish notice and press OK NOTE For the procedure to select the destination from the Address Book refer Specifying Destination on page 3 30 6 Todirectly enter the address press Address Entry and then E mail Address 7 Enter the E mail address and press OK Press OK 9 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending When the sending is completed the finish notice is sent to the specified E mail address 2 29 Send and Print Sending Functions When you send originals this feature allows you to print a copy of the document being sent The procedure for using Send and Print is explained below Send and Store 1 oO a A QO N Press the Send key Place the originals on the platen Press Advanced Setup and then Send and Print Press On Press OK Specify the destination and press the Start key Transmission begins and a copy of the transmitted document is printed When you send originals this feature allows you to store a
5. Date Timer and then Change of Auto Error Clear 3 Press Off or On 4 Press OK 8 58 Default Setting System Menu Error Clear Timer If you select On for Auto Error Clear set the amount of time to wait before automatically clearing errors Options are between 5 and 495 seconds every five seconds NOTE If you select Off for Auto Error Clear the time display does not appear Use the procedure below to set the automatic error clear delay 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press v Date Timer v and then Change of Error Clear Timer 3 Press or to enter the time until printing restarts You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value 4 Press OK Interrupt Clear Timer Set the period after which the machine reverts to Normal mode when it has been set to Interrupt Copy mode and then left unused Any period between 5 and 495 seconds in five second increments can be set am The procedure for setting the interrupt clear timer is explained below 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press V Date Timer v and then Change of Interrupt Clear Timer 3 Press or to enter the time for the interrupt clear timer 4 Press OK 8 59 Default Setting System Menu Editing Destination Address Book Adding One Touch Keys Save frequently used destinations to Address Book or One Touch Keys The saved destinations can be changed The destinations are available for Send as E mail Se
6. Only displayed when Acrobat 5 0 and later is selected in Compatibility Only displayed when Acrobat 4 0 and later is selected in Compatibility 13 From Copying of Text Images Others select Disable or Enable Sending Functions The table below shows the available settings Prohibit the copying of text and objects on the PDF file Can copy text and objects on the PDF file 14 Press OK three times to return to Original Sending Data Format 15 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending Image Quality Select image quality suitable to the type of original The table below shows the quality options Text Photo Text and photos together For photos taken with a camera Only text no photos for OCR For documents to be read by OCR This function is only available for black and white mode Use the procedure below to select the quality when sending scanned originals 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Color Image Quality and then Original Image ral SEWUWIUENUI Rum 4 Selectthe original image Place original Original Image 5 Press OK Select original image type for best results for OCR For documents to be read by OCR Send EE Preview 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending Sending Functions Adjusting Density Use the procedure below to adjust the d
7. 11 13 Management Job Accounting Job accounting Manages the copy print count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each account Job accounting helps the following activities in business organizations e Manageability of up to 1 000 individual accounts Availability for account IDs with as many as eight digits between 0 and 99999999 for security e Integrated management of printing and scanning statistics through the use of an identical account ID Tracking the print volume for each account and for all accounts combined Restricting the print counter in one page increments up to 9 999 999 copies Resetting the print counter for each account or for all accounts combined First Job Accounting Setup Follow these steps for the first job accounting setup Enable job accounting page 11 14 v Add an account page 11 16 v Log out page 11 15 v Other users login for operations page 11 15 Enabling Disabling Job Accounting Enable job accounting Use the procedure below to specify the job accounting setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 Ifuser login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 Press Next of Job Accounting Setting
8. 7 Press on the left edge of the new waste toner box to lock it 8 Press the specified position to close the waste toner tray When the tray reaches the correct position it locks in place with a clicking sound 9 Close the front cover NOTE Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations 9 12 10 Troubleshooting This chapter explains how to solve problems with the machine dil 2 ner U2 UE Worle 9 mE E METRI 10 2 e Responding to Error Messages escsesceccashcrszdececenssccasapepscenedesitosceccssnta 10 6 AAU Paper da Rm 10 15 10 1 Troubleshooting Solving Malfunctions The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving If a problem occurs with your machine look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following pages If the problem persists contact your Service Representative Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions cam The operation panel Is the machine plugged in Plug the power cord into an AC does not respond outlet when the main power switch is turned on Pressing the Start key Is there a message on the Determine appropriate response to does not produce touch panel the message and respond copies accordingly Is the machine in Sleep Press the Power key to recover 2 10 mode the mach
9. Editing One Touch Key Edit delete the destinations you added to One Touch Key Use the procedure below to edit the One Touch key 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Edit Destination and then Register Edit of One Touch Key 3 Select a One Touch Key number 0001 to 1000 for the destination Pressing Quick No Search key or No enables direct entry of a One Touch Key number The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited Changing the Registered Information 1 Press Register Edit 2 Select a new destination Contact or group Pressing Detail shows the detailed information of the selected destination NOTE Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 30 for Address List m 3 Press OK 4 Press Yes on the screen to add the destination to the One Touch Key Deleting the Registered Information 1 Press Delete 2 Press Yes on the screen to confirm the deletion of the data registered in the One Touch Key 8 65 Default Setting System Menu Sort Settings Select the default sort setting of the address for the address book The table below shows the available settings Displays the destination list in order of the registered number Displays the destination list in order of the registered name Use the procedure below to specify the Sort settings 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Edit Destination Next
10. m i If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine Lr Eo ij IL a 4 as f f 77 5 Open the feed guide B1 HILL N gl 6 Remove the jammed paper If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine 10 20 Troubleshooting 7 Pull out cassette 1 8 Turn the lower green knob B2 to the left at least 10 times 9 Remove the jammed paper fe j l If you cannot remove the paper proceed with the next step A D ais o IIT l a 10 Pull out paper feed unit B3 10 21 Troubleshooting 11 Open paper feed unit cover B4 and remove the jammed paper 12 Push paper feed unit B3 back in place and push the cassette back in place securely 13 Press the specified position to close left cover 1 Inside the Left Covers 1 3 and 4 Follow the steps below to clear paper jams inside left cover 1 3 or 4 when using the optional paper feeder 1 Open the left cover where the paper is jammed inside 2 Remove the jammed paper es f If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine ig ee i Lemay I1 Jae 9 d i eee J 3 Close the left cover 10 22 Troubleshooting Duplex Unit Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the duplex unit 1 Pull up left cover 1 lever and open the left cover 2 Remove the jammed paper 3 Press the specified position to c
11. 10 10 2008 10 10 9 Press Change of Login Password and then Password 10 Enter the login password and press OK 11 Press Confirm Password 12 Enter the same login password to confirm and press OK 13 Press OK 14 Press Change of Access Level 15 Select the user access privilege and press OK 16 Press Change of Account Name 17 Select the account and press OK User Account Name i Select account to which this user will be attached yup NOTE Select Name and ID from the Sort pull down 01 Account 00001000 menu to sort the account list Search Name Search ID Press Search Name or Search ID to search by account name or account ID 02 Account 00002000 03 Account 00003000 04 Account 00004000 05 Account 00005000 Detail Cancel 10 10 2008 10 10 18 Press Register to add a new user on the local user list Management Changing User Properties User properties can be changed Types of user properties that could be changed may be different depending on user access privilege For a user with administrator rights who logs in User properties can be changed and users can be deleted The items which can be added are all able to be changed Use the procedure below to change the user properties 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 Ifuser login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login
12. Home page Displays your specified home page You can set your home page in the Browser Preferences on page 8 67 Reload Updates the page Back Forward Displays the previous page or the next page NOTE Pressing the Reset key while the Internet browser is displayed will exit the browser and return you to the application list screen without displaying the browser exit 3 50 4 Copying Functions This chapter explains the functions available for copying e 0e sieut diis 8 O RET LT Tm Ji I A ANS fe o TERES i805 i e c RT Qutput Destinato ssenarinin iia an Niki o 031211 E ES E N E E EE E E E S EE eli au ieRiues ce o m e ENTE e Wii osi denies LTEM diio ues gt eee Pe eee ee E E er eee eee M MPC d t omm Foge NUMO Rm MODO MOOD RR mmm Hii zc 0 0t E E eter T E TAEA A T ATE EET Image Repeat Double OV vocrccccsscscctecce snes siecisesisccosececeetsabssscdastoosss I a E E A SNe COl CODY serrr mmm Goor Balane AUS RETE iis sell enar EET me touch Image AdJUSI secccciexsinsececeastncaccasdvesecaiessenessiecsececeeesneseraese iE i 9 8 ere roce di 5 61 Densly Fells om EB C edite tese ROUEN AUO Mge ROOI RERUM EE 0 0 3 0 mem TRIPE TRIB B uere iere iip T E VE TEE OAE E MIDI E ET Wil c UPD PUIG acces senda t IURE NTI tm e Prony Ga if 0 ee meme noe sa idt si P Medo desta MM HORE RI m Ei 0 26 e OAMP B
13. Icons on the Touch Panel The following icons are used to indicate originals and paper placement directions on the touch panel Vertical direction Horizontal direction XXVIII 1 Part Names This chapter identifies the machine parts and operation panel keys amp XJSOPAUOD POPE aene EUR SPEPDRUTREREISURHEFENOREEQEEVEFER EE TEPPUNEUNOOEPLEVEREVEOPEEDLRIPEP ii ed tet mmm 1 1 Part Names Operation Panel Displays the Status Job Cancel screen Displays the System Menu Displays number of sheets printed and number of pages scanned Displays help guidance Blinks during printing operation Blinks while data is transmitted System Menu Counter Send selects auto color mode Selects full color mode Selects black and white mode Displays the Copy screen Displays the screen for sending You can also change this to show the address book screen owitches the touch panel display to enlarged display in the Copy screen or Send screen Displays the Document Box screen Displays the Application screen Displays the Program screen Part Names Blinks while data is received Blinks while the machine is accessing the hard disk fax memory or USB memory general purpose item Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped Displays the Interrupt Copy screen Ends operation logs out on the Administration screen Puts the machine into Low Power Mode Puts the machine into Sleep M
14. Yellow Red Magenta Red Magenta 4 32 Copying Functions Example 1 select Yellow Green amp Blue Magenta and press C to adjust yellow closer to green and blue closer to magenta Example 2 Select Cyan Blue amp Red Yellow and press G to adjust yellow closer to red and blue closer to cyan Press OK Press the Start key Copying begins Copying Functions One touch Image Adjust Adjust images as desired to more vivid or more dull images The items that may be configured are as follows Vivid Dull Sharp Smooth Light Dark Refer to the sample image in Quick Guide to Adjusting Image Quality for examples of the effect of each setting NOTE This feature is used with full color copying This feature can not be used together with Adjusting Density see page 3 8 This feature can not be used together with Color Balance Adjust see page 4 30 4 Select from one of the 6 available One Touch Image Adjust types Multiple selections are not possible Follow the steps below to use One touch Image Adjust 1 Press Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Color Image Quality and then press One touch Image Adjust ee Em 4 Select the image One touch Image Adjust 5 Press O K FESSES Rd SS 202E Place original E 10 10 2008 10 10 6 Press the Start key Copying begins 4 33 Copying Functions Sharpness Adjust Adjust the sharpness of ima
15. ccc ee as 5 14 mage QUAY orara cancers coin cana cuee aaa he aes ease bee eden aesa ban see aenes a 5 16 Adjusting Density 0 0 eee eee eens 5 17 Scan INCSOIUNON a aaa erre Pa ido boone S4 Au st eaeut geese PU qp NEA US UNS ES d RE 5 18 Iz T R T c 5 19 Background Density Adjustment 2 0 0 0 0 00 cc ee ee eee 5 20 Color Grayscale Black and White Selection 0 0 0 0 ec eee 5 21 COMMMNUGUS Dads sa uud 295 ReUIOIITAPESIUd e 9N SAP GL EUER EFESSS Pad ud ES 0 22 Border ElaS s 6 coc rdc d ES Edo ded iid dd dut Rodeo deed eteeeaseneseeoe d 5 23 Enter Document Name File Name 0 0 00 ee ee ee eens 5 25 Enter E mail Subject and Body 0 0 eee ee eens 5 26 Proc 20 cee acuead he eee eee eaee s Sone Fo gees eegs ee de aed ne oe ee es He Ge 5 27 Job Finish Notice 2 5 29 SONG ANG HM cages 6 nad eS aye ee ces ek aoe oe cee esa bea Ra PIESJNEU Benen x 5 30 OPERATION GUIDE lii Contents 10 11 SCNG ANG MOM M UETPUPTITMT 5 30 FTP Encrypted p tec 5 31 COO TYPO rrr 5 31 About Color Profiles 0 0 0 0 000 ee rs 5 32 Document Box usinga Custom BOX a3 tre 2nd cmePmrziveuudeceveg d bePd en eP SPOr AG PRX pq ere pee ene 6 2 Using a Job BOX iss ze mm komm Ee bep EE GREC RETRO E REGE A Rar teed dd 6 12 Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory
16. 8 76 e AppleTalk Setup 8 76 e WSD Scan Setup 8 76 e WSD Print Setup 8 77 e Secure Protocol 8 77 e IPSec Setting 8 79 LAN Interface Setup 8 79 Checking Host Name Check the host name of the machine Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Network Check the host name displayed under Host Name TCP IP IPv4 Setup Set up TCP IP to connect to the Windows network Refer to TCP IP IPv4 Setup by Entering IP Addresses on page 2 13 about the procedures TCP IP IPv6 Setup Set up TCP IP IPv6 to connect to the network The default settings are TCP IP Protocol On TCP IP IPv6 Off Use the procedure below Press the System Menu key Press System Next of Network and then Next of TCP IP Setting Press Change of TCP IP Press On and then press OK Press Next of IPv6 Press Change of IPv6 Press On P Address Link Local appears Press OK O ON OO Oo PP W ND After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 72 8 73 Default Setting System Menu Manual Setting IPv6 Manually specify the IP address prefix length and gateway address of TCP IP IPv6 The manual setting is available when selecting On for TCP IP IPv6 Use the procedure below 1 a fF c N Press the System Me
17. AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA LUOKAN 3B LASERSATEILYLLE ALA KATSO SATEESEEN Wi mAB m FART RSA RCE TRA H i o GS PERE BARKER HATERA REN aa FEE RAH AH CLASS 3B 74 HOSS AW sels MS cCRM lt 495 Z23BL V HMCET P LeBERIcD MNEWE lt EAL Do not incinerate toner and toner container Dangerous sparks may cause burn CAUTION EXTREMELY HOT SURFACE id contact VORSICHT SEHR HEISSE OBERFLACHE PRECAUCION SUPERFICIE SUMAMENTE SUPERFICE ESTREMAMENTE CALDA CALIENTE Evitare il contatto ATTENTION BHAMAHME SURFACE TRES CHAUDE loeepxHocrb oueHb ropnuan He norparwaarbcn CAUTELA UE Az 31523 D p High temperature inside Do not touch parts in this area NOTE Do not remove these labels because there is a danger of getting burned IX Installation Precautions Environment A CAUTION Avoid placing the machine on or in locations which are unstable or not level Such locations may cause the machine fall down or fall over This type of situation presents a danger of personal injury or damage S to the machine Avoid locations with humidity or dust and dirt If dust or dirt become attached to the power plug clean the plug to avoid the danger of fire or electrical shock Avoid locations near radiators heaters or other heat sources or locations near flammable items to avoid the danger of fire S To keep the machine cool and facilitate changing of
18. FAX RX data output can be specified when the optional fax kit is installed Use the procedure below to select the output tray 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings and then Next of Paper Output 3 Press Change of Copy Custom Box Printer or FAX Port 1 or FAX Port 2 NOTE FAX Port 1 appears when the optional fax kit is installed If you have 2 optional fax kits installed Fax Port 2 appears You can specify the output tray for the second kit Dual FAX 4 Select Output Tray For Finisher Tray Tray B Tray C or Tray 1 to Tray 7 select Face Up print surface up or Face Down print surface down as the paper orientation at output Press OK When selecting Face Up print surface up as the paper orientation at output press Page Order with Face Up and then select the order of the output pages from Ascending or Descending NOTE Selecting Descending accelerates the starting time of copying 7 When changing the output tray of Copy Custom Box move to the copy or document box screen and press the Reset key 8 14 Default Setting System Menu Orientation Confirmation Select whether to display a screen for selecting the orientation of the originals to be placed on the platen when using the following functions For more information refer to page 4 9 for Original Orientation Duplex e Memo mode Margin Centering originals e Page numbering Border erase e Booklets Combine mode
19. For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 Select the application you want to check the details of and press Detail You can now view detailed information on the selected application Accessibility Display Enlarged Touch Panel Display Touch panel characters and key displays can be enlarged Use the numeric keys to select items and proceed to the next screen NOTE Accessibility can be used only with Copying and Sending registered on the Quick Setup screen To set functions other than those displayed in the accessibility screens you must return to the original display Press the Accessibility Display key again Press the Accessibility Display key when in the Copy or Send i e the Copy or Send key indicator is On Accessibilit Display d p Ready to copy Copies Enlarged keys or characters appear on the touch panel 1 Operation can also be made by pressing any numeric key corresponding to the number displayed e g Press the 2 key to adjust zoom P em Follow the instructions on the screen for subsequent operations gt gt 2 sided 10 10 2008 10 10 8 84 9 Maintenance This chapter describes cleaning and toner replacement Wiki iE Toner Container and Waste Toner Box Replacement 9 1 Maintenance Cleaning Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum output quality CAUTION For safet
20. IP Address An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the network The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots e g 192 168 110 171 Each number should be between 0 and 255 IPP IPP Internet Printing Protocol is a standard that uses TCP IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be sent between remote computers and printers IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view websites and enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations It also supports the HTTP authentication mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption Appendix 29 KPDL Kyocera Page Description Language Kyocera s PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3 Multi Purpose MP Tray The paper supply tray on the right side of the machine Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto envelopes Hagaki transparencies or labels NetBEUI NetBIOS Extended User Interface An interface developed by IBM in 1985 as an update from NetBIOS It enables more advanced functions on smaller networks than other protocols such as TCP IP etc It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of routing capabilities to choose the most appropriate routes NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS 2 and Microsoft for its Windows as a standard protocol for file
21. NOTE If Removable Memory is recognized Displaying files appears press No 2 Press the System Menu key 3 Press v and then Application NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password aa Press Add 5 Select the application to be installed and press Install You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing Detail 6 When the confirmation screen appears press Yes Installation of the application begins Depending on the application being installed the installation may take some time Once the installation ends the original screen reappears To install another application repeat steps 5 to 6 To remove the USB memory press Remove Memory and wait until the Removable Memory can be safely removed message appears Then remove the USB memory 8 69 Default Setting System Menu Activating Deactivating Application To use an application set the application to Activate Use the procedure below to start using an application 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press v and then Application NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For thi
22. Press to increase the value from O0 to 9 To decrease press By pressing the value changes from O to alphabetic letters going from A to To move in the reverse direction press You cannot use the numeric keys to enter these values Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter the registration values for each chart Press Execute after all values have been entered Color registration begins 10 Press OK after color registration is complete Color Calibration Cycle After Auto Clear has been activated or during printing or while processing Color Registration Performing Color Calibration Remaining 50 seconds may be displayed While this message is displayed the machine makes adjustments to maintain image quality Wait until the message disappears oet the color calibration cycle here The setting items are as follows E INI Automatically sets the cycle for color calibration sets the cycle for color calibration Short R BMI a short color calibration cycle and increases the number of times performed with priority to image quality Standard Sets a standard color calibration cycle compromising between image quality and downtime for processing Long Sets a long color calibration cycle and decreases the number of times performed to ensure minimal downtime 8 50 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to set the color calibration 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press
23. Press OK Press the Start key to start copying Copying Functions Output Destination You can use the procedure below to select an output destination such as the optional document finisher for your copies NOTE Optional output destinations include the job separator document finisher 3 000 sheet document finisher and mailbox The table below shows the available output destinations Top tray Top tray of the machine where copies are stored Finisher Tray Tray of the optional document finisher Tray A Tray B Tray C Trays A to C in the optional 3 000 sheet document finisher Job Separator Tray Optional job separator Tray 1 to 7 Trays 1 to 7 in the optional mailbox tray 1 is the top tray i Copy output orientation can be selected either as face up print facing up or face down print facing down NOTE To change default destination for copies refer to Paper Output on page 8 14 for details Use the procedure below to select the output destination 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Org Paper Finishing and then Paper Output Ready to copy Ium 4 Select the output destination for finished copies Paper Output When you select Finisher Tray Tray B Tray C or Tray 1 to Tray 7 select the orientation of output copy Face Up print facing up or Face Down print facing down E 5 Press OK m s fe 6 Press the Start key to start copying 10
24. Was the USB memory Format the USB memory with this formatted with a machine machine other than this machine Is the USB host blocked Select Unblock in the USB host 8 80 settings Check that the USB memory is securely plugged into the machine When displaying an Have you selected Select a scan resolution other than image sent from the 200x100dpi Normal or 200x100dpi Normal or 200x400dpi machine on the PC an 200x400dpi Super Fine for Super Fine when sending an image size is shrunk the scan resolution vertically or horizontally USB memory not Check that the USB memory recognized is securely plugged into the machine Perform Gray Over long periods of use the Whenever the printed hues differ Adjustment in the effects of the ambient from the original document or System Menu is temperature and humidity image carry out Gray Adjustment displayed can cause color output hues to vary slightly Performing Color The machine is carrying outa This is not a fault Resume Calibration appears calibration process to ensure continuous copying when the during continuous color stability calibration process ends copying and copying stops White or colorstreaks The inside of the machine Carry out Laser Scanner Cleaning 8 53 appear on prints may be dirty 10 5 Troubleshooting Responding to Error Messages If the touch panel displays any of these messages follow the corresponding procedure Alphanumeric
25. Zoom 100 10 10 2008 Destination Cancel d Sending Size Selection OK 10 10 2008 10 10 When you have selected Size Entry press or to set the sizes of X horizontal and Y vertical By pressing Keys you can use the numeric keys 5 Press OK 10 10 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending Select the sending size the size of image to be sent The table below lists the sizes Standard Select from Same oizes 1 as Original Size or Standard Size Standard Select from Sizes 2 standard size except Standard Sizes 1 Inch models Same as Original Size Ledger Legal Letter Statement 8 5x13 5 Oficio Il 11x15 Metric models Same as Original Size A3 B4 A4 B5 A5 B6 A6 Folio Metric models Ledger Legal Letter Statement 8 5x13 5 Oficio Il 11x15 8K 16K Sending Functions Relationship between Original Size Sending Size and Zoom Original Size page 5 2 Sending Size and Zoom page 5 5 are related to each other Refer to the following Original Size and the size you wish to send as are Original Size opecify as opecify as necessary necessary table sending Size oelect Sameas Select the Original required size Zoom Select 100 Select Auto or Auto NOTE When you select Sending Size that is different from Original Size and select the Zoom 100 you can send the image as the actual
26. sends the image data of scanned originals to the desired recipient as a file attached to an E mail message Network Send SMB Saves the scanned image as a data file on your PC Network FAX Network Network Option Send FTP Sends the scanned image as a data file on the FTP TWAIN Scannin FAX Option a Network WIA Scanning TWAIN and WIA are standardized interface for communication between software applications and image acquisition devices Network Preparation before Use Preparing Necessary Cables The following interfaces are available to connect the equipment to a PC Prepare the necessary cables according to the interface you use Available Standard Interfaces Printer Scanner Network interface LAN 10Base T or Network FAX eid TX Shielded Printer USB interface USB2 0 compatible cable Hi Speed USB compliant Max 5 0 m Shielded Function available when using optional fax kit For details on Network FAX refer to the Fax Kit Operation Guide Preparation before Use Connecting Cables Connecting LAN Cable Optional Follow the steps below to connect a LAN cable to the machine 1 When the machine is powered up first press the Power key on the operation panel Check that the Power indicator and the memory indicator are off After this turn off the main power switch 0000G QO OOO P I0 000GOlh Check that the indicators are off 2
27. 2 0000 eee eens 6 20 Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB 0 0 0 0 00 ee 6 22 Status Job Cancel Checking JOD Stall 2229 2 Y iaaa P Ra qu qid mre pip bw Se he omui us Ou Ed Each sees pde 7 2 Checking Job History 0 0 ee eee eee eens 7 9 sending the Log History 0 0 cc eee eee eas 7 11 Pause and Resumption of Jobs 0 0 en eee ene 7 13 Canceling OFJ00S is wi zur Pere uurs ye dee RE RESI ESI dees ELR D a ted band FEE 7 13 Priority Override for Waiting Jobs ee eens 7 14 Reordering Print JODS 2 23624 c205eetd eed eddedasene See Had be eet bhwe ee Secu Kew alee 7 14 Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper 0 0 00 eee eee eee 7 15 Device Communication a na aaa ce ee hans 7 16 Default Setting System Menu Common Settings 1 0 0 0 ee ee eee 8 2 COPY SEIS x 4224 c wEERUBTS VS BEER gta we cess toes eens eo bee be ee EAS PP 8 27 sending SettingS 2 0 6 eee eee eee ena 8 30 Document Box Settings 0 0 0 ce eee eee eens 8 33 Printer Settings 0 0 0 nh 8 35 Printing Reports Sending Notice 0 0 een eee eens 8 41 Adjustment Maintenance 0 0 0 ee ee ee eee eee ees 8 44 Dale Hel 434565 a5 64 520 bonceas anne es oreo eees sors oe NSORTPESTeT QUEUE TP EE 8 55 Editing Destination Address Book Adding One Touch Keys 000 000 e eevee 8 60 Internet Browser Setup 0 0 eee ee hrs 8 67 ApPPICAIONS a eeraa does beeen E
28. 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Advanced Setup and then File Name Entry e Ready to send Destination 1 4 Press File Name Place original File Name Entry i Add a file name Additional information such as Job No and Date and Time can also be set File Name doc Additional Info amp Date and Time Add Shortcut Cancel d OK us 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Enter the document name and press OK NOTE Up to 32 characters can be entered for the document name 6 Press Job No to enter the job No and Date and Time to enter the date and time 7 Press OK 8 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending 5 25 Sending Functions Enter E mail Subject and Body When sending E mail enter the subject and body of the E mail Use the procedure below to enter the subject and body for an E mail message and then send the E mail 1 Press the Send key 2 Press Advanced Setup and then E mail Subject Body el Ready to send Destination 1 3 Press Subject Place original E mail Subject Body FAEERE Place original 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Enterthe subject and press OK NOTE Up to 60 characters can be entered for the subject 5 Press Body 6 Enter the body and press OK NOTE Up to 500 characters can be entered for the body 7 Press OK 8 Specify the destination and press the Start key to s
29. B4 8K 100 sheets Letter Letter R Statement R A4 A4R B5 BSR A5 ASR 16K 16KR 200 sheets Letter Statement R A4 B5 A5 A5R 16K 50 sheets Supported Paper Stapling 90 g m or less Weight Maximum Sheets A3 B4 Ledger Legal Oficio Il 8 5x13 5 Folio 8K 30 sheets for Stapling A4 A4 R B5 Letter Letter R 16K 50 sheets Paper weight 90 g m or less Dimensions 27 1 2 x 22 9 16 x 42 13 16 W x D x H 687 x 573 x 1087mm Weight 121 3 Ibs or less 55 kg or less Appendix 24 Job Separator option s M Maximum Sheets 100 sheets 80 g m Paper Size Ledger Legal Oficio Il 8 5x13 5 Letter Letter R Executive Executive R Statement R A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R Folio 8K 16K 16K R Paper Type Paper weight 60 163 g m Paper type plain recycled color vellum Dimensions 22 29 64 x 22 29 64 x 9 26 64 W x D x H 570 x 570 x 240 mm 5 1 Ibs or less 2 3 kg or less Appendix 25 Environmental Specifications 25 25 ppm model and 30 30 ppm model Description 25 25 ppm model 30 30 ppm model Nose emission During copying Black amp White 66 2 dB A Lwad 67 1 dB A Lwad Color 66 4 dB A Lwad 67 0 dB A Lwad Power During copying Black amp White 710 W or less 730 W or less consumption 120V 120V 760 W or less 790 W or less 230V 230V Color 800 W or less 810 W or less 120V 120V 860 W or less 870 W or less 230V 230V D
30. Border Erase 10 10 2008 10 10 Destination Ready to send Place original t Border Erase a igi 1 x Border E Place original Li pu rase E a f fea Sie Erase TENUES gas Individual Border Erase Same as Front Page O Back Page Top Edge Top Original Orientation 1 2 3 4 0 24 Press the Send key Place the originals on the platen Press Advanced Setup and then Border Erase Press Border Erase Sheet to erase borders for an individual sheet or Border Erase Book to erase borders for a book Use or to enter the width in Border or Gutter Press Keys to use the number keys for entry Press Individual Border Erase to select the individual border erase Use or to enter the border width or press Keys and enter the width using the numeric keys Press Original Orientation to select the original orientation from either Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left and press OK For 2 sided originals press Back Page and then press Same as Front Page or Do Not Erase Press OK Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending Sending Functions Enter Document Name File Name This setting allows you to assign a document name to scanned images You can specify a default for the document name Use the procedure below to assign names to scanned documents that you are sending 1 Press the Send key
31. Cardstock Color Colour Prepunched Letterhead Thick Coated Envelope High Quality Custom 1 to 8 Paper Size Cassette Maximum 11 x 17 A3 Duplex 11 x 17 A3 1 2 Minimum 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A5R Duplex 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A5R Multi Purpose Maximum 11 x 17 A3 Tray Minimum 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A6R Zoom Level Manual mode 25 to 40096 196 increments Auto mode Preset Zoom Appendix 18 OL a Black and White copying Printing Speed 25 25 ppm model 30 30 ppm model 40 40 ppm model 50 40 ppm model 55 50 ppm model First Print Black and Time White A4 feed from Cassette A4 Letter A4 R Letter R A3 Ledger B4 Legal B5 A4 Letter A4 R Letter R A3 Ledger B4 Legal B5 A4 Letter A4 R Letter R A3 Ledger B4 Legal B5 A4 Letter A4 R Letter R A3 Ledger B4 Legal B5 When the Document Finisher is not installed 25 sheets min 17 sheets min 13 sheets min 13 sheets min 25 sheets min 30 sheets min 20 sheets min 15 sheets min 15 sheets min 30 sheets min 40 sheets min 27 sheets min 19 sheets min 19 sheets min 40 sheets min 50 sheets min 33 sheets min 25 sheets min 25 sheets min 50 sheets min Full color copying 25 sheets min 17 sheets min 13 sheets min 13 sheets min 25 sheets min 30 sheets min 20 sheets min 15 sheets min 15 sheets min 30 sheets min 40 sheets min 2 sheets min 19 sheets min 19 sheets min 40 sheets min 40 sheets min 2 sheets min 19 sheets min 19 sheets min 40 sheets
32. Checkpoints Corrective Actions ioi Acceptable staple Is the acceptable staple Press Continue to print without count exceeded count exceeded For stapling details refer to Press Cancel to cancel the job Specifications on page Appendix 24 aa paper in cassette Is the indicated cassette out Load paper of paper Add paper in Multi Is the paper of the selected Load the paper in the multi purpose Purpose tray size loaded in the multi tray which is of the size and type purpose tray indicated on the touch panel Add staples Has any of the document If the staples are depleted the finisher run out of staples machine will stop and the location of staple depletion will be indicated on the touch panel Leave the machine on and follow the instruction to replace the staple case Press Continue to print without stapling Press Cancel to cancel the job Add toner S Replace the toner container 9 8 Box is not found This job is canceled because the specified box cannot be found Press Box limit exceeded Document box is full and no further storage is available Job is canceled Press End Repeat Copy box is full and no further repeat copy Is available Press Continue to print scanned Press Cancel to cancel the job Cannot connect to An error has occurred when Authentication connecting to the authentication Server server Refer to Responding to Authentication Server Connection Error for the
33. Press to delete a character to the left of the cursor 5 Keyboard Press a character to enter Press a character to enter character to enter auen a 0 L a iuum Pmweibentrsumbeend yMho 9 Space Press to insert a space o Appendix 7 No Display Key Description 10 Cancel Press to cancel entered characters and return to the screen before the entry 11 OK Press to finalize entry and return to the screen before the entry Upper case Letter Entry Screen Use the keyboard to enter Limit 128 characters dedi do d dC tdi eje dodo do du Lower case No Symbol Space Cancel 10 10 2008 10 10 Number Symbol Entry Screen Use the keyboard to enter Limit 128 characters AGREES F3 ES EN JF SILI IEICE ICI CICIC JL Upper case Lower case Space Le Je x tatus 10 10 2008 10 10 pe mente 12 L Vbhv To enter a number or symbol not shown in the keyboard press the cursor key and scroll the screen to view other numbers or symbols to enter Appendix 8 Entering Characters Follow the steps shown below to enter List A 1 for example 1 Press Upper case 2 Press L The letter L is shown on the display Use the keyboard to enter Limit 128 characters L Input 1 character NEXEXRER En jeu CES E EE IER UE ES E EN EA E ES EA EA O E A A a a E154 D Ed d A F3 ES ETUR ICI C
34. Use the procedure below to set the default EcoPrint setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings s Next of Function Defaults N twice and then Change of EcoPrint 3 Select Off or On for the default 4 Press OK PDF TIFF JPEG Image am Select the default PDF TIFF JPEG file quality Five options are available from 1 Low Quality High Comp to 5 High Quality Low Comp NOTE Higher quality will make the stored files larger Refer to page 5 12 for file formats Use the procedure below to select the default file quality setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v and Next of Function Defaults Press v twice and then Change of PDF TIFF JPEG Image 3 Select the default image quality from 1 Low Quality to 5 High Quality Press OK 8 23 Default Setting System Menu High Comp PDF Image Select the default quality setting for high compressed PDF files The table below shows the available settings dM Compression Ratio Priority Compression Ratio is given priority with smaller file size Standard Standard quality Quality Priority Image quality is given priority with larger file size Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for highly compressed PDF files 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v and Next of Function Defaults Press s twice and Change of High Comp PDF Image 3 Select the defa
35. Yellow Toner Container Yellow Toner Container Release Lever Black Toner Container Black Cleaning Brush Waste Toner Box Waste Toner Tray Release button Part Names 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 32 31 37 38 Top Tray USB Memory Slot A1 Paper Feed Unit Cover Paper Feed Unit Green Knob Paper Width Adjusting Tab Paper Length Guide Handles Multi Purpose Tray Paper Width Guide Option Interface Slot OPT2 USB Port A2 Network Interface Connector USB Interface Connector B1 Option Interface Slot OPT1 Main Power Switch 1 6 39 Part Names 41 2 Preparation before Use This chapter explains the preparations before using this equipment for the first time as well as the procedures for loading paper and originals e Check the Accessories uisasaseibora sent reda bd IS a Eat la dux E UP EEOF ERN MER PME 2 2 e Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables 2 3 e IIBBecgDg CADOS ee REEL ere RATES ee ee 2 5 di 29 9 2 7 e Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode 2 9 dii 0 025 o fm 2 10 e Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle esses 2 11 e Switching the Language for Display Languagel 2 11 e Setting Date SPOTS ssipiee xor des sehe uii oPIVEESEHENHITR DX LER IPs RRMIQU n DOE 2 12 e Network Setup LAN Cable Connection
36. ange 10 10 2008 10 10 7 Follow steps 5 and 6 above to enter the Account ID NOTE Any account ID that has already registered cannot be used Enter any other account ID 8 Activate or deactivate restriction Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11 18 9 Press Register to add a new account on the Account List 11 16 Management Managing Accounts This changes the registered account information or deletes the account Use the procedure below to manage accounts Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 Press Next of Job Accounting Setting and then Register Edit of Accounting List 5 Select an account to change or delete User Login Job Accounting Accounting List i Register an account that is permitted to use this machine Maximum 1000 NOTE Select Name or ID from the Sort pull down menu to sort the account names duis M NEN ie NR Press Search Name or Search ID to search by 03 Account EE e m account name or account ID 01 Account 00001000 amp amp 04 Account 00004000 05 Account 00005000 The procedure differs depending o
37. by destination E mail Folder SMB FTP FAX i FAX or Group FAX Only when the optional fax kit is installed i FAX Only when the optional internet fax kit is installed You can set this function up so that destination types are selected when the address book is displayed For more information refer to Narrow Down Settings on page 8 66 The procedures for using the different search modes are explained below Search by name Press Search Name and enter the required name Search by address number Press Search No and enter the address number you wish to search Advanced search by initial letter Press the key for the required initial letter Advanced search by destination Press any of E mail Folder FAX i FAX or Group The destinations registered by that type are displayed 3 31 Choosing by One Touch Key 4 Ready to send Place original Destination Detail ABCD abcd efg com TUVW 10 200 188 120 Choosing by Speed Dial 4 Ready to send Place original Destination Detail ABCD abcd efg com TUVW 10 200 188 120 Groupi Groupi On Hook Direct Chain Detail Edit Delete 0001 0002 0003 0004 AAA BBB CCC DDD 0006 0007 0008 0009 FFF GGG HHH II Destination Quick Setup Original Sending Col Data Format Image Quality Destination WSD Scan w Advanced Setup 08 08 2009 10 10 Destination Address
38. details The operations available in the preview screen are shown below When you have zoomed in you can use these keys to move the displayed area In multiple page documents Sn EEE can change pages by entering the desired page number u i Iul onong deve be my Badd Ofte and Ps Wy kerh mea mmm bd LA sso n multiple page documents you can use these buttons to change pages a 1 2 Vue q 98 2009 10 10 Zoom out Zoom in 3 When you have finished previewing documents or checking document details press Close 3 39 Basic Operation User Privileges When user login administration is enabled accessibility to the Document Box components will vary depending on the given user privilege Accessibilities vary depending on user privilege as follows Access level I Accessibility Administrator NM Operation number password to a box password to a box Box information BM capacity permission period of using a Restricting the Accessibility to a Box The accessibility to a Custom Box differs depending on the level of privileges as follows Administrator An administrator can gain access and manipulate all boxes User A user can gain access and manipulate his her own boxes and the shared boxes 3 40 Basic Operation Password Entry Requirement When user login administration is enabled requirement of a password differs depending on the level of privileges as foll
39. http www kyoceramita com gpl for more information on how to make GPL applied codes available Open SSL License Copyright c 1998 2006 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in
40. in the basic send screen g Ready to send Destination 2 Inthe number entry screen use the numeric keys aee 1 to enter the speed dial number Destination Detail B A OFFICE 1234567890 3 1 E If you entered speed dial number between 1 and 3 Enter One Touch key number ani digits long press the Enter key or OK using keys Folder Path 0001 1000 e En Born FAX No The specified destination appears in the Entry destination list ook mail try pem o Addr Entry WSD Scan i e NOTE If you enter a 4 digit speed dial number the Data Format Image Quality aed operation in step 3 can be omitted The basic send screen appears and the specified destination appears in the destinations list Basic Operation Touch Panel Display Display for Originals and Paper The touch panel displays the selected paper source and output tray Press Start key to start printing Copies Press Cancel to change settings Original position 9 Shortcut 1 Output z EI tray H Shortcut 2 P TAPAT Shortcut 3 ESI mne Auto Normal 0 Size orientation of O Shortcut 4 Pai A EU Pape f JU Densi original and paper TERRA NA A pe Density Zoom 100 Paper A4 2 sided Off Ru 2 sided Quick Setup Org Paper Color Layout Edit Advanced Finishing Image Quality Setup Shortcut 5 Shortcut 6 Status 10 10 2008 10 10
41. n m m The Copying screen appears in the touch panel during 100 2 sided printing 9 2 sided 9 Collate Top BageTop 00000 OO 1 Press the Stop key or Cancel Top Tray cem J eineseve vex The current print job is cancelled 10 10 2008 10 10 3 42 Quick Setup Screen Basic Operation In the initial screen for copying and sending the screen which appears immediately after the Copy or Send key is first pressed after power on important and generally often used functions are registered from among the versatile functions of this machine This initial screen is called Quick Setup Screen Registration of functions in the Quick Setup Screen can be adjusted to suit your work environment for better efficiency Functions Available for Registration in the Quick Setup Screen Default registrations and the functions available for registration are as follows Default Registration Functions Available for Registration Copying sending Paper Selection Zoom Density Duplex Combine Staple Punch Zoom Scan Resolution FAX TX Resolution Density 2 sided Book Original File Format 3 43 Paper Selection Zoom Density Duplex Combine Staple Punch Original Orientation Collate Offset Color Selection Original Image Original Size Continuous Scan Zoom Scan Resolution FAX TX Resolution Density 2 sided Book Original File Format Original Size sendin
42. select the paper size Basic Layout Finishing Imaging Publishing Job Advanced Paper PE Page Sizes To print on the special paper such as thick paper or CF Source Auto source selection v transparency click the Media Type menu and Media type Auto media selection select the media type Destination Printer default Y Orientation Portrait Rotated A C Landscape Copies Number of copies E cx RY v Collate Print on both sides 4X KYOCERA Restore Defaults Abou Profie 7 Click Source and select the paper source NOTE If you choose Auto Select paper is supplied automatically from the paper source loaded with paper of optimum size and type To print on special paper such as envelope or thick paper place it on the multi purpose tray and select MP Tray 8 Select paper orientation either Portrait or Landscape to match the orientation of the document Selecting Rotate 180 will print the document rotated 180 9 Click OK button to return to the Print dialog box 10 Click OK button to start printing 3 23 Basic Operation Sending This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment to an E mail message or to a PC linked to the network In order to do this it is necessary to register the sender and destination recipient address on the network A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required It is recommended t
43. the default login user name and password 4 Press Next of Job Accounting Setting and Check of Each Job Accounting _ User Login Job Accounting Each Job Accounting 5 Select the accou nt to check the cou nt i Maintain a separate counter for each account department Sort Name v A 91911 NOTE Select Name or ID from the Sort pull down menu to sort the account names Press Search Name or Search ID to search by account name or account ID amp amp 06 Account 6 Press Detail 10 10 2008 10 10 11 24 Management TET 7 Press Check at the function to check the count mm umm The results will be displayed FAX Transmission Pages FAX Transmission Time 8 Confi m th e COU nt a n d press Close i 2 20 0 00 10 9 Press Execute of Counter Reset to reset the counter 10 Press Yes on the screen to confirm the reset The Counter Reset Execute counter will be reset 10 10 2008 10 10 Counting by Paper Size This counts the number of pages by paper size e g Letter NOTE Paper size is available in five types 1 to 5 These types are specified in accounting reports Refer to Printing an Accounting Report on page 11 26 In addition to paper size media type can also be specified e g count the letter size color paper used If no media type is specified usage is counted for all media types of that size Use the procedure below to count the number of pages 1 Pr
44. to center the original image on the paper Press Original Orientation to choose orientation of the originals either Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left Then press OK Press OK Press the Start key to start copying 4 15 Copying Functions Border Erase Use Border Erase to remove black shadows that appear around the outside of the original when making copies The following options can be selected Border Erase Sheet Erases black borders around the single sheet original Original Border Erase Book Erases black borders around the edges and in the middle of the original such as a thick book You can specify the widths individually to erase the borders around the edges and in the center of the book Original Individual Border Erase opecify border erase widths individually for all edges BEN Original In each option the available ranges are as below Input units Border Erase Range Inch Models 0 to 2 in 0 01 increments Metric Models 0 mm to 50 mm in 1 mm increments NOTE To specify the default width value of Border Erase refer to Border Erase Default on page 8 21 for details 4 16 Border Erase to Back Page Copying Functions When scanning a 2 sided original this allows you to erase the borders on the back of the original The table below shows the available settings Same as Front Border Erase performed using the same setting Page as the front page Do Not
45. 06 to change or delete 3 To edit a shortcut press Change to change the shortcut button number and name and press OK and then Register Choose Yes in the confirmation screen to change the shortcut To delete the shortcut press Delete this Shortcut Choose Yes in the confirmation screen to delete the shortcut 3 48 Basic Operation Using the Internet Browser This section explains how to use the Internet browser NOTE To use the internet browser internet browser must be set to On in nternet Browser Setting on page 8 67 Launching and Exiting the Browser ca Use the procedure below to launch and exit the Internet browser 1 Press the Application key The application list screen appears S Application 2 Press Internet Browser ta Lo Internet Browser The Internet browser starts up 10 10 2008 10 10 3 Use the browser screen to browse web pages For information on how to use the browser screen refer to Using the Browser Screen on page 3 50 4 To exit the browser press X Close and then press Yes in the exit confirmation screen The application list screen reappears NOTE You can specify preferences such as the way the Internet browser screen is displayed For details refer to Internet Browser Setup page 8 67 3 49 Basic Operation Using the Browser Screen The operations available in the Internet browser screen are shown below Search box Pressing the text box display
46. 1 2 Remove the jammed paper See gt Hi 7 un 3 Pullout cassette 1 10 16 Troubleshooting 4 Remove the jammed paper If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine 5 Push cassette 1 back in place securely 6 Press the specified position to close left cover 1 Cassette 2 Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassette 2 1 Open left cover 3 2 Remove the jammed paper 10 17 Troubleshooting 3 Pullout cassette 2 4 Remove the jammed paper If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine 5 Push cassette 2 back in place securely 6 Close left cover 3 Optional Cassettes 3 and 4 Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassettes 3 or 4 when using the optional paper feeder 1 Open left cover 4 2 Remove the jammed paper If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine 10 18 Troubleshooting 3 Pullout the cassette in use 4 Remove the jammed paper 5 Push the cassette back in place securely 6 Close left cover 4 Multi Purpose Tray Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the multi purpose tray 1 Remove all papers from the multi purpose tray 2 Ifpaperis jammed inside pull the paper toward you to remove 10 19 Troubleshooting Pull up left cover 1 lever and open the left cover 1 C9 4 Remove the jammed paper
47. 1 NVR Ts SN RO ERREENERT 8 80 e Security Level Security Level setting 8 81 amp Docume urd GON NET eens tee ne nee mene nen eer eterna ae 8 81 Ray I OS cs aa reentcsrsnsscomesanaevctertaitanareacsacseoseerpaesienennsere 8 83 e Accessibility Display Enlarged Touch Panel Display 8 84 8 1 Common Settings Common settings include owitching the Language for Display Language Default Screen 8 2 oound 8 3 Original Paper Settings 8 4 owitching Unit of Measurement 8 11 Error Handling 8 12 Paper Output 8 14 Orientation Confirmation 8 15 Settings for Color Toner Empty Action 8 15 Function Defaults 8 15 Default Setting System Menu 8 2 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Switching the Language for Display Language Select the language displayed on the touch panel Use the procedure below to select the language 1 2 3 4 Press the System Menu key Press Common Settings and then Change of Language Press the key for the language you want to use Press OK The touch panel language will be changed Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start up default screen The options are as follows The table below lists the available screens E a a The Copy screen the screen shown when the
48. 1 to Custom 4 on which you wish to register the size 1 2 3 4 Press On and then press or numeric keys to enter X horizontal and Y vertical dimensions 5 Press OK 6 Move to the copy send or document box screen and press the Reset key Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print Set up a maximum of four frequently used custom paper sizes The custom size options are displayed on the screen to select paper set in the multi purpose tray The table below lists the sizes that can be registered Inch models H 5 83 to 17 in 0 01 increments V 3 86 to 11 69 in 0 01 increments Metric models H 148 to 432 mm in 1 mm increments V 98 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments Default Setting System Menu Up to four custom paper sizes can be added oelect media type for each paper size Media type Plain Transparency Rough Vellum Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Thick Envelope Coated High Quality Custom 1 8 NOTE Refer to Paper Weight on page 8 7 for Custom 1 8 for media type Use the procedure below to select a custom paper size and media type Press the System Menu key Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings and then Next of Custom Paper Size Press Change of any one of Custom 1 to Custom 4 on which you want to register the size Press On and then press or numeric keys to enter X horizontal and Y vertical
49. 4 Press OK File Separation Select the default file separation setting The available default settings are shown below Ee Mm No file separation performed all the pages are compiled in one file Each Page Each scanned page is created into a separate file NOTE Refer to page 5 13 for file separation Use the procedure below to select the default file separation am 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults and then Change of File Separation 3 Select the default for Off or Each Page Press OK Density oet the default density The available default settings are shown below loo Manual Normal 0 oet to Normal 0 in the Manual density NOTE You cannot specify the density if you have selected Full Color Auto Color Color Gray or Grayscale in Color Select Send Store Use the procedure below to select the default density 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults N and then Change of Density 3 Select the default density 4 Press OK 8 19 Default Setting System Menu Zoom Select the enlarged reduced default when paper size sending size changed after the originals set The available default settings are shown below ee 100 Copy send save at actual size 100 Auto Automatically reduce or enlarge the originals to match paper size sending size Use the proce
50. 5353 is left open so that Bonjour will run correctly Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets If Bonjour does not run stably check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets are accepted If you install Bonjour on Windows XP service Pack 2 or later the Windows firewall will be set up correctly for Bonjour Default Gateway This indicates the device such as a computer or router that serves as the entrance exit gateway for accessing computers outside the network that you are on When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP address data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP that automatically resolves IP addresses subnet masks and gateway addresses on a TCP IP network DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large number of client computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being assigned Appendix 28 DHCP IPv6 DHCP IPv6 is the next generation of the Internet s Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and supports IPv6 It extends the BOOTP startup protocol that defines the protocols used for transferring configuration information to hosts on the network DHCP IPv6 permits the DHCP server to use its expanded functionality to send configuration parameters to an IPv6
51. 6 8 Form Overlay 6 7 Join Documents 6 9 Move Documents 6 8 Printing Documents 6 5 sending Documents 6 6 Storing Documents 6 4 User Privileges 3 40 Date Timer 8 55 Auto Error Clear 8 58 Auto Panel Reset 8 56 Auto Sleep 8 57 Date Format 8 55 Date Time 8 55 Low Power Timer 8 57 Setup 8 55 Time Zone 8 56 Default 8 15 Index 2 Auto Image Rotation 8 22 Border Erase 8 21 Border Erase to Back Page 8 21 Collate Offset 8 22 Color Selection Copy 8 17 Color Selection Send Store 8 18 Color TIFF Compression Settings 8 24 Continuous Scan 8 16 Density 8 19 EcoPrint 8 23 E mail Subject Body 8 20 File Format 8 18 8 19 File Name 8 20 High Comp PDF Image 8 24 JPEG TIFF Print 8 25 Margin 8 22 Original Image 8 17 Original Orientation 8 16 PDF TIFF JPEG Image 8 23 Repeat Copying 8 24 scan Resolution 8 17 XPS Fit to Page 8 26 Zoom 8 20 Default Gateway Appendix 28 Default Screen 8 2 Density Adjustment Copy 3 8 send 5 17 Destination 8 60 Adding 8 60 Adding a contact 8 60 Adding a Group 8 62 Choosing by One Touch Key 3 32 Choosing by Speed Dial 3 32 Choosing from the Address Book 3 30 Editing 8 63 One Touch Key 8 64 Quick No Search key 3 3 search 3 31 sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending 3 32 Device 7 16 Canceling FAX Communication 7 18 Checking Status 7 16 Configuring 7 17 Displaying Screen 7 16 USB Memory 7 17 DHCP Appendix 28 DHCP IPv6 Appendix 29 Document Box 3 33 6 1 Basic Op
52. A5 A50 B50 A46 B5 HA4 Metric models Folio t1 Oficiol 1 3 Close the original cover IMPORTANT Do not push the original cover forcefully when you close it Excessive pressure may crack the platen glass NOTE Shadows may be produced around the edges and in the middle of open faced originals CAUTION Do notleave the document processor open as there is a danger of personal injury 2 33 Preparation before Use Loading Originals in the Document Processor The optional document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals Both sides of two sided originals are scanned Part Names of the Document Processor Original placement indicator 1 2 Top cover 3 Original width guides 4 Original table 5 Original eject table 6 Original stopper 7 Opening handle Originals Supported by the Document Processor The document processor supports the following types of originals Weight 45 to 160 g m duplex 50 to 120 g m Size Maximum A3 to Minimum A5 Maximum Ledger to Minimum Statement R Capacity Plain paper 80 g m Colored paper Recycled paper 100 sheets Mixed size originals 30 sheets Thick paper 120 g m 66 sheets Thick paper 160 g m 50 sheets Art paper 1 sheet High quality paper 110 g m 72 sheets Originals Not Supported by the Document Processor Do not use the
53. Accepted Time of job 3 Type Icons that indicate the job type i Copy job EE m Printer job pE BFAX reception Wi FAX reception pg BE mail reception B Job from Document Box ees MReport List iData from Removable Memory a User Name for the executed job Status Status of job InProcess The status before starting to print Printing Printing Waiting Print Waiting Pause Pausing print job or error Canceling Canceling the job Status Job Cancel Me meme m a7 of Job Type oorts by specific type of job Pause All Print Jobs Pauses all the printing jobs By pressing this key again the printing jobs will be resumed 9 Cancel Select the job to be canceled from the list and press this key 10 Priority Override Select the job to be overridden and press this key Refer to Priority Override for Waiting Jobs on page 7 14 11 Move Up In the list select the job that you want to move up the job queue and press this key Refer to Reordering Print Jobs on page 7 14 12 Detail Select the job for displaying detailed information from the list and press this key Refer to Checking the Detailed Information of Histories on page 7 10 7 4 Status Job Cancel Sending Jobs Status screen Status Status Scheduled Job fon Type v 7 o5 No T Accepted Time Type Job Name ser Name 438 14 47 L abc def com InProcess 1 2 3 4 Cancel Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device _ Paper Sup
54. Appropriate Paper Appendix 12 Auto Selection 8 9 Before Loading 2 20 Cassette 8 5 Checking the Remaining Amount of Paper 7 15 Custom 8 4 Default Paper Source 8 9 Loading Envelopes 2 26 Loading in the Cassettes 2 21 Loading in the Multi Purpose Tray 2 24 Multi Purpose Tray 8 6 Paper Source for Cover Paper 8 10 Setup 8 4 Size and Media 2 28 Appendix 10 Special Paper 8 10 Appendix 14 opecifications Appendix 11 Weight 8 7 Paper Feed Unit 1 6 Paper Feeder Appendix 4 Paper Jam 10 15 Cassette 1 10 16 Cassette 2 10 17 Cassettes 3 and 4 10 18 Document Finisher 10 29 Document Processor 10 28 Duplex Unit 10 23 Duplex Unit and Cassette 1 10 24 Inside the Left Covers 1 2 and 3 10 22 Jam Location Indicators 10 15 Multi Purpose Tray 10 19 Precaution 10 16 Paper Length Guide 2 21 Paper Selection 4 3 Cassette 4 3 Multi Purpose Tray 4 4 Paper Width Guides 2 22 Part Names 1 1 Platen 1 4 Index Placing Originals 2 32 POP3 Appendix 30 POP3 E mail RX Protocol Detail 8 75 Poster 4 26 PostScript Appendix 30 Power Cable Connecting 2 6 Power Off 2 8 Power On 2 7 Power Supply xi PPM Appendix 30 Precautions for Use xii Preparation 2 1 Preparing Cables 2 4 Print Job Reordering 3 43 Printed Document Guard Kit Appendix 6 Printer Setup 8 35 Printer Driver Appendix 30 Printer Settings 8 35 Color Setting 8 36 Copies 8 37 CR Action 8 39 Duplex 8 37 EcoPrint 8 36 Emulation 8 35 Form Feed Timeout 8 38 LF Action 8 39 Orientat
55. Basic Operation Original Preview You can display a preview image of the scanned document on the panel NOTE To view a preview of an image stored in a Custom Box refer to Previewing Documents Checking Document Details on page 3 39 The procedure for previewing scanned originals is explained below The procedure described here is for copying a single page original 1 Press the Copy key and place the original on the platen 2 Press Preview Ready to copy COPIES stp 1 Copy Image Shortcut 1 PTT TT Shortcut 2 Se pd ia ee El Xi ej F Shortcut 3 100 Normal 0 Shortcut 4 Zoom JA Density Original Zoom 10090 m Sougi 5 Pape 2 sided 2in1 gt gt 2 sided Quick Setup Org Paper Color aa Advanced Finishing Image Quali Setup Status 10 10 2008 10 10 3 The machine starts scanning the original When scanning is completed the preview image appears on the panel E me 4 Tochange the quality or the layout press Cancel Mn eese an iple or the Stop key Change the settings and press ania ae Preview again to see a preview image with the ger new settings s Shortcut 3 Auto 100 Normal 0 s Shortcut 4 a Selection O Shortcut 5 ape LA ded 2in1 c mw Quick Setup Sz Paper pm cg BS Advanced Finishing Image pm cg Setup Status 10 10 2008 10 10 NOTE If you scan a multi page original only the first page is previewed
56. Book E mail a Addr Entry e Folder Path FAX No Entry i FAX o Addr Entry p WSD Scan Advanced Setup 08 08 2009 10 10 Basic Operation Select the destination using the One Touch Keys In the basic screen for sending press the One Touch Keys where the destination is registered NOTE If the One Touch Keys for the desired destination is hidden on the touch panel press or A to scroll and view next or previous One Touch Keys This procedure assumes that One Touch Keys have already been registered Refer to Adding a Destination on One Touch Key on page 8 64 for more information on adding One Touch keys Access the destination by specifying the 4 digit 0001 to 1000 One Touch Key number speed dial In the basic screen for sending press the Quick No Search key or No and use the numeric keys to enter the One Touch key number in the numeric entry screen NOTE if you entered the speed dial in 1 to 3 digit press OK Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending You can specify destinations that combine e mail addresses folders SMB or FTP and fax numbers optional This is referred to as Multi Sending This is useful for sending to different types of destination e mail addresses folders etc in a single operation No of broadcast items E mail Up to 100 Folders SMP FTP Total of 10 SMB and FTP FAX Up to 500 I FAX Up to 100 Also depen
57. CR Line feed and character return performed Ignore LF No line feed performed Use the procedure below to specify an LF action 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Printer A and Change of LF Action 3 Press LF Only LF and CR or Ignore LF 4 Press OK CR Action am oet the character return action when the machine receives the character return code character code ODH The table below shows the available settings LL Ns CR Only Only character return performed LF and CR Character return and line feed performed Ignore CR No character return performed Use the procedure below to specify a CR action 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Printer A and Change of CR Action 3 Press CR Only LF and CR or Ignore CR 4 Press OK 8 39 Default Setting System Menu Paper Feed Mode While printing from the computer select how to feed paper when the paper source and type are specified The table below shows the available settings a Search the paper source that matches the selected paper size and type Print on paper loaded in the specified paper source Use the procedure below to select the paper feed mode 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Printer A and Change of Paper Feed Mode 3 Press Auto or Fixed 4 Press OK 8 40 Default Setting System Menu Printing Reports Sending Notice Print reports to check the machine settings and status Default se
58. Connect the LAN cable to the network interface located on right side of the body 3 Connect the other end of the cable to the hub 4 Configure the network For details refer to Network Setup LAN Cable Connection on page 2 13 Preparation before Use Connecting USB Cable Follow the steps below to connect a USB cable to the machine 1 When the machine is powered up first press the Power key on the operation panel Check that the Power indicator and the memory indicator are off After this turn off the main power switch O00004Q O O0OOO0 A O 000gO0 5 Check that the indicators are off 2 Connectthe USB cable to the appropriate interface located on the right side of the body 3 Connect the other end of the cable to the PC Connecting the Power Cable Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power outlet IMPORTANT Only use the power cable that comes with the machine Preparation before Use Power On Off Power On When the main power indicator is lit Press the Power key Open the main power switch cover and turn the main power switch on NOTE If the optional Data Security Kit is installed a message might display indicating the security function is being activated and time may be taken to start up when the power is turned on IMPORTANT When turning off the main power switch do not turn on the main power s
59. Copy Specify one of Cyan Magenta Yellow Red Green or Blue and produce copies with that color regardless of original type Follow the steps as below for Single Color Copy 1 Press Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Color Image Quality Color Selection and then press Single Color G5 Ready to copy TA 4 Select color for copying from Cyan Magenta Yellow Red Green or Blue Color Selection Black amp 4 H White Er eke waa mn 6e 10 10 2008 10 10 6 Press the Start key Copying begins 4 29 Copying Functions Color Balance Adjust Adjust the strength of cyan magenta yellow and black to make fine hue adjustments NOTE This feature is used with full color copying This feature can not be used together with Adjusting Density see page 3 8 This feature can not be used together with One touch Image Adjust see page 4 33 Refer to the sample image in Quick Guide to Adjusting Image Quality Follow the steps below to adjust color balance 1 Press Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Color Image Quality and then press Color Balance Ready to copy oes 4 Press On Color Balance 5 Press or on each side of the color to be EN corse er eee adjusted Cyan Magenta Yellow Black to adjust each color Magenta 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press OK Yellow 5 4 3 2 10 12 3 4 5 Black a 8 2a 1 293 4 S x 1
60. Destination Address Book Adding One Touch Keys 8 60 Place the originals on the platen Sending 3 24 1 Saving Documents Operation to USB Memory Scan to USB 6 22 Sending Functions 5 1 1 If the destination is not stored in the address book you can send by entering the address directly Vil Administrator tasks To send a FAX a As well as sending a FAX via the telephone lines you can also send a FAX via a network Je itfaxes NOTE For more information on setting up and sending a FAX refer to the FAX System S Operation Guide FAX directly FAX without using the Send a FAX froma telephone line computer Internet FAX i FAX Connect the modular cord for the telephone line to this machine Selection of Telephone Line Inch version only Network Setup LAN Cable Connection Install the Network FAX Driver on your computer 1 g Using the Address Book 3 17 i on the FAX System S Operation Guide us m e e e c eee ees X AX ees uA A ee eee eee eee AX A o AA eee A cu eee eee eee eee eee ee A CA eee a a Loading Paper 2 20 FAX Operation About Network Internet Fax i FAX Basic 3 1 FAX 9 1 Optional 8 1 Operation on the FAX System S on the FAX System S on the FAX System S Operation Guide Operation Guide Operation Guide 1 For more information refer to the Network FAX Driver Operation Guide 2 If the destination is not stored in the address bo
61. E mail subject not more than 60 characters NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix 7 for details on entering characters Press OK Press Body to enter an E mail Body not more than 500 characters Press OK Oo c A Check that the entries are correct and press OK Border Erase Default oet the default width to be erased as a border The table below shows the measurement ranges that can be set Input units Range 0 to 2 in 0 01 increments 0 mm to 50 mm in 1 mm increments am NOTE Refer to page 4 16 and page 5 23 for Border Erase Use the procedure below to set the default border erase width 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults x and then Change of Border Erase Default 3 Press or for the Border and Gutter width to erase You can use the numeric keys to enter the number directly 4 Press OK Border Erase to Back Page Select the Border Erase Method for Back Page of a sheet The table below shows the available settings M oame as Front Page Border Erase performed in the same setting as the front page Do Not Erase No Border Erase performed on the back page NOTE Refer to page 4 16 and page 5 23 for Border Erase Use the procedure below to specify the border erase setting for the back of the page 8 21 Default Setting System Menu Press the System Menu key 2 Press C
62. Failed to send the e mail Failed to send via FTP Failed to send via SMB Failed to send i FAX Failed to send the e mail Failed to send via FTP Failed to send i FAX 2203 Failed to send via FTP Failed to send via SMB 2231 Failed to send via FTP Failed to send the e mail Check the e mail size limit of the 2 18 Failed to send i FAX SMTP settings on the COMMAND CENTER 3101 Failed to send the e mail Check the authentication methods of Failed to send i FAX both the sender and the recipient Failed to send via FTP Check the network The network cable is connected he hub is not operating properly The server is not operating properly 3201 Failed to send the e mail Check the SMTP user authentication Failed to send i FAX method of the recipient Turn the main power switch off and back on If this error occurs several times make a note of the displayed error code and contact your service representative The scanned original exceeds the acceptable number of pages of 999 Send the excess pages separately 10 13 Troubleshooting Responding to Authentication Server Connection Error If an error occurs when connecting to the authentication server check the error message and follow the corresponding corrective action appears on the operation panel Symptom Corrective Actions Reference Page Cannot connect to Set machine time to match the 2 12 authentication server server s time Cannot c
63. N After Drum Refresh is completed press OK to return to the Adjustment Maintenance screen 8 45 Default Setting System Menu Correcting Fine Black Lines Correct fine black lines black streaks caused by contamination which may appear on the copies when the optional document processor used Paper feed direction The table below shows the available settings No correction performed On Low Correction performed The reproduction of the image becomes lower when using Off On High Correction performed Select this item if black streak remains after using On Low The reproduction of the image becomes lower when using On Low NOTE Using Correcting Fine Black Line can impair reproduction of fine characters It is recommended to keep the default Off Use the procedure below to specify the setting for correcting fine black lines 1 2 3 4 Press the System Menu key Press v Adjustment Maintenance and then Change of Correcting Black Line Press Off On Low or On High Press OK System Initialization Initialize the hard disk mounted on the machine to return to the default mode Refer to System Initialization on page 8 72 about the initialization procedures Display Brightness oet the brightness of the touch panel Use the procedure below to adjust the display brightness 1 Press the System Menu key 8 46 Default Setting System Menu 2 Press 7 Adjust
64. Next of Registration Press Change for the chart to be corrected Press or to enter the values read from the chart and press OK Press to increase the value from O to 9 To decrease press By pressing the value changes from O to alphabetic letters going from A to To move in the reverse direction press Detailed Settings Follow the steps below to perform more detailed correction Chart Example MH 1 IGECA13579 HFDBO0246 CH 1 IGECA13579 HFDBO2468 YH I IGECA13579 HFDBO02468 8 WNUWEPPOQHAQAH 0 Ovi I0 O UJ CO zd n Q aIl WNUWREPOHAH WNUWRPPOAMAH T ml gt I MH 2 IGECA13579 HFDBO246 8 CH 2 IGECA13579 HFDBO2468 YH 2 IGECA13579 HFDB02468 wWNUWEPOHAH WN UWP EPOQMAH 0 OV iS I0 O UJ C zd m vU 0 I PP Obl Qd 0 Ov iS I0 O UJ CO d m 0 Ovi NB O DU C zi t MH 3 IGECA13579 HFDBO246 nl i CH 3 IGECA13579 HFDB02468 YH 3 IGECA13579 HFDB0O2468 ULL lt lt Ill 3 ies 3 M S N E Samiii N 10 1 MH 4 IGECA13579 HFDB02468 il M CH 4 IGECA13 HFDBO0O2468 5739 YH 4 IGECA13579 HFDB02468 ULL v Ut IH OmOH 0 Ovi I0 O UJ C d m z b jl I MII 2 Pj WNUWEPOHAH oOnARNOWUNT 3 ll y v U r0 POboH 0 Ovi I0 O UJ O d m 8 49 Default Setting System Menu You cannot use the numeric keys to enter these values Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter the registration
65. R and B5 R make sure to set the System Menu key gt Common Settings gt Original Paper Settings gt Original Auto Detect to On for Folio For more information refer to Automatic Detection of Originals Available for metric models only on page 8 9 A3 B4 A4 and B5 B4 B4 A4 R and B5 B4 Folio A4 R and B5 R Copying Functions Selecting How to Copy Originals Select whether you wish to create individual copies on different size paper matching the original sizes or to produce all copies on the same size paper NOTE This function is available regardless of whether originals have the same width or not The table below shows the finished document sizes for the different original size options ae Mixed Size Copies Originals are detected individually for size and copied to the same size paper as originals Same Size Copies Originals are all copied to the same size paper Use the procedure below to copy mixed size originals 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place originals on the document processor IMPORTANT When placing originals of different widths be sure to flush them against the document width guide toward the back of the machine 3 Press Org Paper Finishing and then Mixed Size Originals Ready to copy mu 4 Select Mixed Size Copies or Same Size Copies E as finish size Mixed Size Originals Original Width 5 Select the combin
66. Settings For details refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide Color Type This sets the color type when you send color documents The table below shows the available settings Match the color reproduction space between sRGB compatible systems Selecting RGB displays the color profile values set on the machine 1 Press System Menu key Press Send and Change of Color Type Send Color Type i Specify the color type to send color images 2 3 Select RGB or SRGB 4 Press OK Profile RGB FINE 1 10 10 2008 10 10 5 31 Sending Functions About Color Profiles The color scanner provides color profiles to adjust color NOTE The color profile data import method varies for every TWAIN WIA compliant software Use the color profile after carefully reading the manual included with your TWAIN WIA complaint software Selecting a color profile compatible with this device 1 Select the color profile found in the CD included with this scanner CD Product Library under the Color Profile folder NOTE Use the indicated color profiles when you chose RGB in color type 5 32 6 Document Box This chapter explains the typical procedure for utilizing Document Box E anms c us BON ceeneeter tn nent Ser fee anti eee ae eee ean iter Orr FERES nen I S ei or LERNEN 6 12 e Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory 6 20 e Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan t
67. Statement R 8 5x13 5 Oficio Il Executive 8K 16K 16K R Others Select special standard sizes or custom sizes ISO B5 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 Envelope 9 Commercial 9 Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope C4 Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Youkei 4 Youkei 2 oize Enter a size not displayed in the standard sizes Entry Inch models H 5 83 to 17 in 0 01 increments V 3 86 to 11 69 in 0 01 increments Metric models V 98 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments H 148 to 432 mm in 1 mm increments Media Type Plain 105 g m or less Transparency Rough Vellum 64 g m or less Labels Recycled Preprint Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Envelope Thick 106 g m and more Coated High Quality Custom 1 8 Refer to Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on page 8 4 for selecting Custom 1 4 for Custom Paper Size me Refer to Paper Weight on page 8 7 for selecting Custom 1 8 from Media Type To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead refer to Special Paper Action on page 8 10 NOTE To change to a media type other than Plain refer to Paper Weight on page 8 7 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type for manual paper feed 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings Next of MP Tray Setting and then Change o
68. The items you can restrict the access level with are as follows m o w 09 Compatibility Acrobat 4 0 orlater Select the version that is compatible with the PDF file Acrobat 5 0 or later Password to Enter the password to open the PDF file Open Document Password to Enter the password to edit the PDF file Edit Print When you have entered the password to edit print Document document you can specifically limit the operation When you send a PDF file use the procedure below to encrypt the PDF file for transmission 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Original Sending Data Format File Format PDF or High Comp PDF and Encryption eae 4 Press a7 of Compatibility select Acrobat 4 0 and Compatibility Acrobat 4 0 and later i later or Acrobat 5 0 and later Encryption Level Middle 40 bit soon oF pew E NEN 5 When you enter the password to open the PDF file Ld EN oo uuu select On of Password to Open Document 6 Press Password enter a password up to 256 to Edit donis characters and then press OK n _ NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on page ee UNES Appendix 7 for details on entering characters 08 08 2009 10 10 7 Press Confirmation and enter the password again for confirmation Then press OK 8 When you enter the password to edit the PDF file select On of Password to Edit Print Document 9 Inthe sa
69. Vv Adjustment Maintenance v and then Change of Color Calibration Cycle 3 Select Auto Short Standard or Long 4 Press OK Gray Adjustment After prolonged use or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity the hue of printed color output may shift or color drift may occur Use this function to correct color settings when the color of a finished copy does not match the original Perform color calibration before using gray adjustment see page 8 51 Use gray adjustment when the color is not enhanced even after performing color calibration Normal and detailed gray adjustment is available While normal adjustment will almost completely eliminate errors in color tones you can also use detailed adjustment for stubborn color tone problems or where more precise adjustment is needed NOTE To perform gray adjustment verify that either 11 x 8 1 2 or A4 paper is loaded into a cassette Normal adjustment A total of 3 color pattern pages No 1 to 3 are is printed during normal adjustment The printed color patterns are read sequentially during the adjustment Use the procedure below for normal adjustment 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press 7 Adjustment Maintenance v and then Next of Gray Adjustment 3 Press Execute A color pattern is printed Check that the number 1 is printed at the bottom of the color pattern 4 Asshown in the illustration place the printed side down on the plate
70. WSD Print Setup Select whether or not to use WSD Print The default setting is On Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key Press System Next of Network and then Change of WSD Print Press On or Off Press OK Oc fF o N After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 72 Secure Protocol Encrypt the communication between your PC and the machine using the SSL encryption After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 72 The following Secure Protocol settings are available e SSL Setup 8 77 e IPP Security Setup 8 77 e HTTP Security Setup 8 78 LDAP Security Setup 8 78 SSL Setup Select whether or not to use SSL The default setting is On Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key Press System Next of Network Next of Secure Protocol and then Next of SSL Press On or Off Press OK oa Ff o N After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 72 IPP Security Setup Select the IPP security level This setup is available when SSL is On The default setting is PP
71. allowed Duplex printing allowed Change names for Custom 1 8 Names should be not more than 15 characters Selecting media type at multi purpose tray the name after change will be displayed Use the procedure below to set the paper weight Press the System Menu key Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings and then Next of Media Type Setting Press Next for the media type whose weight you want to change Press Change of Paper Weight Select the weight and press OK oO oa fF Q N 2 Press Close The previous screen reappears f To change the duplex printing settings for Custom 1 8 press Next of Custom 1 8 and then Change of Duplex Select Prohibit or Permit and press OK The previous screen reappears Press Close 9 Tochange the name for Custom 1 8 press Next of Custom 1 8 and then Change of Name Enter the name and press OK NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix 7 for details on entering characters Default Setting System Menu Default Paper Source oelect the default paper source from Cassette 1 4 and Multi Purpose Tray NOTE Cassette 3 is displayed when either of the optional paper feeder or 3 000 sheet paper feeder is installed and Cassette 4 is displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed Use the procedure below to select the default paper source Press the System Menu key Press Common Settings Next of Origin
72. and then Next of Job Box Press Change of Repeat Copy Job Retention E uu 4 Usethe or key to enter the maximum retention number i Set the maximum number of repeat copy jobs to retain Use or the numeric keys to enter a number Set this number to 0 to not retain any jobs You can also enter the number from the numeric keys 0 50 329 A number between 0 and 50 can be entered as the iE number of retained jobs NOTE If you enter a value of 0 zero you cannot use _ the Repeat Copy function 10 10 2008 10 10 5 Press OK 4 43 Copying Functions OHP Backing Sheet Mode When two or three OHP transparencies are stacked on top of each other static electricity may make them difficult to handle When using OHP Backing mode a paper sheet is automatically inserted between each transparency making them easier to handle Also the same original page can be copied to the backing sheet for multiple page copying NOTE Never load OHP transparencies into trays or cassettes other than the multi purpose tray When OHP Backing mode is set the multi purpose tray paper type is automatically set to Transparency If the optional document finisher or 3 000 sheet document finisher is installed you may need to specify the output destination for finished copies For further details refer to Output Destination on page 4 11 Blank Sheet Outputs a blank backing sheet after copying to a transparency de
73. and press Print gj Removable Memory 4 Date and Time 5 1 Document 10 10 2008 09 30 1 MB LJ E 2 Document 10 10 2008 09 40 3 MB LJ B 3 Document 10 10 2008 09 50 4 MB Memory J E 4 Document 10 10 2008 10 00 1 MB Information LJ S 5 Document 10 10 2008 10 05 2 MB Remove Memory Store File Status 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Change the number of copies duplex printing etc as desired 6 Press the Start key Printing of the selected file begins Removing USB Memory Remove the USB memory IMPORTANT Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Press Removable Memory ss Removable Memory 3 Press Remove Memory E Removable Memory v amp 1 Document 10 10 2008 OS H610 1 MB MB MB ae Print Delete Detail Open Store File Status 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Remove the USB memory after Removable Memory can be safely removed is displayed 6 21 Document Box Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB This function allows you to store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine You can store files in PDF TIFF JPEG XPS or high compression PDF format NOTE The maximum number of the storable files is 100 Storing Documents The procedure for storing documents in removable USB memory is explained below 1 Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot A1 IMPORTANT Use only U
74. are installed Total selected for Copier Printer Count Print Restriction Total Limits the total number of sheets used for copying and printing Print Restr Full Color Limits the number of sheets used for full color printing Print Restr SingleCol Limits the number of sheets used for single color printing Scan Restriction Others Limits the number of sheets scanned excludes copying FAX TX Restriction Limits the number of sheets sent by fax This is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed FAX Port Restriction Restricts the ports used for faxing This is displayed when two optional FAX kits are installed Applying Restriction Restriction can be applied in two modes as follows o X 000000 Counter Limit Restricts the print counter in one page increments up to 9 999 999 copies Reject Usage Restriction is applied Select Off Use Port 1 Only or Use Port 2 Only as the FAX Port Restriction setting Use the procedure below to select a restriction method 1 Follow steps 1 to 4 of Adding an Account on page 11 16 2 Press Change for the item to be restricted 11 19 Management D MSUAUUAAOAAKUALZI 3 Select the restriction mode Account Copy Restriction Total A Restrict use of the functions If Counter Limit is selected press or numeric keys to select the number of pages ff 1 9999999 Counter Limit EIN 99999 pets re
75. be placed on the top Press the Start key to start copying Copying Functions Page Numbering Number multiple pages of originals in sequential order The formats for numbering are 1 P 1 or 1 n The format 1 n prints the total number of pages in the place of n Select Top Left Top Middle Top Right Bottom Left Bottom Middle or Bottom Right as the page numbering position Original Use the procedure below to insert page numbers on your copies 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen Press Layout Edit and then Page Ready to copy GNE 4 Select the numbering format from 1 P 1 or 1 n 5 Select the page numbering position 35 Made Gal Right Auto 6 Tostart page numbering from a page other than the Denominator first page press or of 1st Page and select the starting page You can also enter the number with the numeric keys after pressing Keys Top Edge Top O Original Orientation 10 10 2008 10 10 7 Tostartthe numbering with a number other than 1 press or of Start Number and enter the starting number You can also enter the number with the numeric keys after pressing Keys 8 Ifyou do not want page numbering through to the last page press Last Page Select Manual and use or to enter the final page to be numbered a negative number of pages counting backwards from the l
76. dimensions Press Media Type to select the type of paper and press OK if necessary Press OK Jo Oc FP c N Move to the copy or document box screen and press the Reset key a Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Cassettes Select paper size and media type for Cassette 1 2 and optional paper feeders Cassette 3 and 4 The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below ee Automatically detect paper size Select Metric or Inch for paper size Size Standard Available options are as follows Sizes 1 Inch models Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement R 8 5x13 5 Oficio II Metric models A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R Folio Standard Select a standard size except that selected in Standard Sizes 1 Sizes 2 Inch models A3 B4 A4 A4 R A5 R B5 B5 R Folio 8K 16K 16K R Metric models Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement R 8 5x13 5 Oficio Il 8K 16K 16K R Media Type Plain 105 g m or less Rough Vellum 64 g m or less Recycled Preprint Bond Color Prepunched Letterhead Thick 106 g m and more High Quality Custom 1 8 To change to a media type other than Plain refer to Paper Weight on page 8 7 When the paper weight settings shown below are selected the media indicated for each setting cannot be selected Rough Heavy 3 Bond Heavy 3 e Thick Heavy 3 or Extra Heavy Custom 1 to 8 Heavy3 or Extra Heavy To print on preprinted or prepunched pa
77. document processor for the following types of originals Soft originals such as vinyl sheets Transparencies such as OHP film Carbon paper Originals with very slippery surfaces Originals with adhesive tape or glue Wet originals Originals with correction fluid which is not dried Irregularly shaped non rectangular originals Originals with cut out sections Crumpled paper Originals with folds Straighten the folds before loading Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam Originals bound with clips or staples Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls wrinkles or creases before loading Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam 2 34 Preparation before Use How to Load Originals IMPORTANT Before loading originals be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table Originals left on the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam 1 Adjust the original width guides to fit the originals 2 Place the originals Put the side to be scanned or the first side of two sided originals face up Slide the leading edge into the document processor as far as it will go The original placement indicator will be lit IMPORTANT Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals If there is a gap readjust the original width guides The gap may cause the originals to jam Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator Exceeding the maximum le
78. e Do not load thick paper that is heavier than 163 g m in the cassettes Use the multi purpose tray for paper that is heavier than 163 g m 1 Pull the cassette out toward you until it stops NOTE Do not pull out more than one cassette at a time 2 Using the paper length guide move the plate to fit the paper When loading A4 or smaller paper into cassette 1 lift up the paper length guide For B4 or larger paper lower the paper length guide NOTE Paper sizes are marked on the cassette 2 21 Preparation before Use 3 Holding the paper width adjusting tab move the paper width guides to fit the paper NOTE Paper sizes are indicated on the cassettes To change between inch size and metric size A B sizes follow the steps below to adjust the size switch 1 Holding the paper width adjusting tab move the paper width guide to a position other than that of the paper 2 Turn the size switch A 90 e 3 Move the size lever B up C or down I C metric size centimeters A B sizes l inch size 4 Turn the size switch 90 to lock it Qe 4 Align the paper flush against the left side of the cassette 2 22 Preparation before Use IMPORTANT Before loading the paper be sure that it is not curled or folded Paper that is curled or folded may cause paper jams Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator see illustration below When loading the
79. e Staple Punch optional feature Orientation Confirmation Setting Use the procedure below to select the default Orientation Confirmation setting 1 2 3 4 Press the System Menu key Press Common Settings and Change of Orientation Confirmation Select the default for Off or On Press OK Settings for Color Toner Empty Action Select whether printing is prohibited or the Print in Black and White setting is used for printing once the color toner runs out Use the procedure below to specify the action performed when there is no color toner 1 2 3 4 IMPORTANT You cannot change the setting to black and white printing by selecting Print in Black amp White once the color toner runs out If you want to use Print in Black amp White specify the action before the color toner runs out Once the color toner runs out the machine continues printing in black and white up to 500 pages in Press the System Menu key Press Common Settings v and then Change of Color Toner Empty Action Select Stop Printing or Print in Black amp White Press OK A4 Letter size Function Defaults Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm up is completed or the Reset key is pressed Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending Setting the frequently used values as defaults makes subsequent jobs easier IMPORTANT When you have changed the defaults to enable the change immed
80. e Using the Internet Browser o cavacsnccnnsuscnserseseseadssudeone bei exon Rat eei pbuRS 3 49 3 1 Basic Operation Login Logout If user login administration is enabled it is necessary to enter the login user name and password to use the machine NOTE You will be unable to login if you forget your login user name or login password In this event login with administrator privileges and change your login user name or login password Login 1 If the screen shown appears during operations Enter login user name and password press Login User Name Login to ER v Press 4 Keys to enter the login data using the C 3 numeric keys IC Card Login 10 10 2008 10 10 2 Enter the login user name and press OK NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix for details on entering characters 3 Press Login Password Press 4 Keys to enter the login data using the numeric keys 4 Enterthe password and press OK 5 Check the login user name and password are correct and press Login NOTE If Network Authentication is selected as the user authentication method either Local or Network can be selected as the authentication destination Logout To logout from the machine press the Logout key to Logout return to the login user name password entry screen Basic Operation Enter key and Quick No Search key This section explains how to use the Enter key and Quick No Search key o
81. error message and corrective actions Troubleshooting Checkpoints Corrective Actions rera 3 12 Cannot duplex print Did you select a paper size Select the available paper type on this paper media type that cannot be Press Continue to print without duplex printed using Duplex Cannot execute this This job is canceled because it is job restricted by Job Accounting Press End Cannot offset this Did you select a paper size Select the available paper size type paper media type that cannot be Press Continue to print without offset using Offset Cannot print the Only one copy is available due to mu specified number of processing too many jobs in parallel copies Press Continue to continue printing Press Cancel to cancel the job Cannot staple at the Have you selected a Select a position that can be stapled specified position position that cannot be Press Continue to print without stapled using Staple Cannot staple this Did you select a paper size Select the available paper size type paper type that cannot be stapled Press Continue to print without using Staple Check the cover Is there any cover which is Close the cover indicated on the open touch panel Check the document Is the document processor Close the document processor processor open Is the top cover of the Close the top cover of the document 10 28 document processor open processor Check the finisher Is the docume
82. is decorated with special design may not be detected We do not guarantee the integrity of the detection If the malfunction occurs contact your service representative Use the procedure below to specify the Document Guard setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System and then Change of Document Guard NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 Press On 4 Press OK 8 82 Default Setting System Menu Optional Functions You can use the optional applications installed on this machine Overview of the Applications The applications listed below are installed on this machine You can use these applications for a limited period on a trial basis e Printed Document Guard Kit This prevents the unauthorized copying and or transmission of documents that contain important confidential or personal information When a document is printed from a computer this feature imprints a special pattern on the document When anyone attempts to copy or send that document on this machine the machine detects the pattern and protects the information by printing the document in blank prohibiting transmission NOTE Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used d
83. is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Copy Density Adjustment Adjust copy density Adjustment can be made in 7 levels both in auto and manual density modes Use the procedure below to adjust the copy density 1 ao Ff o N Press the System Menu key Press v Adjustment Maintenance and then Next of Copy Density Adjustment Press Change of Auto or of Manual Press 3 3 Lighter Darker to adjust density Press OK 8 44 Default Setting System Menu Send Box Density Adjust Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box Adjustment can be made in 7 levels both in auto and manual density modes Use the procedure below to adjust the density 1 Press the System Menu key Press v Adjustment Maintenance and then Next of Send Box Density Adjust Press Change of Auto or of Manual Press 3 3 Lighter Darker to adjust density Press OK a FF Q N Drum Refresh Refresh the drum when image blur or white spots appear on images in copies NOTE Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing Execute Drum Refresh after the printing is done To use Drum Refresh load Ledger or A3 size paper into the Multi Purpose tray Use the procedure below to refresh the drum 1 Press the System Menu key Press v Adjustment Maintenance Press Next of Drum Refresh Press Execute to perform Drum Refresh ao fF o
84. it is not resolved or to perform more detailed settings use the detailed settings NOTE To perform color registration verify that either 11 x 8 1 2 or A4 paper is loaded into a cassette IMPORTANT Before performing color registration be sure to perform color calibration see page 8 52 If color drift remains perform color registration By performing color registration without performing color calibration the color drift will be resolved once however it may cause the serious color drift later Normal Registration Follow the steps below to correct normal color drift 8 47 Chart Example MH F IGECA13579 HFDB02468 CH F IGECA13579 HFDB02468 IGECAI3579 HFDBO02468 WM Default Setting System Menu Press the System Menu key Press v Adjustment Maintenance v and then Next of Color Registration Press Print of Chart A chart is printed On the chart for each of M magenta C cyan and Y yellow 3 chart types are printed on one sheet H F left V right H R horizontal Color Registration Correction Chart Ii ne lt V0 1UTU2 352 C Ed Q2 HI Oo OWS N OU Ul 8 48 IGECA13579 HFDB02468 IGECA13579 HFDB02468 YH R ECAI3579 HFDB02468 Find the location on each chart where 2 lines most closely overlap each other If this is the O position registration for that color is not required For the illustration B is the appropriate value Press
85. lines on your copies Ready to copy fir Memo Page Layout I Top Top LtoR RtoL Top Edge Top Top Top Orientation g 10 10 2008 10 10 1 2 3 4 4 25 Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Layout Edit and then Memo Page Press Layout A or Layout B Select the page layout from Layout Press Border Line to select the page boundary line Press OK Press Original Orientation to select orientation of the originals either Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left Press OK Press OK Press the Start key to start copying Poster ERN E R Original Copy Follow the steps as below to use poster enlargement Ready to copy Copies i Separate and copy an image suitable for the selected copy size Zoom Priority Number of Sheets 10 10 2008 10 10 Copying Functions For using this device to make copies larger than the maximum paper size use Poster mode to separate and copy an enlarged image onto multiple pages The completed copies have overlapping areas A single large page can be created by pasting those areas together Choose one of the following 3 enlargement settings e Copy size The output paper size is chosen from the following sizes Copy is enlarged according to the selected paper size Inch models 34 x 44 22 x 34 17 x 22 Metric models AO A1 A2 Zoom prioirty Specify the output zoom size from 100
86. memory without having to use a computer Limitations e The following file types can be printed PDF file Version 1 5 e TIFF file TIFF V6 TTN2 format e JPEG file e XPS file Encrypted PDF file PDF files you wish to print should have an extension pdf Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels Use USB memory properly formatted by this machine e Plug the USB memory directly into the USB memory slot A1 We do not guarantee that USB memory printing is error free if a USB hub is used Printing Print documents stored in the removable USB memory 1 Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot A1 IMPORTANT Use USB memory formatted by this machine If a USB memory formatted by any other device is used The removable memory is not formatted may appear To format a USB memory press Format and follow the instructions on the screen 2 When the machine reads the USB memory Removable Memory is recognized Displaying files may appear Press Yes to display the removable memory screen NOTE If the message does not appear press the Document Box key and then Removable Memory 3 Select the folder containing the file to be printed and press Open The machine will display documents in the top 3 folder levels including the root folder NOTE To return to a higher level folder press Up 6 20 Document Box rs Removable Memory 4 Select the file to be printed
87. min When the 3 000 Sheet Document Finisher is installed A4 Letter A4 R Letter R A3 Ledger B4 Legal B5 When the Document Finisher is installed A4 Letter A4 R Letter R A3 Ledger B4 Legal B5 55 sheets min 37 sheets min 28 sheets min 28 sheets min 55 sheets min 50 sheets min 37 sheets min 28 sheets min 28 sheets min 50 sheets min 50 sheets min 33 sheets min 25 sheets min 25 sheets min 50 sheets min 50 sheets min 33 sheets min 25 sheets min 25 sheets min 50 sheets min 25 25 ppm model 6 2 seconds or less 30 30 ppm model 6 2 seconds or less 40 40 ppm model 5 3 seconds or less 50 40 ppm model 4 9 seconds or less 55 50 ppm model 4 6 seconds or less 25 25 ppm model 8 1 seconds or less 30 30 ppm model 8 1 seconds or less 40 40 ppm model 6 9 seconds or less 50 40 ppm model 6 9 seconds or less 55 50 ppm model 6 1 seconds or less Appendix 19 LONE NMUNNNMNEEMMNMEEMEEMEMMEMIMENM Warm up Time Power on 22 C 71 6 F 60 Low Power Paper 500 sheets Capacity Cassette 1 Multi Purpose Tray Output Tray Capacity Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets Image Write System Main Memory Standard 2048 MB 2048 MB 25 25 ppm model 30 30 ppm model 40 40 ppm model 50 40 ppm model 55 50 ppm model 25 25 ppm model 30 30 ppm model 40 40 ppm model 50 40 ppm model 55 50 ppm model 25 25 ppm model 30 30 ppm model 40 40 ppm model 50 40 ppm model 55 5
88. not be copied properly in some rare cases because this machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function Contents Contents QUICK GUIDE 22 3 eackctouca pedo d abenead buadd Rr dedos added Sor addere idibus adr dod dod dur dar ded vi Caution Warning Labels 0 00 cc ee eee eens Ix Installation PrecalullOfiS wa os bo o aed vrac cortex BONES ed OE eee Cee Rw eS X Precautions for Use 0 0 eee hh nh sas Xii Laser Safety Europe 0 0 0 eee hrs XV Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power Europe llus xvi Legal Restriction on Copying Scanning a a aana aaaea aa els xvii Legal and Safety Information 00 0 0 err XIX 1 Part Names Operation Panel MM eae i Given awe On amp od eee OB Geese eee ede Gg Bee Bee oe 1 2 H zeji q m 1 4 2 Preparation before Use Check the Accessories unana anana aa 2 2 Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables 0 0 0 0 0c eee 2 3 Connecting Cables 22 iic 02 00ebd6ceecn0s0dteegeeesuctes a RUE ev GNU a RC Eno e dbase 2 5 Power UNO oh heed sunsa deihi aidaa dees hs oe oe eee EE RULS KG ED he Bee eee es 2 7 Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode 2 0000 cee eee eee 2 9 Sleep and Auto Sleep 1 eee eee eens 2 10 Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle 0 0 eee eens 2 11 Switching the Language for Display Language 2 0 0 cee ee 2
89. of Address Book Defaults and then Change of Sort 3 Select No or Name 4 Press OK Narrow Down Settings This procedure can be used to filter narrow down the types of destination listed when the address book is displayed The table below shows the available settings Displays all destination types in the destination list Displays only e mail destinations Displays only folder SMB or FTP destinations Fax Bayon FAX desire Use the procedure below to specify the Narrow Down settings 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Edit Destination Next of Address Book Defaults and then Change of Narrow Down 3 Select the type of destination filter 4 Press OK 8 66 Default Setting System Menu Internet Browser Setup This procedure sets up the Internet browser application You can specify the following Internet browser settings e Internet Browser Setting Browser Preferences e Proxy Settings Internet Browser Setting This selects whether or not the Internet browser is used Use the procedure below to specify the Internet browser setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press v and then Internet NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 Pres
90. of devices and how to cancel the fax communication di ue ueste cl ae eee eee LN 7 2 Wikc ubselg cob 7 9 Sending the Log ey oe screenees ores sees erences eee eens 7 11 e Pause and Resumption of JODS ccccecesecseeceseeeeeteeteeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 13 Ii 21 0 ee BM e 5 Foe RT PET 7 13 e Priority Override for Waiting Jobs cccccecccececeeeceeeceeeeeeeeaeeesaues 7 14 REordorng PIM Ge 0 ene eae eee eer n nee ee ne eee eee Ep 7 14 e Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper 7 15 ee Devico C OmIDIUBICSUDI adeo oH meee e i see eee Teen treet id nee rere 7 16 Status Job Cancel Checking Job Status Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed Available Status Screens The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the touch panel in four different screens Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Sending Jobs Timer waiting and Storing Jobs The following job statuses are available Screen Job statuses to be displayed Printing Jobs Copy Printer FAX reception i FAX reception E mail reception Printing from Document Box Job Report List Printing data from removable memory Sending Jobs FAX transmission i FAX transmission PC SMB FTP transmission E mail Application Multiple destination sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission Storing Jobs ocan FAX i FAX Printer Join Box Document Copy Box Document Disp
91. over SSL Only NOTE IPP must be set to On in Protocol Detail on page 8 75 Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Network Next of Secure Protocol and then Change of PP Security 8 77 Default Setting System Menu 3 Press IPP over SSL Only or IPP or IPP over SSL Press OK 5 After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 72 HTTP Security Setup Select the HTTP security level This setup is available when SSL is On The default setting is HTTPS Only NOTE HTTP must be set to On in Protocol Detail on page 8 75 Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key Press System Next of Network Next of Secure Protocol and then Change of HTTPS Security Press HTTP or HTTPS or HTTPS Only Press OK ao Ff o N After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 72 LDAP Security Setup Select the type of encryption according to the type of security employed by the LDAP server This setup is available when SSL is On The default setting is Off NOTE LDAP must be set to On in Protocol Detail on page 8 75 The table below shows the available settings EN NENNEN Do not use sec
92. page Appendix 7 for details on entering characters Press Member 9 Press Add 10 Select destinations contacts to add to the group am NOTE Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 30 for Address List 11 Press OK If you have more destinations to add repeat Steps 9 to 11 12 Check if the selected destination was added to the group and press Register Now the group is added to the Address Book Editing a Destination Edit delete the destinations Contacts you added to the Address Book Use the procedure below to edit a destination 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Edit Destination and then Register Edit of Address Book 3 Select a destination or group to edit NOTE Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 30 for Address List 4 Press Detail The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited 8 63 Default Setting System Menu Editing a Contact 1 Change Address Number Name and destination type and address Refer to Adding a contact on page 8 60 for the details After you have completed the changes press Register Press Yes in the change confirmation screen to register the changed destination Editing a Group 1 Change Address Number and Name Refer to Adding a Group on page 8 62 for the details 2 Press Member 3
93. paper keep the side that was closest the package seal facing up e The paper length and width guides must be adjusted to the paper size Loading the paper without adjusting these guides may cause skewed feeding and paper jams Besure that the paper length and width guides rest securely against the paper If there is a gap readjust the guides to fit the paper 5 Insert the appropriate paper size card in the slot to indicate the size of the paper inside 6 Gently push the cassette back in NOTE If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag 7 Select the media type plain recycled etc loaded in the cassette Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2 28 2 23 Preparation before Use Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray The multi purpose tray will hold up to 100 sheets of A4 or smaller plain paper 80 g m or up to 50 sheets of plain paper 80 g m lager than A4 The multi purpose tray accepts paper sizes from A3 to A6 and Hagaki and from Ledger to Statement R 8K 16K and 16K R Be sure to use the multi purpose tray when you print on any special paper IMPORTANT When using media types other than plain paper such as recycled or colored paper always specify the media type setting Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on p
94. parts and maintenance allow access space as shown below Leave adequate space especially around the rear cover to allow air to be properly Q ventilated out of the machine 3 15 16 1 10 cm 11 13 16 30 cm 11 13 16 30 cm Other precautions The service environmental conditions are as follows e Temperature 50 to 90 5 F 10 to 32 5 C but humidity should be 70 or less when temperature is 90 5 F 32 5 C e Humidity 15 to 80 but temperature should be 86 F or less 30 C or less when humidity is 80 However adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality It is recommended to use the machine at a temperature around 60 8 to 80 6 F or less 16 to 27 C humidity around 36 to 65 In addition Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine The machine automatically detects and displays the following message when the environmental temperature is too high or too low Message Warning for high temperature Adjust the room temperature or Warning for low temperature Adjust the room temperature To use the machine under optimum conditions adjust the temperature and the humidity of your room if the message is displayed e Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight e Avoid locations with vibrations e Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations e Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air e Avoid poorly ventilated lo
95. sharing and printing services NetWare Novell s network management software that is able to run on a variety of operating systems POP3 Post Office Protocol 3 A standard protocol to receive E mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet PostScript A page description language developed by Adobe Systems It enables flexible font functions and highly functional graphics allowing higher quality printing The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985 followed by Level 2 that enabled color printing and two byte languages e g Japanese in 1990 In 1996 Level 3 was released as an update for the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in implementation technologies PPM prints per minute This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute Printer Driver The software to enable you to print data created on any application software The printer driver for the machine is contained in the CD ROM enclosed in the package Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the machine RA Stateless The IPv6 router communicates transmits information such as the global address prefix using ICMPv6 This information is the Router Advertisement RA ICMPv6 stands for Internet Control Message Protocol and is a IPv6 standard defined in the RFC 2463 Internet Control Message Protocol ICMPv6 for the Internet Protocol Version 6 IPv6 Specification S
96. size No Zoom Use the procedure below to select the size for transmission when sending scanned images 1 Press the Send Key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Original Sending Data Format and then Sending Size 4l Ready to send ES 4 Press Standard Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 or Pace original 1 Others to select the sending size Sending Size Standard LL n ERR O 5 Press OK Sizes 2 I r ese Original pem Zoom 10096 Paper Exe Preview 10 10 2008 10 10 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending Sending Functions Zoom ocans the original by automatically zooming it depending on the sending size The table below lists the available options 100 No Zoom to be scanned at actual size Zoomed automatically according to the specified sending size NOTE When zooming in or out see Sending Size Selection on page 5 3 when selecting the sending size Depending on the combination of original size and sending size the image is placed at the edge of the paper To center the image vertically and horizontally on the page use the centering setting described in Centering on page 5 6 Use the procedure below to enlarge or reduce the original to match the transmission size 1 Press the Send key Place the originals on the platen Select the transmission size Press Advanced Setup and then Zoom E Ready to send n Press 100 or
97. the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE XXII Original SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA Ihash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyright remain
98. the destination from the address book and press OK NOTE For information on specifying destinations refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 30 The selected e mail addresses is displayed NOTE You can view information on the selected destinations by pressing Detail 5 Press OK Automatic Log History Transmission This function automatically sends the log history to the specified destinations whenever a set number of jobs has been logged Use the procedure below to set automatic log history transmission 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Report Next of Sending Log History and then Change of Auto Sending 11 Report Auto Sending i Send job log history to the specified destination after a set number of jobs have been logged Status Job Cancel Press On and enter the number of jobs in the log history print by using or the numeric keys You can enter any number between 1 and 1500 4 Press OK 1 1500 100 x 10 10 2008 10 10 Manual Log History Transmission You can also send the log history to the specified destinations manually Use the procedure below to send the log history manually 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Report Next of Sending Log History and then Execute of Send Log History When the confirmation screen appears press Yes The log history is sent Setting E mail Subject oet the subject automatically entered when sending log his
99. the resolution Place original Scan Resolution 5 Press OK i Select fineness of scanning resolution nr The larger the number the better the image resolution Place original 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending Sending Functions Sharpness select the sharpness of the image outline The table below shows the available settings Sharpen Emphasize the image outline Make letters and lines appear sharper Unsharpen Blur the image outline Can weaken a Moire effect grids appearing as wavelike patterns when scanning printed photos Use the procedure below to set the sharpness when sending scanned images 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Color Image Quality and then Sharpness 4 el Ready to send Destination Press 3 to 3 Unsharpen Sharpen to adjust Place original 1 the sharpness Sharpness 5 Press OK Place original Sharpen _ Original em Zoom 100 Send Preview 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending 5 19 Sending Functions Background Density Adjustment Lightens the background of the colored original when it is too dark NOTE You cannot adjust the background density if you selected Black amp White in Color Grayscale Black and White Selection see page 5 21 Use the procedure belo
100. there is just a small amount of paper left over in the multi purpose tray and you want to add more first remove the left over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before loading the paper back into the tray 2 25 Preparation before Use Loading Envelopes Up to 10 envelopes may be loaded in the multi purpose tray Acceptable envelope sizes are as follows Acceptable Envelope Size Envelope 10 Commercial 10 4 1 8 x9 1 2 1 Open the multi purpose tray 2 Adjust the paper width guides to the width of the envelope 3 For landscape form envelopes close the flap Insert the envelope all the way along the width guides keeping the printing side face up and the edge with the flap facing towards you For portrait form envelopes close the flap Insert the envelope all the way along the width guides keeping the printing side face up and the edge with the flap facing the insertion slot 2 26 Preparation before Use When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multi purpose tray Load envelope with the print side facing up x Z Fs Landscape form a envelopes p eer an EZ ose the flap ds Portrait form envelopes ra es Close the flap Cardstock Hagaki gn ie postcard Oufuku Hagaki IMPORTANT Use unfolded return postcard Oufuku Hagaki Close the lap of envelopes IMPORTANT How to load envelopes orientation a
101. this Agreement understand it and agree to be bound by its terms and conditions Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement No change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party By opening this diskette package you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement XXIV Energy Saving Control Function The device comes equipped with a Low Power Mode where energy consumption is reduced after a certain amount of time elapses since the device was last used as well as a Sleep where printer and fax functions remain in a waiting state but power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the device within a set amount of time Low Power Mode The device automatically enters Low Power Mode when 3 minutes for 25 25 ppm 30 30 ppm 40 40 ppm and 50 40 ppm models or 5 minutes for 55 50 ppm model have passed since the device was last used The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Low Power Mode is activated may be lengthened For more information refer to Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 2 9 Sleep The device automatically enters Sleep when 30 minutes for 25 25 ppm and 30 30 ppm models 45 minutes for 40 40 ppm model or 60 minutes for 50 40 ppm and 55 50 ppm models have passed since the device was last used The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Sle
102. to 40096 Image will be output on the necessary number of copies for the specified zoom size Number of sheets Select number of sheets to split the image from 2 4 or 8 sheets Copy is enlarged according to the selected number NOTE The available original sizes are 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 11 A3 and A4R The available paper sizes are 11 x 17 and A3 only Press Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Layout Edit and then press Poster oelect enlargement method If Copy Size is selected set the output paper size If Zoom Priority is selected set the output zoom size If Number of Sheets is selected set the number of split pages Press OK Press the Start key Copying begins 4 26 Copying Functions Image Repeat Double Copy Tiles the 1 copied sheet with an original image You can also specify the area of the original to repeat Image Repeat Copies the original image multiple times onto 1 sheet at a specified magnification You can also specify how much of the original is repeatedly copied Original Double Copy Makes 2 copies of the same original on a single sheet For example you can double copy an A4 original onto an A3 sheet which you then cut in half to make 2 copies that are identical to the original Original Copy Follow the steps as below to use Image Repeat Double Copy 1 Press Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Layout Edit and then pr
103. to Specifying Destination on page 3 30 6 Press the Start key Sending of the selected document begins Document Box Form Overlay from Custom Boxes This function allows you to retrieve images image files overlay them into documents stored in custom boxes and then print the results Use the procedure below 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Press Custom Box select the box containing the document you want to overlay the image into and print and then press Open NOTE If a custom box is protected by a password enter the correct password 3 Select the document you wish to print by checking the checkbox E The document is marked with a checkmark NOTE To deselect press the checkbox again and aei remove the checkmark VY Preview SE 4 erm 08 08 2009 10 10 lia Ready to store in Box Copies 5 Press Functions Form Overlay Select Stored acus Form and then Select Form Form Overlay Density 10 30 100 100 ee eee ee ee eg A NOTE You can select the form density setting through 4 levels from 10 20 30 or 100 Press the or buttons in Density off O Select Form 10 10 2008 10 10 6 In Form Overlay Select Form select the image file to be overlaid onto the document from the displayed document boxes You can only select one image file 7 Press OK 8 Press OK again to return to the Functions screen 9 Press the Start key Printing begins
104. user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 Press Next of User Login Setting and Register Edit of Local User List 5 Select the user whose properties you wish to change NOTE Select Name and Login Name from the Sort pull down menu to sort the user list Press Search Name or Search Login to search by name or login user name The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited Changing user information 1 Press Detail 2 Refer to steps 6 to 17 of Adding a User to User Name change a user property 01 User Login User Name Login Password Change Press Yes in the registration confirmation Access Level Account Name Change User 2 02 Account a screen The user information is changed 3 Press Register E mail Address IC Card Information Change abcd efg com 2 Empty gt 10 10 2008 10 10 Management Deleting a user 1 Press Delete 2 Press Yes on the screen to confirm deletion The selected user will be deleted NOTE The default user with administrator rights cannot be deleted For a user without administrator rights who logs in These users can partially change their own user properties including user name login password and E mail address Although login user name access level or ac
105. you cut the paper yourself Packaging Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes Ideally the packaging itself should have been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture Specially treated paper We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper even if it conforms to the basic specifications When you use these kinds of paper purchase a small amount first as a sample to test e Glossy paper e Watermarked paper Paper with an uneven surface e Perforated paper Special Paper This section describes printing onto special paper and print media The following paper and media can be used e Transparencies e Preprinted paper e Bond paper e Recycled paper Thin paper from 60 g m to 64 g m or less e Letterhead Colored paper e Prepunched paper e Envelopes e Cardstocks Hagaki Thick paper from 106 g m to 200 g m or less e Labels e Coated paper e High quality paper When using these paper and media choose that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers such as laser printers Use the multi purpose tray for transparencies thick paper envelopes cardstocks and label paper Appendix 14 Choosing Special Paper Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine print quality will vary considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper Thus special paper is more likely than regular paper to c
106. 0 10 2008 10 10 7 Press the Start key Copying begins 4 30 Copying Functions Hue Adjustment Adjust the color hue of images Make adjustments such as adjusting red to a strong yellow red or yellow to a strong green yellow to make more creative copies The items that may be configured are as follows e All Adjust hue for all colors Yellow e Yellow Green amp Blue Magenta Adjust color Red Green balance for yellow and green and blue and magenta e Green Cyan amp Magenta Red Adjust color balance 4 for green and cyan and magenta and red Magenta Cyan e Cyan Blue amp Red Yellow Adjust color balance for cyan and blue and red and yellow Blue NOTE This feature is used with full color copying This feature can not be used together with Adjusting Density see page 3 8 This feature can not be used together with One touch Image Adjust mode see page 4 33 These adjustments are especially useful on rich color images Follow the steps below to use image hue adjustment 1 Press Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Color Image Quality and then press Hue Adjustment 4 Select the item for which the hue is to be adjusted and then press C or G to make the adjustment Ready to copy Copies Hue Adjustment EE EE ERES UEREEE I Place original um EG Green Cyan a A amp Magenta Red 100 rope Cyan Blue Status 10 10 2008 10 10 4 31
107. 0 ppm model 80 g m4 A4 Letter or less 250 sheets 80 g m B4 Legal or more Cassette 2 500 sheets 80 g m 100 sheets 80 g m A4 Letter or less 50 sheets 80 g m more than Letter A4 Top tray 250 sheets 80 g m with optional 150 sheets 80 g m job separator 30 seconds or less 30 seconds or less 45 seconds or less 45 seconds or less 57 5 seconds or less 30 seconds or less 30 seconds or less 30 seconds or less 30 seconds or less 30 seconds or less 30 seconds or less 30 seconds or less 45 seconds or less 45 seconds or less 5 5 seconds or less Semiconductor laser and electrophotography 25 25 80GB or more standard 30 30 80GB or more standard 40 40 160GB or more standard 50 40 160GB or more standard 55 50 160GB or more standard KUIO W slot 2 600 x 600 dpi Standard Resolution Operating USB Interface Connector 1 USB Hi Speed USB memory slot 2 Full Speed USB Network interface 1 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX 10 to 32 5 C 50 to 90 5 F Environment Humidity 15 to 80 Altitude 2 500 m 8 202 ft maximum Brightness 1 500 lux maximum Appendix 20 LONE 20 Dimension W x D x H 23 53 64 x 26 49 64 x 29 11 32 Main unit only 605 x 680 x 745 mm Weight without toner 233 7 b 106 kg container and waste toner box Space Required W x D 35 x 26 49 64 Using multi purpose tray 889 x 680 mm 120 V AC 60 Hz 12 A 220 to 240 V AC 50 Hz 60 Hz 7 2
108. 10 2008 10 10 2 Press the Start key The machine starts scanning the originals When the current print job ends the reserved copy job is printed If Reserve Next Priority is set to Off The Copying screen appears on the touch panel during printing cm 1 Press Reserve Next Copying 24 Job No 000021 Job Name doc20081010101034 User Name The default screen for copying appears Scanner Setting Printer Setting Scanned Pages Copies a I G ya 9 A4 A4 Plain 10096 2 sided 9 2 sided Collate 9 Top Edge Top Top Tray Cancel el Reserve Next C 0 10 2 Place the originals onto the machine for reserving copy and configure the copy settings 3 Press the Start key The machine starts scanning the originals When the current print job ends the reserved copy job is printed 3 16 Basic Operation Interrupt Copy This function allows you to pause the current jobs in progress when you need to make copies immediately When interruption copy ends the machine resumes the paused print jobs NOTE If the machine is left unused for 60 seconds in interrupt copy mode interrupt copying is automatically cancelled and printing resumes You can change the delay until interrupt copying is cancelled Change the delay as required For more information refer to nterrupt Clear Timer on page 8 59 3 JENWTSUNESIENNS cones 1 Press the Interrupt key Copy Image Shortc
109. 10 2008 10 10 4 11 Copying Functions Combine Mode This mode allows you to copy 2 or 4 originals combined onto a single page 2 in 1 mode or 4 in 1 mode The page boundary of each original can be indicated NOTE Combine mode is available for the copy paper sizes of A3 B4 Folio A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R Ledger Legal Oficio Il 8 5x13 5 Letter Letter R Statement R 8K 16K and 16K R 2 in 1 Mode For copying two originals onto a single sheet This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy four originals onto one sheet The following 2 in 1 options and output orientations are available Original Orientation of Original Platen Document processor E NOTE When placing the original on the platen be sure to copy the originals in page order 4 in 1 Mode For copying four originals onto a single sheet This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy eight originals onto one sheet The following 4 in 1 options and output orientations are available Original Orientation of Original Platen Document processor 4 12 Copying Functions NOTE When placing the original on the platen be sure to copy the originals in page order Types of Page Boundary Lines The fol
110. 11 setting Date and Time 1 eee teens 2 12 Network Setup LAN Cable Connection 0 0 00 ccc eee nee 2 13 installing oon We G sidus ham r Ebsscimadereqe taedpegeserdei3 9 RIT dense ose 2 16 COMMAND CENTER Settings for E mail llle 2 17 Loading FADO ee paee eer CC ETT RETI CU CEIUDLOTT LTD T TULIT DUITID 2 20 Loading Originals 1 0 0 hh 2 32 3 Basic Operation LOGIN LOOOUL saure rae bea eery sce eede Saeco eo Rede Sone te awe see beues 3 2 Enter key and Quick No Search key 0 eee eens 3 3 TOUGH Panel DISDIAY sued usd ui bbe ne irata Se RR 3 9 a se bes pA ux ese OP d wee es 3 4 Original Preview 0 0 ce ee eee hh 3 5 selecting Color Mode 0 0 cc ee eee eee ene 3 6 80g 2c ee ent cand ara bi he Cadastre eee es eden gee oe be ad E whe bebe ees 3 7 Printing Printing from Applications llllllllle I 3 22 cn 3 24 Confirmation Screen of Destinations 0 0 0 0 0 0c eee ens 3 29 Specifying Destination 0 0 ee eee ees 3 30 Using Document BOX 2 3 hte iw dtenade Pup PO GREE ERG E Y eb LEE S RG EES SES 3 33 Basic Operation for Document Box anaana aa aaaea ees 3 35 Canceliid JODSuw sU Hes oneness eeu eas God eee eRe ese 654 oe See eee eee ees he Se 3 42 Quick Setup Screen 0 ee rs 3 43 Program Copying and Sending aaa aaa ee eee ee eee 3 46 Registering Shortcuts Cop
111. 2User 2 amp 4User 1 4 Select the document to delete and press Delete The delete confirmation screen appears 10 10 2008 09 45 30 MB 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Press Yes The document is deleted Repeat Copy Box Setting the Number of Stored Jobs To maintain free space on the hard disk you can set the maximum number of stored jobs Use the procedure below to specify the maximum number of stored jobs 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Document Box Removable Memory Next of Job Box Change of Repeat Copy Job Retention i Set the maximum number of repeat copy jobs to retain Use or the numeric keys to enter a number Set this number to 0 to not retain any jobs 0 50 32 job s Z Cee e 10 10 2008 Printing a Document Document Box Removable Memory Repeat Copy Job Retention Document Box 3 Use the and keys or the numeric keys to enter the maximum number of stored jobs You can enter any number between 0 and 50 NOTE If you enter a value of 0 zero no jobs are stored 4 Press OK The maximum number of stored jobs is Set You can print the documents stored in the Repeat Copy box Use the procedure below to print a document 6 16 Press the Document Box key Press Job Box Select Repeat Copy box and press Open Select the document to print and press Print If the document is protected by a password enter the password using t
112. 5 Sending Functions Originals of Different Widths Available for metric models only The combinations of originals of different sizes that can be placed together are as follows NOTE When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination Folio A4 R and B5 R make sure to set the System Menu key gt Common Settings gt Original Paper Settings gt Original Auto Detect to On for Folio For more information refer to Automatic Detection of Originals Available for metric models only on page 8 9 A3 B4 A4 BS B4 B4 A4 R B5 B4 Folio A4 R B5 R Sending Functions Use the procedure below to send mixed size originals as a batch 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the original into the document processor IMPORTANT When you place originals of different width place the top edge of originals to align with the width guide at the backside If the originals are placed unevenly they may not be scanned correctly 3 Press Original Sending Data Format and then Mixed Size Originals e Ready to send Destination 4 Select the combination of originals from Bacal 1 Same Width and Different Width Mixed Size Originals fi al el EST Scan all sheets in the document processor BE E even if differently sized then send 5 Press O K mI l m Up to 30 sheets can be placed in the document processor for mixed size originals Pla
113. 7 11 540 2600 Fax 27 11 466 3050 www kyoceramita co za SPAIN KYOCERA MITA Espana S A Avda Manacor No 2 ES 28290 Las Matas Madrid Phone 34 91 631 83 92 Fax 34 91 631 82 19 www kyoceramita es SN AIS SWEDEN KYOCERA MITA Svenska AB Esbogatan 16B SE 164 75 Kista Phone 46 8 546 550 00 Fax 46 8 546 550 10 www kyoceramita se UNITED KINGDOM KYOCERA MITA UK Ltd 8 Beacontree Plaza Gillette Way Reading Berkshire RG2 OBS Phone 44 1189 311 500 Fax 44 1189 311 108 www kyoceramita co uk KYOCERA MITA WORLDWIDE JAPAN KYOCERA MITA Corporation Head Office 2 28 1 Chome Tamatsukuri Chuo ku Osaka 540 8585 Japan Phone 81 6 6764 3555 Fax 81 6 6764 3980 www kyoceramita com USA KYOCERA MITA America INC Head office 225 Sand Road P O Box 40008 Fairfield New Jersey 07004 0008 USA Phone 1 973 808 8444 Fax 1 973 882 6000 www kyoceramita com us KYOCERA CORPORATION JAPAN KYOCERA CORPORATION Corporate Headquarters 6 Takeda Tobadono cho Fushimi ku Kyoto 612 8501 Japan Phone 81 75 604 3500 Fax 81 75 604 3501 www kyocera co jp X KYOCERA t KYOCERA
114. 8 GOSSA s Duca emnes usceTT eee d192ERESPIPUSPETENGSRUEPPqERASUS MENSAS ES Appendix 28 ly ss it cta eee eee he eee eS Oude a eee emake bead ema Index 1 OPERATION GUIDE V Quick Guide Be sure to read Precautions for Use before using this machine Administrator tasks To make copies To print aa Simply press the Start key to make You can print via a network or print A V copies You can also fine tune the A a PDF file directly from USB copies coby settings by changing the Wc EPUM memory f Wee Depereiesysequsdng me Geste etc Printing Documents Print Stored in Removable USB Memory Copying with via a network specific settings Connecting Cables Network Setup LAN Cable Connection Install the printer driver on your computer 1 Loading Paper 2 20 Placing Originals on the Platen 2 32 Printing Printing Copying Functions Documents Stored Printing from Operation Ad in Removable USB Applications Memory 6 20 9 22 1 For more information refer to the Printer Driver User Guide Vi Administrator tasks To send documents a You can send scanned images via a network Or you can also store scanned images in N USB memory B in B E Itsends Send send to Saving as Folder Documents to E mail SMB USB Memory Connecting Cables Network Setup LAN Cable Connection Plug the USB memory Create a shared folder on the destination computer Editing
115. 8 67 Interrupt Clear Timer 8 59 Interrupt Copy 3 17 IP Address Appendix 29 IPP Appendix 29 IPP over SSL Protocol Detail 8 75 J Job Available Status 7 2 Index Canceling 3 42 7 13 Checking History 7 9 Checking Status 7 2 Detailed Information 7 7 Detailed Information of Histories 7 10 Details of the Status Screens 7 3 Displaying History Screen 7 9 Displaying Status Screens 7 2 Pause and Resumption 7 13 Reordering 7 14 sending the Log History 7 11 Job Accounting 11 14 Managing the Copier Printer Counts 11 18 Restricting the Use of the Machine 11 18 Job Box Form Overlay Box 6 17 Private Print Stored Job Box 6 12 Quick Copy Proof and Hold Print Box 6 13 Repeat Copy Box 6 15 Job Finish Notice 5 29 Copy 4 39 oend 5 29 K Key Counter Appendix 5 KPDL Appendix 30 L Label Appendix 16 LAN Cable Connecting 2 5 LAN Interface Setup 8 79 LDAP Protocol Detail 8 75 Left Cover 1 1 4 Left Cover 1 Lever 1 4 Left Cover 2 1 4 Left Cover 3 1 4 Legal Information xx Login 3 2 11 3 Index 4 Logout 3 2 11 3 Low Power Timer 8 57 LPD Protocol Detail 8 75 Main Power Switch 1 6 Management 11 1 Job Accounting 11 14 User Login Administration 11 2 Margin Centering Mode 4 14 Memo Mode 4 24 Mirror Image 4 38 Mixed Size Originals 4 6 Combinations 4 6 Copy Size 4 8 send 5 7 Monotype Imaging License Agreement xxiv MP Tray Cleaning 8 53 Multi Purpose MP Tray 1 6 Appendix 30 Paper Size and Media 2 30 8 6 Multi Sendi
116. A Document processor Paper feeder 3 000 sheet paper feeder Document finisher 3 000 sheet document finisher Job separator Key counter FAX kit Expansion memory Data Security Kit Printed Document Guard Kit Printer Toa ee Printing Speed Same as Copying Speed First Print Black and 25 25 ppm model 9 4 seconds or less Time White 30 30 ppm model 9 4 seconds or less A4 feed 40 40 ppm model 7 1 seconds or less from 50 40 ppm model 5 8 seconds or less Cassette 55 50 ppm model 5 2 seconds or less 25 25 ppm model 10 9 seconds or less 30 30 ppm model 10 9 seconds or less 40 40 ppm model 8 1 seconds or less 50 40 ppm model 8 1 seconds or less 55 50 ppm model 6 7 seconds or less Operating System Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or later Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 Apple Macintosh OS 10 x Standard USB Interface Connector 1 USB Hi Speed Network interface 1 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX Page Description Language PRESCRIBE Appendix 21 Scanner e INN System requirements CPU 600Mhz or higher RAM 128MB or more Resolution 600 dpi 400 dpi 300 dpi 200 dpi 200 x100 dpi 200 x 400 dpi Resolution in FAX mode included TIFF MMR JPEG compression JPEG XPS PDF MMR JPEG compression PDF high compression Scanning Speed i 25 25 ppm model 1 sided B W 50 Images min 30 30 ppm model Color 50 Images min 2 sided B W 60 Images min Color 60 Imag
117. Auto Place original oO a A W N Press OK Enlarge or reduce original when scanning 100 Scan at actual size Auto Enlarge or reduce to match Place original sending size storing size r 08 08 2009 10 10 7 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending Sending Functions Centering When you have scanned the original after specifying the original size and sending size depending on these sizes a margin is created at the bottom left or right side of paper By using the centering the image is placed with a margin equally created at each of the page Top Bottom and Left Right Use the procedure below to center then image when sending a scanned image 1 Press the Send key Place the originals on the platen Press Advanced Setup and then Centering 2 3 4 Press On Centering is performed 5 Press OK 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending Sending Functions Mixed Size Originals Using the optional document processor the originals of different sizes can be placed in a batch and sent In this operation up to 30 originals of different sizes can be placed in the document processor at the same time Originals of the Same Width When the original widths are the same the combinations of originals that can be placed are as follows Ledger and Letter A3 and A4 Legal and Letter R Folio and A4 R Letter R e B4 and B
118. Book Adding a Group Compile two or more contacts into a group Designations in the group can be added at the same time When adding a group a maximum of 500 groups can be added in the Address Book NOTE Before adding a group in the Address Book the contacts to be included in the group must be added first Up to 100 destinations for the e mail 500 destinations for the FAX and the total of 10 destinations for the FTP and SMB can be registered per a group Use the procedure below to register a group 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Edit Destination Register Edit of Address Book Add Group and then Next 3 To specify the address number press Change in Address Number 8 62 Default Setting System Menu 4 Use or the numeric keys to enter an address number 1 to 2500 To have the number assigned automatically set 0000 NOTE Address Number is an ID for a group You can select any available number out of 2 000 numbers for contacts and 500 numbers for groups If you specify an address number that is already in use an error message appears when you press Register and the number cannot be registered If you set 0000 as the address number the address is registered under the lowest available number 5 Press OK The Add Group screen reappears 6 Press Change of Name 7 Enter the group name displayed on the Address Book not more than 32 characters NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on
119. Canceling FAX Communication Cancel fax communication Use the procedure below to cancel the fax communication 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key Status 2 Press Device Communication gt Line Off in FAX ms ELE Port 1 or FAX Port 2 Printer Ready Removable Memory Not connected Format FAX Port 1 FAX Port 2 Dialing Receiving Line Off JJ Manual RX Line Off FAX Ra i FAX Check New FAX Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device Paper Supplies Communication Status 10 10 2008 10 10 3 Press Yes in the confirmation screen The line is disconnected and the fax communication is canceled 18 8 Default Setting System Menu This chapter explains how to configure various settings of the machine using the menus on the operation panel Wie dnodbe tlgo m I UU TM 8 2 E O o 6 re 96 Mee nee etre TET eee eee ee etree eae eee eee 8 27 e O SN T e E RR 8 30 ili ecoute IRE 8 33 a 2 ee dt tttm 8 35 e Printing Reports Sending Notice ace ccscseseurecssessteedcevarionieraszieeeeedennenss 8 41 e Adjustment Maintenance E E 8 44 E N nE E nee ener 8 55 e Editing Destination Address Book Adding One Touch Keys 8 60 ii dei 0 67 EP elec pee ee eee eer eee 8 69 oy Se TIE RE 8 2 e Restarting the SY SIC eccsescesipisne dcedosnsanscess masseeseneoeawiwienelomaioncanciest 0 72 9 10 0 SEHE soo onm een cane ree ett seen rere IPIE arte eee ern rr 8 73 RR a E EID EHE NR O 7
120. Copy key is pressed Copy appears The Send screen the screen shown when the Send key is pressed Send appears The Status Job Cancel screen the screen shown when the Status Job Cancel key is pressed appears Default Setting System Menu NEN NENNEN INNEN Document Box The Document Box screen the screen shown when the Document Box key is pressed appears Program The Program screen the screen shown when the Program key is pressed appears Application The Application selecting screen the screen shown when the Application key is pressed appears Accessibility Copy The Accessibility Copy screen the screen shown when the Accessibility Display key is pressed in the Copy screen appears Accessibility Send The Accessibility Send screen the screen shown when the Accessibility Display key is pressed in the Send screen appears Application name Each application is activated and the initial screen appears Maximum 6 applications For example nternet Browser Use the procedure below to select the default startup screen 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings and then Change of Default Screen 3 Select the screen to be displayed as the default screen NOTE The application names appear if the applications are installed and officially licensed on 4 Press OK Sound oet options for buzzer sound during the machine operations The table below lists the buzzer types and their settings a
121. D CENTER FAX System S Operation Guide Chapter 8 Internet Faxing I FAX Option Failed to send the e mail Check the sender address of SMTP 2 18 Failed to send i FAX on the COMMAND CENTER 1131 Failed to send via FTP Select On of the secure protocol settings on the COMMAND CENTER 1132 Failed to send via FTP Check the followings of the FTP server Is FTPS available s the encryption available Failed to send via SMB Check the network and SMB settings 2 18 Failed to send via FTP Check the network and FTP settings The network cable is connected he hub is not operating properly The server is not operating properly Host name and IP address Port number Failed to send the e mail Check the network and COMMAND Failed to send i FAX CENTER he network cable is connected The hub is not operating properly POP3 server name of the POP3 User SMTP server name 10 12 Troubleshooting Corrective Actions Reference Page 2102 Failed to send via FTP Check the followings of the FTP 2103 server s FTP available he server is not operating properly Failed to send the e mail Check the network Failed to send i FAX he network cable is connected The hub is not operating properly he server is not operating properly Check the network he network cable is connected The hub is not operating properly The server is not operating properly
122. Deactivating Application on page 8 70 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press v and then Application NOTE If login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 Select the application to be deleted and press Delete You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing Detail 4 When the deletion confirmation screen appears press Yes The application is deleted 8 71 Default Setting System Menu System Initialization Initialize the hard disk mounted on the machine to return to the default mode CAUTION System initialization will erase Custom Document Boxes data stored in Document Box addresses in the Address Book user property account information and settings NOTE This item will not be displayed if the optional Data Security Kit is installed Refer to the Data Security Kit E Operation Guide on the bundled CD ROM about the functions added when the Data Security Kit is installed and related procedures Using KMnet Viewer allows you to back up addresses in the Address Book Press the System Menu key Press v Adjustment Maintenance and then Execute of System Initialization If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears En
123. Editing Documents Document Box This function allows you to move or copy documents stored in custom boxes into other boxes or to join multiple documents together You can also copy documents to USB memory connected to this machine Moving a Document Copying a Document The procedure for moving or copying documents is explained below MAE File Name A Date and Time v4 10 10 2008 09 40 21 MB Search Name 10 10 2008 09 50 21 MB 10 10 2008 10 00 21 MB Detail VY Preview Join Move Copy Delete Store File Status 08 08 2009 10 10 T Custom Box Move Copy i Select the required operation and press Next f Copy to Move to Copy to Custom Box Custom Box Removable Mem Cancel Back Next Status 08 08 2009 10 10 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Press Custom Box select the box containing the document you want to move or copy and press Open NOTE If a custom box is protected by a password enter the correct password 3 Select the document in the list that you want to move or copy by pressing the checkbox The document is marked with a checkmark NOTE To deselect press the checkbox again and remove the checkmark 4 Press Move Copy 5 Tomove the document press Move to Custom Box To copy the document press Copy to Custom Box or Copy to Removable Mem 6 Press Next 6 8 Document Box Job Box 7 Tocopy or move the document to a custom b
124. Erase No Border Erase performed on the back page NOTE You can change the default setting for Border Erase to Back Page For details refer to Paper Selection on page 8 27 Use the procedure below to erase borders when copying 1 2 3 4 Copies Ready to copy Border Erase Same as Front Page O Back Page Bes Place original E CES Erase 05 Original 8 ee E eme order Erase Paper Preview 10 10 2008 10 10 Copies ESTEE l 0 50 HEE CENE Place original Same as Front Page Back Page Individual Border Erase Tan Edaa Tan G Original Orientation 10 10 2008 10 10 Paper Preview Cancel Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Layout Edit and then Border Erase Select Border Erase Sheet to erase borders for an individual sheet or Border Erase Book to erase borders for a book Use or to enter the width in Border or Gutter Press Keys to use the numeric keys for entry Press Individual Border Erase to select the individual border erase Use or to enter the width in Top Bottom Left or Right Press Keys to use the numeric keys for entry Press Original Orientation to select the original orientation from either Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left Then press OK For 2 sided originals press Back Page and then press Same as Front Page or Do Not Erase Press OK Press the Start key t
125. Logout key to return to the account ID entry screen 11 15 Management Adding an Account This section explains how to add a new account The following entries are required ee a Account Name Enter the account name up to 32 characters Restriction This Prohibits printing scanning or restricts the number of sheets to load Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11 18 Account ID Enter the account ID as many as eight digits between 0 and 99999999 Use the procedure below to register a new account 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 Ifuser login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 Press Next of Job Accounting Setting Register Edit of Accounting List and then Add numen 5 Press Change of Account Name Account Name Change 01 Account 6 Enter the account name and press OK The Account ID hange Account screen rea ears Chang pp 00001000 Copy Restriction Total Change Print Restriction Total Change DO ST gt gt of mni of NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on jd Full Color change T e Appendix 7 for details on entering characters Copy Restr SingleColor
126. NTE Start Basic Printer Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen The values for each category must be set separately If restrictions have been set for COMMAND CENTER enter the correct user name and password to access pages other than the startup page For details refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide 2 17 Preparation before Use Sending E mail Specifying the SMTP settings allows you to send images loaded onto this machine as E mail attachments To use this function this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol Before sending images loaded onto this machine as E mail attachments check the following e The network environment used to connect this machine to the mail server A full time connection via a LAN is recommended e SMTP Settings Use COMMAND CENTER to register the IP address or host name of the SMTP server e If limits have been set on the size of E mail messages it may not be possible to send very large E mails The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below 1 Click Advanced gt SMTP gt General kyocera COMMAND CENTER Start Basic Printer Scanner Jobs Document Box E mail SMTP General A d Vance d Advanced SMTP Protocols TCP IP Ld AppleTalk NetBEUI E mail L General E mail Recipient 1 E mail Recipient 2 E mail Recipient 3 SMTP Protocol Settings SMTP Protoc
127. OPERATION GUIDE t KYOCERA 4n TASKa fare Introduction Thank you for your purchase of TASKalfa 250ci 300ci 400ci 500ci 552ci This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly perform routine maintenance and take a simple troubleshooting action as necessary so that you can always use the machine in good condition Please read this Operation Guide before you start using the machine and keep it close to the machine for easy reference We recommend the use of our own brand supplies We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine A label shown in the illustration assures that the supplies are our own brand CUENTE ol KuoceRa CR KYOCE In this Operation Guide TASKalfa 250ci 300ci 400ci 500ci 552ci are referred to as 25 25 ppm model 30 30 ppm model 40 40 ppm model 50 40 ppm model and 55 50 ppm model respectively Included Guides The following guides are supplied with the machine Refer to them as necessary Operation Guide This Guide Describes how to load paper basic copy print and scan operations and troubleshooting Quick Guide to Adjusting Image Quality Adjustments to color image quality are explained using sample images Safety Conventions in This Guide The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user other individuals and surrounding objects and ensur
128. OTE For more information on registering boxes refer to Creating a New Custom Box on page 6 2 You cannot access boxes if you forget your password In this event access the machine using administrator privileges and overwrite your box password 3 Select the box containing the document you want to work with and press Open The document list screen appears You can use this screen for tasks such as printing and sending documents For more information on using the document list refer to Document List on page 3 37 NOTE If a custom box is protected by a password enter the correct password 3 35 Basic Operation Custom Box List The box list shows the registered custom boxes The custom boxes can be listed by box number or by box name You can manipulate the list in a range of ways as shown below Listing the boxes by name in alphabetical order Listing the boxes by number in ascending descending order 2096 Registers new boxes and med checks modifies or Box deletes box information 0001 0001 Box 0002 0002 Box 2 User 30 0003 20003 Box Store File Detail ad Open Opens the selected box Custom Box Reil ovable Memory FAX Box Status id 08 08 2009 10 10 Displays the details for Saves the document in the the selected box selected box 3 36 Basic Operation Document List The document list is a list of the documents stored in the custom bo
129. Press Org Paper Finishing Paper Selection and then MP Tray Setting Press Standard Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 Others or Size Entry to select the paper size If you select Size Entry press or to specify X horizontal and Y vertical sizes You can enter the size directly using the numeric keys after pressing Keys Press Media Type Select paper type and press OK Press OK Press OK Press the Start key to start scanning the originals When the machine is ready the confirmation screen for the specified paper appears Load the required paper in the multi purpose tray and press Continue to start copying Copying Functions Mixed Size Originals Using the optional document processor the originals of different sizes can be loaded in a batch and copied In this operation up to 30 originals of different sizes can be placed in the document processor at the same time Supported Combinations of Originals Originals of the Same Width The supported combinations of originals are as follows Ledger and Letter A3 and A4 Ledger and Letter R Folio and A4 R Letter R Letter R A4R D ES o Me T B4 and B5 Copying Functions Originals of Different Widths Available for metric models only Place all originals of different widths The supported combinations of originals are as follows NOTE When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination Folio A4
130. R Ad Ab R B6 B6 R A6 R Folio 8K 16 K 16K R Metric models Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement Statement R 8 5x13 5 Oficio II R 11x15 8K 16K 16K R Others Select from Hagaki and Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Custom 1 to 4 Custom Original Size oize Entry Enter the size that is not indicated in Standard Sizes 1 and 2 Inch models Horizontal 2 to 17 in 0 01 increments Vertical 2 to 11 69 in 0 01 increments Metric models Horizontal 50 to 432 mm in 1 mm increments Vertical 50 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments i Regarding the setting method of Custom Original Size Custom 1 to 4 refer to Custom Original Size Setup on page 8 4 id The input units can be changed in the System menu Refer to Switching Unit of Measurement on page 8 11 Use the procedure below to select the original size when sending scanned images 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Original Sending Data Format and then Original Size Ready to send Place original Original Size Destination Sending Functions 4 Press Standard Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 Others or Size Entry to select original size Standard Sizes 1 4 EN Standard Sizes 2 Others Size Entry Original Bem Zoom 100 Paper uses Preview ud Ready to send Place original Standard Sizes 1 l Standard Sizes 2 a Original Size Entry
131. SB memory that has been formatted on this machine If USB memory formatted on another device is used The removable memory is not formatted message may appear To format the USB memory press Format 2 When the machine reads the USB memory Removable Memory is recognized Displaying files may appear Press Yes to display the removable memory screen NOTE If the message does not appear press the Document Box key and then Removable Memory 3 Select the folder where the file will be stored and press Open The machine will display the top 3 folder levels including the root folder Removable Memory 4 Press Store File E Removable Memory VY m1 Document 10 10 2008 09 30 1 MB E 2 Document 10 10 2008 09 40 3 MB J 8 3 Document 10 10 2008 09 50 4 MB f 001 999 Memory L E 4 Document 10 10 2008 10 00 1 MB Information J amp 5 Document 10 10 2008 10 05 2 MB Vv Remove Memory Delete Detail Open Store File Job Box Removable Memory Status 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Setthe type of original file format etc as desired 6 Press the Start key The original is scanned and the data is stored in the USB memory 6 22 7 Status Job Cancel This chapter explains how to check the status and history of jobs and cancel the jobs being processed or waiting to be printed This chapter also explains how to check the remaining amount of toner and paper and the status
132. Shortcuts Copy Send and Document Box Settings Add shortcuts in the Quick Setup screen for easy access to the frequently used functions A function name linked to a registered shortcut can be changed as necessary You can register up to 6 shortcuts for copying functions sending functions and functions set for document box Adding Shortcuts Shortcut registration is performed in the setup screen of each function Shortcuts can be registered for all functions in which Add Shortcut appears on the screen Use the procedure below to register a shortcut 1 After making the desired settings in the setup screen of each function press Add Shortcut Ready to copy 2 Memo Page EJEIEEIES 4 LESE ES LEES e Place original B m EM LtoR Top RtoL None BE Layout B X d Top Edge Top Top Top L to B Rto B Original Orientation 10 10 2008 10 10 2 Press the keys corresponding to the shortcut number 01 to 06 to register NOTE If you select a shortcut number already registered the currently registered shortcut can be replaced with a new one 3 Enter the shortcut name and press Register to add the shortcut Editing and Deleting Shortcuts Follow the steps as below to change shortcut number name or delete shortcut 1 Inthe setup screen of each function press Add Shortcut in the bottom of the screen 2 Press Edit and press the keys corresponding to the shortcut number 01 to
133. System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 Ifuser login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 Press Next of User Login Setting Change of Obtain NW User Property 5 Press On User Login Job Accounting Network User Property Get the network user information 6 Press Server Name Of LDAP Server Information BON oa ENS C Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address and press OK Acquisition of User Information l vamet asume Timeout 8 Press keys to enter the LDAP port number using Loo off the numeric keys E mail Address mat dm eed 9 Press Name 1 10 Enterthe LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed and press OK 11 Follow steps 9 and 10 above to set Name 2 12 Press E mail Address 13 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the e mail address and press OK 14 Press Search Timeout to set the amount of time to wait before time out 15 Press or the numeric keys to enter the time 16 Press LDAP Security to select the type of encryption according to the type of security employed by the LDAP server 17 Select Off LDAP over SSL or LDAPv3 TLS and press OK
134. T NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence XXIII Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1 2 11 12 Software shall mean the digitally encoded machine readable scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as well as the UFST Software You agree to accept a non exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights styles and versions of letters numerals characters and symbols Typefaces solely for your own customary business or personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging Under the terms of this License Agreement you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three
135. TURA EVITARE L ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO PRECAUCION CLASSE 3B RADIACIONE LASER CUANDO SE ABRE EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO VARO AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA LUOKAN 3B LASERS TEILYLLE ALA KATSO SATEESEEN EE iF mABKAtK me AATAS ANE TB RR ERE W 24 EmA BRAE HaTe AES A RR JE REA e CLASS 3B 7H alolx 2H4S AM EIDAL ERE CCEBICCZ2A3BbD U8 Xfb cES C ABIERI D flf Uxuc eU The label shown below is attached on the right side of the machine CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT KLASSE 1 LASER PRODUKT XV Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power Europe Caution The power plug is the main isolation device Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source VORSICHT Der Netzstecker ist die Hauptisoliervorrichtung Die anderen Schalter auf dem Gerat sind nur Funktionsschalter und k nnen nicht verwendet werden um den Stromflu 3 im Ger t zu unterbrechen C DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY TO 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EEC 93 68 EEC 1999 5 EC and 2005 32 EC We declare under our sole responsibility that the product to which this declaration relates is in conformity with the following specifications EN55024 EN55022 Class B EN61000 3 2 EN61000 3 3 EN60950 1 EN60825 1 EN300 330 1 EN300 330 2 EN62301 Radio Frequency Transmitter Europe This machine contains the transmitter module We the manufacturer hereby declare that this eq
136. Todelete any destination from the group select the destination and press Delete Press Yes on the screen to confirm the deletion After you have completed the changes press Register Press Yes in the change confirmation screen to register the changed group Deleting a Contact or Group Repeat Steps 1 to 3 press Delete Press Yes on the screen to confirm the deletion Deletion is performed Adding a Destination on One Touch Key Add a new destination contact or group A maximum of 1000 destinations can be registered NOTE Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 30 for use of One Touch Key Use the procedure below to register a new destination under a One Touch key 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Edit Destination and Register Edit of One Touch Key 3 Select a One Touch Key number 0001 to 1000 for the destination Pressing Quick No Search key or No enables direct entry of a One Touch Key number Select a One Touch Key with no registered destination Press Register Edit The address book appears D Select a destination contact or group to add to the One Touch Key number Pressing Detail shows the detailed information of the selected destination NOTE Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 30 for Address List 6 Press OK The destination will be added to the One Touch Key 8 64 Default Setting System Menu
137. U ausabsrerasxktxbienid dpa e EEREEKIR eda d cba n aid Appendix 7 dij o eee eC ee ee ee eee ene ene een eee Appendix 10 dii eedem TRUM Appendix 18 Ec poc Appendix 28 Appendix 1 Optional Equipment Overview of Optional Equipment The following optional equipment is available for the machine 7 Document Processor uale Si DP Document Table Job Separator 3 000 Sheet Document Finisher 3 000 Sheet Document Finisher Paper Feeder Paper Feeder Appendix 2 m Y Key Counter Expansion Memory Appendix 3 Document Processor Paper Feeder 3 000 Sheet Paper Feeder Document Finisher 3 000 Sheet Document Finisher Automatically scans originals Also you can perform duplex copying and split copying For document processor operation refer to Loading Originals in the Document Processor on page 2 34 Two additional cassettes identical to the printer s double cassettes can be installed in the printer Paper capacity and loading method are the same as Cassettes 1 and 2 NOTE Left cover 4 is located on the left side of the paper feeder for use in clearing paper jams In addition to the printer s cassettes you can also install an optional 3 000 sheet paper feeder capable of holding up to 3 000 sheets of A4 or B5 paper NOTE The 3 000 sheet paper feeder features a removable cover on the left side of the feeder left cover 4 for removing paper when a paper jam occurs The document finisher hold
138. a value for the storage capacity of the Custom Box in megabytes by pressing or number keys You can enter a limit between 1 and 30 000 Changes according to the number of created custom boxes Auto File Deletion Automatically deletes stored documents after a set period of time Press On to enable automatic deletion and then use and or the numeric keys to enter the number of days for which documents are stored You can enter any number between 1 and 31 day s To disable automatic file deletion press Off Overwrite Setting opecifies whether or not old stored documents are overwritten when new documents are stored To overwrite old documents press Permit To retain old documents press Prohibit Delete after Printed Automatically delete document from the box once printing is complete To delete the document press On To retain the document press Off NOTE If user login administration is enabled Owner and Permission are also displayed Refer to Creating new Custom Boxes when user login administration is enabled on page 3 41 5 Check the details you have entered and then press Register The Custom Box is created Setting the document deletion time oets the time when documents stored in a custom box are deleted The procedure for using Auto File Deletion Time is explained below 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Document Box Removable Memory Next of Custom Box Next of Default Se
139. ack Side When duplex copying you can also specify the margin on the back side Auto When Auto is selected an appropriate margin is applied automatically on the rear page depending on a margin specified for the front page and a binding orientation Separate Front Back Margins Enables you to specify the front and back settings separately NOTE You can set the default margin width Refer to Margin Default on page 8 22 for details Use the procedure below to make copies with margins Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Layout Edit and then Margin Centering Press Margin to select the copy with margin Ready ive Copy Copies Margin Centering uu Use or to enter the margins for Left Right and ET Top Bottom Press Keys to use the numeric keys for entry EI For duplex copying press Back Page and select me ue ae Auto or Manual Top Edge Top G Original Orientation 10 10 2008 10 10 4 14 Copies Ready to copy Margin Centering Back Page 1 Auto Status 10 10 2008 10 10 Copies Ready to copy Margin Centering Place original esl Margin iji edes Fe E3 Centering N p EZ j Original pcm OO Top Edge T Zoom 10096 op Edge Top Paper E G Original Status 10 10 2008 10 10 Copying Functions If you selected Auto press OK If you pressed Manual enter the margins in the displayed screen and then press OK Press Centering
140. acking Sheet Moge ae ot eee ee 4 1 Original Size Copying Functions opecify the size of originals being scanned Be sure to specify the original size when copying non standard sizes The following options are available Standard Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 Size Entry Have the size of original detected automatically or select from the standard sizes Select from the standard sizes not included in the Standard Sizes 1 Select from envelope postcard or the custom sized originals Enter the size not included in the standard sizes 1 and 2 Inch models Auto Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement Statement R 8 5x13 5 Oficio Il and 11x15 Metric models Auto A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 A5 R B6 B6 R A6 R and Folio Inch models A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 A5 R B6 B6 R A6 R Folio 8K 16K and 16K R Metric models Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement Statement R 8 5x13 5 Oficio Il 11x15 8K 16K and 16K R Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Custom 1 to 4 Inch models Horizontal 2 to 17 in 0 01 increments Vertical 2 to 11 69 in 0 01 increments Metric models Horizontal 50 to 432 mm in 1 mm increments Vertical 50 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments For instructions on how to specify the custom original sizes Custom 1 to 4 refer to Custom Original Size Setup on page 8 4 The input units can be changed in the System menu Refer to Switching Unit of Measuremen
141. age 2 30 If you are using a paper weight of 106 g m or more set the media type to Thick The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows e A4 or smaller plain paper 80 g m recycled paper or color paper 100 sheets e B4 or larger plain paper 80 g m recycled paper or color paper 50 sheets e Hagaki 30 sheets e OHP film 10 sheets Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 Monarch Youkei 4 Youkei 2 10 sheets NOTE When you load custom size paper enter the paper size by referring to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2 30 When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick paper select the media type by referring to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2 30 1 Open the multi purpose tray 2 When loading paper sizes from A3 to B4 and Ledger to Legal extend the support tray section of the multi purpose tray 2 24 Preparation before Use 3 Adjust the paper width guides to the width of the paper 4 Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops IMPORTANT Keep the side that was closest the package seal facing up Curled paper must be uncurled before use otraighten the top edge if it is curled When loading paper into the multi purpose tray check that there is no paper left over in the tray from a previous job before loading the paper If
142. age Restriction 21 MB Box Password KKKKKKKK Change 2 Permission Private Change 2 Auto File Deletion Change gt 30 day s Free Space 30 GB Status Overwrite Setting Permit Delete after Printed Off Cancel Change gt Change mmol J Register 08 08 2009 10 10 When user login administration is enabled the owner of a box with user privileges set can change the following box information the box name the box password the permission the auto file deletion and the overwrite setting 3 41 Basic Operation Canceling Jobs Follow the steps below to cancel any print or send job being executed Canceling Jobs You can also cancel jobs by pressing the Stop key Printing jobs 1 Press the Stop key Cancelling job screen appears The current print job is temporarily interrupted 2 Select the job you wish to cancel and press Cancel And then press Yes in the confirmation screen Sending jobs 1 Press the Stop key Job Cancel appears NOTE Pressing the Stop key will not temporarily stop a job that you have already started sending 2 Tocancel printing select Cancel and then press Yes in the confirmation screen i NOTE Copying s ids 24 aa No Job Name doc20081010101034 pores If Reserve Next Priority refer to page 8 28 is set to canner Setting rinter Setting Scanned Pages Copies Off a I G jJ 24
143. age fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging Inc Helvetica Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype Hell AG ITC Avant Garde Gothic ITC Bookman ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of International Type face Corporation UFST MicroType fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc are installed in this machine This machine contains the NF module developed by ACCESS Co Ltd This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group This product contains NetFront Browser of ACCESS CO LTD ACCESS ACCESS logo and NetFront are trademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS CO LTD in the United States Japan and other countries e 2009 ACCESS CO LTD All rights reserved This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group ACGESS NetFront Browser PANTONE Colors generated may not match PANTONE identified standards Consult current B PANTONE Publications for accurate color PANTONE and other Pantone Inc trademarks are the ba Color Property of Pantone Inc Pantone Inc 2009 All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies The designations and will not be used in this Operation Guide XXI GPL Firmware of this machine is using in part the GPL applied codes www fsf org copyleft gpl html Please access
144. ages can also be attached to the FAX result report Error Only Result report printed only when a transmission ends in an error If two or more destinations are registered the reports are printed only for the destinations with the errors Transmitted images can also be attached to the FAX result report Press the System Menu key 2 Press Report Next of Result Report Setting Next of Send Result Report and then Change of E mail Folder 3 Press Off On or Error Only Press OK 8 42 Default Setting System Menu Report for Job Canceled before Sending Print a send result report when the job is canceled before being sent 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Report Next of Result Report Setting Next of Send Result Report and then Change of Canceled before Sending 3 Press Off On Press OK 8 43 Adjustment Maintenance Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance Copy Density Adjustment 8 44 Send Box Density Adjust 8 45 Drum Refresh 8 45 Correcting Fine Black Lines 8 46 system Initialization 8 46 Display Brightness 8 46 Silent Mode 8 47 Auto Color Correction 8 47 Color Registration 8 47 Color Calibration Cycle 8 50 Gray Adjustment 8 51 Color Calibration 8 52 Developer Refresh 8 53 Laser Scanner Cleaning 8 53 MP Tray Cleaning 8 53 First Print Position 8 54 Default Setting System Menu NOTE If user login administration
145. al Paper Settings and then Change of Default Paper Source oelect a paper cassette for the default setting Press OK OT fF Q N Move to the copy or document box screen and press the Reset key Automatic Detection of Originals Available for metric models only Automatically detect originals of special or non standard size The table below lists the special or non standard original sizes Fe Ben 0 A6 Hagaki As A6 and Hagaki are similar in size select either one of them for automatic detection Select Folio for automatic detection 11x15 Select the 11x15 size for automatic detection Use the procedure below to set automatic detection of originals 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings and then Change of Original Auto Detect 3 Select A6 or Hagaki of A6 Hagaki Select Off to disable automatic detection or On to enable automatic detection of Folio and 11x15 respectively 4 Press OK Media for Auto Selection Color B amp W Select a default media type for auto paper selection when Auto is selected of Paper Selection If Plain is selected the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is selected Select All Media Types for the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the specific size NOTE Default media types can be set for both Color and Black and White Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below t
146. al after pressing the Start key After scanning all originals press Finish Scan to start copying 4 21 Form Overlay gt Density 30 Density 100 Follow the steps as below for form overlay Copies Ready to copy Form Overlay Density 10 30 100 P cms ao 10 10 2008 10 10 Copies A U mh Preview Open x 10 10 2008 10 10 Copying Functions Copy the original images onto the form Once you scan and register the form the form is overlaid onto the original You can also use a form that is already registered in the machine s memory NOTE To register a form in advance refer to Form for Form Overlay Box on page 6 1 for details Press the Copy key Press Layout Edit and then Form Overlay Press Scan New Form to use the first page of originals as a form NOTE You can select the form density setting through 4 levels from 10 20 30 or 100 Press the or buttons in Density To use the forms already registered press Select Stored Form Press Select Form to display the document boxes that store documents which can be used as a form Select the desired form from the list and press OK NOTE To return to a higher level folder press Up 4 22 Press OK Place the originals Place the original for the form on top of the other originals When using the optional document processor the first page of the originals should
147. ally pressing 3 Lighter to E 3 Darker You can change the density level 3 See ee Lighter to 3 Darker in half steps To change density adjustment from Manual to Auto Normal Darker press Auto 5 Press OK 10 10 2008 10 10 6 Press the Start key Copying begins Basic Operation Selecting Image Quality Select image quality suited to the type of original The table below shows the quality options Text Photo For originals with both text and photographs For originals primarily consisting of text The procedure for selecting the quality of copies is explained below 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Setthe original on the platen and press Color Image Quality gt Original Image Ready to copy ae 4 Select the image quality Original Image 5 Press OK il Select original image type for best results Printed Document Suitable for documents printed from LS ESI this machine Place original Fa p4 PJ TEX Text Photo Photo Printed Photo Onal s ABC Zoom 10096 X aper D E Map Printed s Status 10 10 2008 10 10 6 Press the Start key Copying begins Basic Operation Zoom Copying Adjust the magnification to reduce or enlarge the original image The following zoom options are available Auto Zoom Ledger 129 Automatically reduces or enlarges the original image rari ti suitably to the selected paper siz
148. an Selecting Computer i Select the destination computer and press OK Press Reload to reload the computer list B pco0010 mu You can view information on the selected computer t pc000102 by pressing Detail pc000103 f pc000104 M pc000105 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Select the type of originals file format etc as necessary 7 Press the Start key Sending begins and the software installed on the computer is activated Procedure Using WSD Scan from Your Computer 1 Press the Send Key The send screen appears NOTE Depending on the settings the address book screen may appear In this event press Cancel to display the screen for sending 2 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen Press WSD Scan 4 Press From Computer and press Execute 5 Usethe software installed on the computer to send the images 2 28 Job Finish Notice sends a notice by e mail when a job is completed Sending Functions Use the procedure below to specify the Job Finish Notice settings e Ready to send Destination Place original Job Finish Notice B Address Book j Destination Detail Address Entry Add Shortcut Cancel el OK Status 08 08 2009 10 10 e Ready 0 send Destination Place original Job Finish Notice Off E mail Address Book Address Address Entry j Add Shortcut Cancel el OK Status 08 08 2009 10 10
149. and then Change of Job Accounting D Press On To disable job accounting press Off 11 14 Management 6 Press OK NOTE When the display returns to the System Menu default screen logout is automatically executed and the screen to enter the Account ID appears To continue the operation enter the Account ID Login Logout If job accounting is enabled an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine Use the procedure below to login and logout Login 1 Inthe screen below enter the account ID using the EE DUE numeric keys and press Login NOTE If you entered a wrong character press the Clear key and enter the account ID again If the entered account ID does not match the registered ID a warning beep will sound and login will fail Enter the correct account ID By pressing Counter Check you can refer to the number of pages printed and the number of pages S 10 10 2008 10 10 scanned When the screen to enter the login user name and password appears If user login administration is enabled the screen to enter the login user name and password appears Enter a login user name and password to login Refer to Login Logout on page 11 3 If the user has already registered the account information the account ID entry would be skipped Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 2 Proceed to complete the rest of the steps Logout When the operations are complete press the Logout
150. aning of internal parts This is particularly effective if accomplished prior to seasons of high humidity Consult with your service representative in regard to the cost of cleaning the internal parts of the machine A ABA o Other precautions Do not place heavy objects on the machine or cause other damage to the machine Do not open the front cover turn off the main power switch or pull out the power plug during copying When lifting or moving the machine contact your service representative When moving the machine please turn the four adjusters of the paper feeding unit until they reach the floor in order to stabilize the machine Do not touch electrical parts such as connectors or printed circuit boards They could be damaged by static electricity Do not attempt to perform any operations not explained in this guide Caution Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure Do not look directly at the light from the scanning lamp as it may cause your eyes to feel tired or painful This machine comes equipped with an HDD hard disk drive Do not attempt to move the machine while the power is still on Since any resulting shock or vibration may cause damage to the hard disk be sure to turn off the power before attempting to move the machine In the event there is a problem with the machine s HDD hard disk drive stored data may be erase
151. aper 10 15 jammed paper in the machine Printouts from the Is the slit glass dirty Clean the slit glass document processor have black lines Printouts are Is the paper separator of the Clean the paper separator wrinkled paper feed unit dirty Is the paper damp Replace the paper with new paper Is the paper set in a proper Change the orientation in which the orientation paper is positioned Cannot print Is the machine plugged in Plug the power cord into an AC Zo outlet Is the machine powered on Turn on the main power switch 32 2 Is the printer cable Connect the correct printer cable 2 LN connected securely Was the machine powered Power on the machine after on before the printer cable connecting the printer cable was connected Is Press Status Key Press the Status Job Cancel key displayed at the top of the Printing Jobs and then Resume screen All Print Jobs to restart printing Documents are Are the application software Check that the printer driver and printed improperly settings at the PC set application software settings are properly set properly While the operation Is the operation panel Check the panel lock setting in KYOCERA panel was being used locked COMMAND CENTER and change COMMAND the keys locked up the setting if necessary CENTER and do not respond Operation when pressed Guide 10 4 Troubleshooting Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Cannot ia with USB
152. ars 6 Press Change of Name 7 Enter the destination name up to 32 characters to be displayed on the Address Book and press OK The screen shown in step 3 reappears NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix 7 for details on entering characters 8 Press E mail to add an e mail address SMB to add a folder on the computer or FTP to add an FTP folder The procedure differs depending on the transmission method selected 8 60 Default Setting System Menu E mail Address Press Change of E mail Address enter the E mail address and press OK The table below explains the Items to be entered NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix 7 for details on entering characters The Folder FTP Address Press Change of Host Name Path Login User Name and Login Password enter the information for each item and press OK The table below explains the items to be entered Description Max No of E Characters FTP server host name or IP address Path for the file to be stored e g User ScanData 128 If no path is entered the file is stored in the home directory Login User Name User name FTP server login LEN Login Password Password for FTP server login 64000 If you specify a port number other than the default 21 use the Host name port number format e g FTPhostname 140 To enter the IPv6 address enclose the address in brackets e g 3ae3 9a0 cd05 b1d2 28a 1
153. artinusweg 199 201 BE 1930 Zaventem Phone 32 2 720 9270 Fax 32 2 720 8748 www kyoceramita be DENMARK KYOCERA MITA Denmark A S Ejby Industrivej 1 DK 2600 Glostrup Phone 45 70 22 3880 Fax 45 45 76 3850 www kyoceramita dk FINLAND KYOCERA MITA Finland OY Kirvesmiehenkatu 4 FI 00880 Helsinki Phone 358 9 4780 5200 Fax 358 9 4780 5390 www kyoceramita fi UN ia E E EN A A FRANCE KYOCERA MITA France S A Parc les Algorithmes Saint Aubin FR 91194 Gif Sur Yvette Phone 33 1 6985 2600 Fax 33 1 6985 3409 www kyoceramita fr GERMANY KYOCERA MITA Deutschland GmbH Otto Hahn Str 12 D 40670 Meerbusch Germany Phone 49 2159 918 0 Fax 49 2159 918 100 www kyoceramita de ITALY KYOCERA MITA Italia S P A Via Verdi 89 91 I 20063 Cernusco sul Naviglio MI Phone 39 02 921 791 Fax 39 02 921 796 00 www kyoceramita it THE NETHERLANDS KYOCERA MITA Nederland B V Beechavenue 25 1119 RA Schiphol Rijk Phone 31 20 587 7200 Fax 31 20 587 7260 www kyoceramita n NORWAY KYOCERA MITA Norge Olaf Helsetsvei 6 NO 0694 Oslo Phone 47 22 627 300 Fax 47 22 627 200 www kyoceramitanorge no PORTUGAL KYOCERA MITA Portugal LDA Rua do Centro Cultural 41 PT 1700 106 Lisboa Phone 351 21 843 6780 Fax 351 21 849 3312 www kyoceramita pt SOUTH AFRICA KYOCERA MITA South Africa Pty Ltd 527 Kyalami Boulevard Kyalami Business Park gt ZA 1685 Midrand Phone 2
154. ast page Then press OK You can set a value up to 10 You can also enter the number with the numeric keys after pressing Keys 4 23 Memo Mode 10 11 12 Copying Functions The total number of pages n in the format 1 n can be changed manually Press Denominator and select Manual Press or to enter the total number of pages and press OK You can also enter the number with the numeric keys after pressing Keys Press Original Orientation to choose orientation of the originals either Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left Press OK Press OK Press the Start key to start copying Delivers copies with a space for adding notes You can also copy two originals onto the same sheet with a space or add lines to indicate page boundaries NOTE Memo mode is available for the copy paper sizes of Ledger Legal Oficio II 8 5x13 5 Letter Letter R Statement R A3 B4 Folio A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R 8K 16K and 16K R Layout A Layout B Original Reduces images of each original page for printing onto half of a page leaving the other half blank for notes Reduces images of two original pages for copying onto half of a single page leaving the other half blank for notes 4 24 Types of Page Boundary Lines The following boundary lines are available 2 Copying Functions Hie bo Dotted Borders Cropmark Use the procedure below to insert page boundary
155. at can be set differ depending on whether Split or Total is selected for Managing the Copier Printer Counts on page 11 18 Available Settings Split selected for Copier Printer Count Copy Restriction Total oets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for color and black and white copying Copy Restr Full Color oets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for full color copying Copy Restr SingleColor Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for single color copying Print Restriction Total sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets used for color and black and white printing Print Restr Full Color oets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for color printing Scan Restriction Others Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning excludes copying FAX TX Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes This is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed Total selected for Copier Printer Count Print Restriction Total sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets used for copying and printing Print Restr Full Color sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for full color printing Print Restr SingleCol oets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for single color printing scan Restriction Others Se
156. ation Guide NOTE Different sending options can be specified in combination Refer to Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending on page 3 32 3 24 Send as E mail Basic Operation Sends a scanned original image as an E mail attachment NOTE You must have a network environment in which this machine can connect to a mail server It is recommended that the machine be used in an environment in which it can connect to the mail server at any time over a LAN Access the COMMAND CENTER beforehand and specify the settings required for sending e mail For details see COMMAND CENTER Settings for E mail on page 2 17 Send e Ready to send Destination Place original E mail Address Entry E mail Address Add a new e mail destination 1 Press E mail Address then enter the address using the keyboard screen Add to Addr Book Next Dest Cancel el OK E 08 08 2009 10 10 1 Press the Send key Displays the screen for sending NOTE Depending on the settings the address book screen may appear In this event press Cancel to display the screen for sending 2 Press E mail Addr Entry and then E mail Address NOTE Destination can be specified using the Address Book or the One Touch Keys Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 30 Enter destination E mail address and press OK 4 Press Next Dest and repeat steps 3 to specify the destination Up to 100 E mail addre
157. ation of originals from Same Spes soe Width and Different Width Width When Same Size Copies is selected select Long E Edge Left or Short Edge Left as the first original r orientation 6 Press OK 10 10 2008 10 10 7 Press the Start key to start copying Copying Functions Original Orientation Select the original orientation to use the following functions e Zoom XY Zoom Duplex e Margin Centering originals Border erase e Combine mode e Memo mode e Page numbering e Booklets Punchlf On is selected as the Orientation Confirmation on page 8 15 setting in the System Menu the selection screen for original orientation appears when you select any of the above functions When placing originals on the platen Original Top Edge Top Top Edge Left NOTE To change the default setting for the original orientation refer to Original Orientation on page 8 16 Copying Functions Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen Copies Ready to copy Original Orientation Select the orientation of the H original document s top edge Top Edge Top a 10 10 2008 10 10 Top Edge Left 1 Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Org Paper Finishing and then Original Orientation Select Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left as the way the original is oriented
158. ative image copies 1 2 4 37 Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Advanced Setup and then Negative Image Press On to select Negative Image Press OK Press the Start key to start copying Copying Functions Mirror Image Copies the mirrored image of the original NOTE This function is only available for black and white copy mode Use the procedure below to make mirror image copies Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Advanced Setup and then Mirror Image Press On to select Mirror Image Press OK oO aoa fF OO N Press the Start key to start copying 4 38 Copying Functions Job Finish Notice Sends a notice by e mail when a job is completed User can be notified of the completion of a copy job while working at a remote desk saving the time spent waiting beside the machine for copying to finish NOTE PC should be configured in advance so that E mail can be used Example of Job Finish Notice TO h_pttr owl net net Subject 1234 Job end report mail Job No 000002 Result OK End Time File Name Job Type Wed 27 Apr 2005 14 56 08 doc27042005145608 Use the procedure below to enable job finish notification when making copies Ready to copy eae Job Finish Notice ga Address Book Destination Detail User A abc def com Status 10 10 2008 10 10 pam 1 2 3 4 Pres
159. ault setting is Off Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Network and then Next of TCP IP Setting 3 Press Change of TCP IP 4 Press On and then press OK 5 Press Change of Pv4 6 Press Bonjour f Press On or Off of Bonjour and then press OK 2 14 Auto IP Settings Preparation before Use After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 72 Select whether or not to use Auto IP The default setting is On Use the procedure below N O N O A A CQ AppleTalk Setup Press the System Menu key Press System Next of Network and then Next of TCP IP Setting Press Change of TCP IP Press On and then press OK Press Change of IPv4 Press Auto IP Press On or Off of Auto IP and then press OK After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 72 Select the Apple Talk network connection The default setting is On Use the procedure below 1 2 15 Press the System Menu key Press System Next of Network and then Change of Apple Talk Press On or Off Press OK After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and t
160. ause printing problems Before purchasing special paper in volume try testing a sample to ensure the print quality is satisfactory General precautions when printing onto special paper are given below Note that we are not responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture or specifications of special paper oelect a cassette or multi purpose tray for special paper Transparencies Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing Transparencies must meet the following Must withstand at least 190 C conditions To avoid problems use the multi purpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side facing the machine If transparencies jam frequently at output try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected Hagaki Before loading Hagaki into the multi purpose tray fan them and align the edges If the Hagaki paper is curled straighten it before loading Printing onto curled Hagaki qa may cause jams Use unfolded Oufuku Hagaki available at post offices Some Hagaki may still have rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side Remove any such rough edges by placing the Hagaki on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler Envelopes Use the multi purpose tray for envelopes Due to the structure of envelopes printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases Thin envelopes in partic
161. b histories are available Sereen Job histories to be displayed Printing Jobs sending Jobs Storing Jobs Displaying Job History Screen Copy Printer FAX reception I FAX reception E mail reception Printing from Document Box Job Report List Printing data from removable memory FAX I FAX PC SMB FTP E mail Application Multiple destination Scan FAX I FAX Printer Join Box Document Copy Box Document The procedure for displaying Job History Screen is explained below Status Status Job Type Job No EndDate Type Job Name User Name Result 000080 01 25 14 14 oK doc20070225141427 000081 01 25 14 22 fJ doc20070225142253 Completed 000083 01 25 14 24 E doc20070225142458 Error 000084 01 25 14 30 doc20070225143034 Completed 000082 01 25 14 23 doc20070225142310 Completed ff 001 001 Printing Jobs Completed 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key 2 Press either of Printing Jobs Sending Jobs or Storing Jobs to check the log and press Log Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device _ Paper Supplies Communication 10 10 2008 9 Status Job Cancel Checking the Detailed Information of Histories Check the detailed information of each history Display of the detailed information of Job Finish history Use the procedure below to check the job finish history 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key 2 Press Printing Jobs Sending Jobs or Storing Jobs a
162. beens E E E a a a A 8 69 System Initialization 22 060 ieu ed pe ox ens meee een decease XR AE a a a a bees 8 72 Restarting the System a na naana aaa shares 8 72 NGIWOIK DOWD esga raure teaeeteeeae Pee 2695 9523 bo 92 21499 T uS Fea Td C I Se 8 73 Interface Block Setting 0 2 0 0 ee rss 8 80 security Level Security Level setting 0 0 0 eee ene 8 81 Document Guard Setting a na aanne ee eee eee eee 8 81 Opuonal FUNCOMS x 2 2 cor 1 303 ance Sones E ERN PSISEOSSIu A S EIS Ud xS STA ud seus 8 83 Accessibility Display Enlarged Touch Panel Display 0 0 0 0 0 eee eee 8 84 Maintenance CIGAMING M P 9 2 Toner Container and Waste Toner Box Replacement 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 9 8 Troubleshooting Solving MANUNCHONS ue uk y E xR Rem 3 3 Ee EEGEGuE PL EG PEEOTIG4U EST aa a ws 10 2 Responding to Error Messages 1 0 cc ees 10 6 Clearing Paper Jams s xeu peer eEe P Gy C X bieeebesstareededarseeeud ass 10 15 Management User Login Administration a a aaa aaa aaa rs 11 2 OPERATION GUIDE Contents JOD ACCOUNUNG e riae mar d Ec 6d Rer 3 o CS or con G eee tir iu thew neste be a 11 14 Data Security Kit Operations 0 0 ers 11 27 Appendix Optional Equipment 0 0 0 00 rs Appendix 2 Character Entry Method 0 0 00 cc ee eee eens Appendix 7 go TE C Rm m Appendix 10 Specifications 0 Rr Appendix 1
163. ble for black and white mode Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults and then Change of Original Image ami 3 Select the default original image 4 Press OK Scan Resolution Select the default scanning resolution The options are 600x600dpi 400x400dpi Ultra Fine 300x300dpi 200x400dpi Super Fine 200x200dpi Fine 200x100dpi Normal Use the procedure below to select the default resolution setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults and then Change of Scan Resolution 3 Select the default resolution 4 Press OK Color Selection Copy Select the default copying color mode setting The available default settings are shown below Auto Color Automatically recognize whether documents are color or black and white Full Color Scan document in full color Black amp White Scan document in black and white 8 17 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to select the default color mode setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults and then Change of mode Color Selection Copy 3 Select the default color setting 4 Press OK Color Selection Send Store Select the default color mode for scanning documents The available default settings are shown below Auto C
164. box to your dealer or service representative The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations otore the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight otore the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40 C while avoiding sharp changes of temperature and humidity If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time remove the paper from the cassette and the Multi Purpose MP Tray return it to its original package and reseal it XIV Laser Safety Europe Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body For this reason laser radiation emitted inside this machine is hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover In the normal operation of the product by user no radiation can leak from the machine This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC 60825 Caution Performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure These labels are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and are not in a user access area DANGER CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM ATTENTION CLASE 3B RAYONNEMENT LASER EN CAS D OUVERTURE EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU VORSICHT KLASSE 3B LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNE NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN ATTENZIONE CLASSE 3B RADIAZIONE LASER IN CASO DI APER
165. cations If the floor is delicate against casters when this machine is moved after installation the floor material may be damaged During copying some ozone is released but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one s health If however the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of copies the smell may become unpleasant To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work it is suggested that the room be properly ventilated Power supply Grounding the machine A WARNING Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified Avoid multiple connections in the same outlet These types of situations present a danger of fire or electrical shock Plug the power cord securely into the mains power outlet and the power socket on the machine A buildup of dust around the prongs on the plug or contact between the prongs and metallic objects may cause a fire or electric shock Incomplete electrical contact could cause overheating and ignition e electrical shock in case of an electric short If an earth connection is not possible contact your service representative Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection to avoid the danger of fire or o Other precautions Connect the power plug to the closest outlet possible to the machine Handling of plastic bags A WARNING Keep the plastic bags that are used with the machin
166. ccounts together at the same time Use the procedure below to check and reset the counter 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 11 23 Management 4 Press Next of Job Accounting Setting and then Next of Total Job Accounting Pe ee 5 Press Check at the function to check the count Printed Pages Scanned Pages The results will be displayed FAX Transmission Pages FAX Transmission Time 6 Confi rm th e Cou nt a n d press Close 2 00 00 10 7 Press Execute of Counter Reset to reset the counter 8 Press Yes on the screen to confirm the reset The Counter Reset counter Is reset 10 10 2008 10 10 Each Job Accounting Resetting the Counter This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts by account Use the procedure below to display and reset the counter 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for
167. ce original f off Same Width Different Width 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending Sending Functions 1 sided 2 sided Selection Select the type and binding of original depending on the original The table below lists the binding directions for each original type UL GNUM MN RN 2 sided Sheet oci c 2 sided Binding Left Right Binding Top Open Book Original such Book Binding Left as magazine and book Binding Right Only when the optional document processor is used Use the procedure below to select the original type and binding direction when sending scanned originals 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Original Sending Data Format and then 2 sided Book Original E Ready to send Destination 4 Press 1 sided 2 sided or Book Place original 1 2 sided Book Original 5 When selecting 2 sided select the binding direction and press Original Orientation to select the direction in which the original is set on the platen When selecting Book select the binding direction 6 Press OK Orientation Cancel el OK 08 08 2009 10 10 7 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending 2 10 Sending Functions Original Orientation To send the document in the orientation that can be read properly specify the upper orientation of original To use the functions below
168. check the remaining amounts 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key Status 2 Press Paper Supplies Check the remaining amount of toner and the status of a waste toner box in Toner Information and the remaining amount of paper in each paper source in Paper Toner Information Others el Black K IH 100 Cyan ELLE 100 gm 3 C3 i Magenta M UNI 100 f Yellow Y 09mm 100 Waste Toner OK Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Status The items you can check are described below Remaining amount of toner You can check the remaining amount of each color toner as one of 11 levels from 100 to 0 Status of waste toner box You can check the status of waste toner box Paper You can check the size orientation type and remaining amount of paper in each paper source The remaining amount of paper is shown by 11 levels from 100 to 0 however the paper in the multi purpose tray is shown by 2 levels as 100 and 0 Others You can check the status of staples and punch waste box NOTE If the optional document finisher or 3 000 sheet document finisher and punch unit are installed the Others section provides the status of the punch waste box and whether or not staples are available 15 Status Job Cancel Device Communication Configure the devices lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status You can also control devices depending on their status Displaying Devic
169. chine The maximum length of the signature is 512 characters Enter the domain names that can be permitted or rejected The maximum length of the domain name is 32 characters You can also specify E mail addresses Preparation before Use Loading Paper Paper can be loaded standaraly in the two cassettes and the multi purpose tray A paper feeder is also available as an option refer to Optional Equipment on Appendix 2 Before Loading Paper When you open a new package of paper fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps 1 Bend the whole set of sheets to swell them in the middle 2 Hold the stack at both ends and stretch it while keeping the entire stack risen 3 Raise the right and left hands alternately to create a gap and feed air between the paper 4 Finally align the paper on a level flat table If the paper is curled or folded straighten it before loading Paper that is curled or folded may cause a jam CAUTION If you copy onto used paper paper already used for copying do not use paper that is stapled or clipped together This may damage the machine or cause poor image quality NOTE If printouts are curled or not neatly stapled turn the stack in the cassette upside down Avoid exposing opened paper to high temperatures and high humidity as dampness can be a cause of problems Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multi purpose tray or cassettes back in
170. coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing unit Ingredient Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon These paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80 pulp i e not more than 20 of the total paper content consists of cotton or other fibers Supported Paper Sizes Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine Measurements in the table take into account a 0 7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width Corner angles must be 90 0 2 B6 R 128 x 182 mm B4 257 x 364 mm Executive 7 1 4 x10 1 2 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 4 1 8 x 9 1 2 Envelope 9 Commercial 9 3 7 8 x 8 7 8 Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 3 5 8 x 6 1 2 Envelope Monarch 3 7 8 x7 1 2 Appendix 12 Multi Purpose Tray Cassette or Multi Purpose Tray oize Entry 98 x 148 to 297 x 432 mm 8K 273 x 394 mm 16K 273 x 197 mm 16K R 197 x 273 mm Smoothness The paper surface should be smooth but it must be uncoated With paper that is too smooth and slippery several sheets may accidentally be supplied at once causing jams Basis Weight In countries that use the metric system basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in area In the United States basis weight is the weight in pound
171. compartment 8 Press End Maintenance Separator Clean the separator regularly at least monthly to ensure optimum output quality 1 Open the front cover 2 Remove cleaning brush blue colored OO Pull up and open left cover 1 4 Asshown in the figure clean dirt from the separator by moving the brush from side to side along the separator 9 5 Maintenance 5 Put away the cleaning brush press the specified position of the front cover and left cover 1 to close Transfer Roller 1 Open the front cover 2 Remove the cleaning brush blue colored S ay gt 3 Pull up and open left cover 1 9 6 Maintenance As shown in the figure clean dirt from the transfer roller by moving the brush from side to side along the roller while rotating the roller by turning the gear at the left end of the roller Put away the cleaning brush press the specified position of the front cover and left cover 1 to close Maintenance Toner Container and Waste Toner Box Replacement When the touch panel displays Aad toner replace the toner Every time you replace the toner container be sure to clean the parts as instructed below Dirty parts may deteriorate output quality CAUTION Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box Dangerous sparks may cause burns Toner Container Replacement 1 Open the front cover 2 Turnthe toner container release lever to the vertica
172. copy of the document being sent in a Custom Box The procedure for using Send and Store is explained below Destination Ready to send Place original t Send and Store 0007 07 BOX002 0008 08 BOX003 0009 09 BOX004 0010 10 BOX005 Add Shortcut s 08 08 2009 10 10 1 5 30 Press the Send key Place the originals on the platen Press Advanced Setup v and then Send and Store Press On Select the Custom Box in which the copy is to be stored If a password entry screen for the Custom Box appears enter the password You can view information on the selected Custom Box by pressing Detail Press OK Specify the destination and press the Start key Transmission begins and a copy of the transmitted document is stored in the specified Custom Box Sending Functions FTP Encrypted TX This allows you to encrypt documents when you send them If you select On in this option you can then select the encryption method in the basic send screen Use the procedure below to scan and send originals as encrypted files 1 Press the Send Key 2 Placethe originals in the document processor or on the platen 3 Press Advanced Setup v and then FTP Encrypted TX 4 Press On Press OK NOTE Click Advanced Secure Protocols in the COMMAND CENTER Be sure that SSL of Secure Protocol Settings is On and one or more effective encryption are selected in Clientside
173. count name cannot be changed the users can check the present status Use the procedure below to change user properties 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Property 3 Referto steps 6 to 17 of Adding a User to change user properties User Name Change Login User Name Press Detail of Login User Name or Account Name to check the present status Access Level Account Name Detail User 02 Account 2 E mail Address IC Card Information abcd efg com 2 Empty 10 10 2008 10 10 4 Press Register to finalize changed user properties Management Unknown login user name Job This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown login user names or User ID i e unsent IDs If the User Login is set to invalid and Job Accounting is set to valid follow the procedure when the Account ID is unknown The table below shows the available settings ae The job is rejected not printed Permit The job is permitted to be printed Use the procedure below to process jobs sent from unknown users 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 Ifuser login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 Press Change of Unknown ID Job 5 Pre
174. cover 1 lever and open left cover 1 3 Press the lever and open the job separator 10 30 Remove the jammed paper If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine Press the indicated position to close left cover 1 11 Management This chapter explains the following operations Nr a AmS tA er 11 2 M OTAC WIR EN es 11 14 Data Security KL CDSVATIONS cesejccereicssccenecscnteesuereceenessesapececceaegeaneys 11 27 Management User Login Administration User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine Enter correct login user name and password for user authentication to login Access are in three levels User Administrator and Machine Administrator The security levels can be modified only by the machine administrator First User Login Administration Follow these steps for the first user login administration Enable user login administration page 11 2 v Add a user page 11 5 v Log out page 11 4 v The registered user logs in for operations page 11 3 Enabling Disabling User Login Administration This enables user login administration Select one of the following authentication methods m omm Local Authentication User authentication based on user properties on the local user list stored in the machine Network Authentication User authentication based on Authentication Server Use a user property stored in Authentication Server to access the netwo
175. cutive 8 5x13 5 and Oficio Il Metric size A3 A4 R A4 A5 R A6 R B4 R B5 R B5 B6 R and Folio otandard Select from the standard sizes not included in Standard oizes 2 oizes 1 Selectable paper sizes are as follows Inch size A3 A4 R A4 A5 R A6 R B4 R B5 R B5 B6 R Folio 8K 16K R and 16K Metric size Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R Executive 8 5x13 5 Oficio Il 8K 16K R and 16K Others Select from special standard sizes and custom sizes Selectable paper sizes are as follows ISO B5 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 Envelope 9 Commercial 9 Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope C4 Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Youkei 4 Youkei 2 Enter the size not included in the standard size Selectable paper sizes are as follows Inch size X Horizontal 5 83 17 in 0 01 increments Y Vertical 3 86 11 69 in 0 01 increments Metric size X Horizontal 148 432 mm in 1mm increments Y Vertical 98 297 mm in 1mm increments Media Type Selectable media types are as follows Plain 105g m or less Rough Transparency Vellum 64 g m or less Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Envelope Thick 106 g m and more Coated High Quality and Custom 1 8 To change to a media type other than Plain refer to Paper Weight on page 8 7 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead refer t
176. d Contact your administrator and check your login user name or login password For send to folder SMB Data to be entered Max characters Host Name Host name or IP address of the PC to receive the data Up to 70 characters Path Path to the receiving folder such as follows Up to 128 For example User ScanData characters Login User Name User name to access the PC Up to 64 For example abcdnet james smith characters Login Password Password to access the PC Up to 64 characters To specify a port number different from the default 139 enter using the format host name port number e g SMBhostname 140 To enter the IPv6 address enclose the address in brackets e g 3ae3 9a0 cd05 b1d2 28a 1fc0 a1 10ae 140 3 27 Basic Operation For send to folder FTP Data to be entered Max characters Host Name Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to 70 characters Path to the receiving folder Up to 128 For example User ScanData characters Otherwise the data will be saved in the home directory Login User Name FTP server login user name Up to 64 characters Login Password FTP server login password Up to 64 characters To specify a port number different from the default 21 enter using the format host name port number e g FT Phostname 140 To enter the IPv6 address enclose the address in brackets e g 3ae3 9a0 cd05 b1d2 28a 1fc0 a1 10ae 140 al Ready to send Im 5 Upon comp
177. d It is recommended that important data be backed up on a PC or other media Be also sure to store originals of important documents separately xiii Cautions when handling consumables A CAUTION Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box Dangerous sparks may cause S burns Keep the toner container and the waste toner box out of the reach of children S If toner happens to spill from the toner container or the waste toner box avoid inhalation and ingestion S as well as contact with your eyes and skin e If you do happen to inhale toner move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water If coughing develops contact a physician f you do happen to ingest toner rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of your stomach If necessary contact a physician e f you do happen to get toner in your eyes flush them thoroughly with water If there is any remaining tenderness contact a physician e If toner does happen to get on your skin wash with soap and water Do not attempt to force open or destroy the toner container or the waste toner box Q If the optional Fax kit is installed and the main power switch is off transmitting receiving Fax is disabled Do not turn off the main power switch but press the Power key on the operation panel to enter Sleep Other precautions Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner
178. date and time at the place of installation When you send an E mail using the transmission function the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of the E mail message Set the date time and time difference from GMT of the region where the machine is used NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter a login user name and password and press Login Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password Be sure to set the time difference before setting the date and time If you change Date Time setting trial functions will be unavailable For details refer to Optional Functions on page 8 83 1 Press the System Menu key ystem Menu 2 Press v Date Timer and then Change of Time Zone 3 Select the region Date Timer Time Zone Set time zone Select the location nearest you NOTE Press or to view the next region Time Zone 12 00 International Date Line West 11 00 Midway Island Samoa 4 Press Off or On of Summer Time and press OK 10 00 Hawaii m Eu Sia 09 00 Alaska 08 00 Pacific Time US amp Canada NOTE If you select a region that does not utilize 07 00 Arizona summer time the summer time setting screen will not appear 10 10 2008 10 10 5 Press Change of Da
179. ding on the settings you can send and print at the same time Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types Continue to enter E mail address or folder path so that they appear in the destination list Press the Start key to launch transmission to all destinations at one time 3 32 Basic Operation Using Document Box What is Document Box Document Box is an area in the hard disk in which you can save documents for later retrieval or sharing among multiple users Document Box contains four types of component boxes which provide the following functions Custom Box page 6 2 Custom Box is a component box which you can create within the Document Box and store data for later retrieval You can create or delete a Custom Box and manipulate data in various ways as described below Creating a box page 6 2 e Storing Documents in a Custom Box page 6 4 Printing a Document in a Custom Box page 6 5 e Sending a Document from a Custom Box page 6 6 e Moving Copying Joining Documents in a Custom Box page 6 8 Deleting Documents in a Custom Box page 6 11 Job Box Job Box holds temporary or permanent print data for use with job options including Private Print Stored Job Quick Copy Proof and Hold Repeat copy and Form Overlay which will be discussed later Four individual Job Boxes corresponding to these job options are already provided in the Document Box These Job Boxes cannot be c
180. dress Book 4 Press OK 8 32 Default Setting System Menu Document Box Settings The following settings are available for Document Box Registering Editing Box 8 33 e Default Setting 8 33 e Job Box 8 33 e Quick Setup Registration 8 33 Registering Editing Box Creates a new box edits a box or checks details of a box in the custom box or deletes a box from the custom box For details refer to Using a Custom Box on page 60 2 Default Setting Sets the time at which documents in the custom box are automatically deleted For details refer to Setting the document deletion time on page 6 3 Job Box The following three operations can be done For details refer to each page shown below ami e Quick Copy Proof and Hold Print Box page 6 13 e Repeat Copy Box page 6 15 e Deleting a Form Stored page 6 18 Quick Setup Registration Select the Storing in Box Sending from Box Printing from Box functions to be registered for Quick Setup Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary The options are as follows Store File Quick Setup Color Selection Storing Size Density 2 sided Book Original Resolution Zoom Original Orientation Original Size Original Image Continuous Scan Print Quick Setup Paper Selection Collate Offset Staple Punch Duplex Combine Delete after Printed Send Quick Setup sending Size FAX TX Resolution File Forma
181. dure below to select the default zoom setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings s Next of Function Defaults X and then Change of Zoom 3 Select the default zoom setting 4 Press OK File Name Entry Set an automatically entered name default for jobs Additional information such as Date and Time and Job No can also be set NOTE Refer to page 4 41 and page 5 25 for name entry Use the procedure below to set the default file name 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings s Next of Function Defaults X and then Change of File Name Entry 3 Press File Name to enter the file name in not more than 32 characters NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix 7 for details on entering characters Press OK Press Date and Time to add the date time to the job or press Job No to add the job number to the job The added information will be displayed in Aaditional Info 6 Press OK E mail Subject Body oet the subject and body automatically entered default subject and body when sending the scanned originals by E mail NOTE Refer to Send as E mail on page 3 25 Use the procedure below to set the default e mail subject and message body 8 20 Default Setting System Menu 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings 7 Next of Function Defaults v and then Change of E mail Subject Body 3 Press Subject to enter an
182. e Colored Paper Colored paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 2 of the Appendix In addition the pigments in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing up to 200 C or 392 F a Preprinted Paper Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 2 of the Appendix The colored ink must be able to withstand the heat of printing It must be resistant to silicone oil as well Do not use paper with a treated surface such as glossy paper used for calendars Recycled Paper Recycled paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 2 of the Appendix however its whiteness may be considered separately NOTE Before purchasing recycled paper in volume try testing a sample to ensure that the print quality Appendix 1 7 Specifications NOTE Specifications are subject to change without notice Machine mU Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser tandem drum system Supported Original Types Sheet Book 3 dimensional objects maximum original size 11 x 17 A3 Paper Weight 60 to 163 g m Duplex 60 to 163 g m 1 2 Multi Purpose 60 to 220 g m Tray Paper Type Cassette Plain Rough Vellum Recycled Preprinted Bond Color Colour 1 2 Prepunched Letterhead Thick High Quality Custom 1 to 8 Duplex Same as Simplex Multi Purpose Plain Transparency OHP film Rough Vellum Labels Recycled Tray Preprinted Bond
183. e tatement R 64 A5 70 Manual Zoom Manually reduces or enlarges the original image in 1 increments between 25 and 400 Preset Zoom Reduces or enlarges at preset magnifications The following magnifications are available Model Zoom Level Original Copy Inch Models 100 Auto 400 Max 200 STMT gt gt Ledger 154 STMT gt gt Legal 129 Letter gt gt Ledger 121 Legal gt gt Ledger 78 Legal gt gt Letter 77 Ledger gt gt Legal 64 Ledger gt gt Letter 50 Ledger gt gt STMT 25 Min Metric Models 100 Auto 400 Max 200 A5 gt gt A3 141 A4 gt gt A3 A5 gt gt A4 127 Folio gt gt A3 106 11x15 gt gt A3 90 Folio gt gt A4 75 11x15 gt gt A4 70 A3 gt gt A4 A4 gt gt A5 50 25 Min Metric Models Asia 100 Auto 400 Max 200 A5 gt gt A3 Pacific 141 A4 gt gt A3 B5 gt gt B4 122 A4 gt gt B4 A5 gt gt B5 115 B4 gt gt A3 B5 gt gt A4 86 A3 gt gt B4 A4 gt gt B5 81 B4 gt gt A4 B5 gt gt A5 70 A3 gt gt A4 B4 gt gt B5 50 25 Min 3 10 Basic Operation XY Zoom Select vertical and horizontal magnifications individually Reduce or enlarge original images in 196 increments between 25 and 400 The procedure for using zoom copying is explained below 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Set the orig
184. e Communication Screen The procedure for using the Device Communication screen is explained below 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key 2 Press Device Communication The screen to check the status or configure the devices is displayed Check of Device Status Status Ready Y oc Ready Removable Memory Not connected Format Remove FAX Port 1 FAX Port 2 EA Line Off Manual RX Line Off FAX Ra i FAX Check New FAX Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device Paper Supplies Communication Status 10 10 2008 10 10 The items you can check are described below Scanner The status of an original scanning in the document processor optional or the error information paper jam opened cover etc is displayed Printer Error information such as paper jam out of toner or out of paper and status such as waiting or printing are displayed Hard Disk The information such as formatting overwriting for erasure and error occurrence is displayed 16 Status Job Cancel Configuring the Devices Status Scanner Hard Disk Ready X Overwriting Printer Ready Removable Memory Not connected Format Remove FAX Port 1 FAX Port 2 Line Off Manual RX Line Off Ra i FAX Check New FAX Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device _ Paper Supplies Communication Status 10 10 2008 10 10 Detailed information on controlling devices is gi
185. e and password Lo 4 Press Next of User Login Setting Next of Group il Register the groups that is restricted the machine usage Maximum 20 Authorization Set Register Edit of Group List and then Add Group ID Group Name Detail Delete Cancel Register 2008 10 10 10 10 EE D RE 5 Press Change of Group ID DONAT deas 6 Enter the group ID and press OK DEUS DN 7 Press Change of Group Name Print Restriction Color Copy Restriction gt 8 Enter the group name and press OK Copy Restriction Color gt Copy Restr Full Color Send Restriction P NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix 7 for details on entering characters 2008 10 10 10 10 9 Press Change of Access Level 11 11 Management 10 Select the user access privilege and press OK 11 Press Change of Print Restriction 12 Select Reject Usage or Off and press OK 13 Follow steps 11 and 12 above to set Print Restriction Color Copy Restriction Copy Restriction Color Copy Restr Full Color Send Restriction FAX TX Restriction Storing Restr in Box and Storing Restr in Memory 14 Press Register to add a new group on the group list Obtain Network User Property oet the required information to obtain the network user property from the LDAP server NOTE To obtain the network user property from the LDAP server Network Authentication must be selected fo
186. e away from children The plastic may cling to their nose and mouth causing suffocation XI Precautions for Use Cautions when using the machine A WARNING Do not place metallic objects or containers with water flower vases flower pots cups etc on or near the machine This type of situation presents a danger of fire or electrical shock should they fall inside Do not remove any of the covers from the machine as there is a danger of electrical shock from high voltage parts inside the machine Do not damage break or attempt to repair the power cord Do not place heavy objects on the cord pull it unnecessarily or cause any other type of damage These types of situations present a danger of fire or electrical shock Never attempt to repair or disassemble the machine or its parts as there is a danger of personal injury fire electrical shock or exposure to the laser If the laser beam escapes there is a danger of it causing blindness If the machine becomes excessively hot smoke appears from the machine there is an odd smell or any other abnormal situation occurs there is a danger of fire or electrical shock Turn the main power switch off immediately be absolutely certain to remove the power plug from the outlet and then contact your service representative If anything harmful paper clips water other fluids etc falls into the machine turn the main power switch off immediately Next remove the power plug from the o
187. e correct and safe usage of the machine The symbols and their meanings are indicated below 1 WARNING Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points CAUTION Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage A may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points Symbols The A symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings Specific points of attention are indicated inside the symbol N General warning AN Warning of danger of electrical shock A N Warning of high temperature The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions Specifics of the prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol S Warning of prohibited action G Disassembly prohibited The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol o Alert of required action e Remove the power plug from the outlet Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are illegible or if the guide itself is missing fee required NOTE An original which resembles a bank note closely may
188. e selected paper size or type does not match paper size or type loaded in the specified paper source while printing from the computer by specifying the cassette or multi purpose tray The setting is ignored and the job is printed Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed Use the procedure below to specify the settings for error handling 1 Press the System Menu key Press Common Settings and then Next of Error Handling Press Change at the error you wish to change the handling Select the error handling method in the selection screen for each of the errors and then press OK ao Ff o N The previous screen appears To set the handling for a different error repeat steps 3 and 4 Default Setting System Menu Paper Output Select output tray respectively for copy jobs print jobs from Custom Box computers and FAX RX data The options are as follows Top Tray Delivery on Top Tray of the machine Tray A Tray B Tray C Delivery to trays A to C in the optional 3 000 sheet document finisher Finisher Tray Delivery on Tray set to the optional document finisher Job Separator Delivery on the optional job separator Tray 1 to 7 Delivery to trays 1 to 7 in the optional mailbox tray 1 is the top tray Select Face Up print surface up or Face Down print surface down for paper orientation at output NOTE The optional job separator document finisher or 3 000 sheet document finisher are required
189. ea Lowe Je 7 10 10 2008 10 10 3 Press Lower case 4 Press i s t and Space Use the keyboard to enter Limit 128 characters ii Input 4 character ie SEBGGCICIEGGEIG Sas ee 10 10 2008 10 10 Press Upper case Press A Press No Symbol c Press A or v repeatedly to view the keyboard containing and 1 O N O C 9 Press and 1 Use the keyboard to enter Limit 128 character List A 1 Input 8 character eres LLL Le E CI O A LILI EE BSBgmS C Jo JC ow Jg ox 10 10 2008 10 10 10 Check that the entry is correct Press OK Appendix 9 Paper This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source Cassettes 1 Supported types Supported paper sizes No of sheets Plain paper 60 to 163 g m Letter Letter R Statement A4 A4 R B5 500 80 g m Recycled paper 60 to 163 g m B5 R A5 R Folio 16K 16K R Plain paper 60 to 163 g m Ledger Legal A3 B4 Oficio Il 250 80 g m Recycled paper 60 to 163 g m 8 5 x 13 5 8K Cassettes 2 and the optional paper feeder Supported types Supported paper sizes No of sheets Plain paper 60 to 163 g m Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement 500 80 g m Recycled paper 60 to 163 g m A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R Oficio Il 8 5 x 13 5 Folio 8K 16K 16K R Optional 3 000 sheet paper feeder Suppo
190. en the color mode in scanning has been selected for Grayscale or Full Color set the image f Compression Standard Quality Ratio Priority Priority q ua ity If you selected PDF or High Comp PDF press Encryption and specify the encryption settings O Encryption 5 Press OK 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending File Separation Create several files by dividing scanned original data page by page and send the files Use the procedure below to split scanned original data into separate files when sending scanned originals 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Original Sending Data Format and then File Separation a Ready to send mm 4 Press Each Page to set File Separation Place original File Separation 5 Press OK Jl Create and send a file for each page of the original that was read r 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key The scanned original is sent after being divided into files of one page each 348 the file name 08 08 2009 10 10 NOTE Three digit serial number such as abc_001 pdf abc_002 pdf is attached to the end of 5 13 Sending Functions PDF Encryption Functions If you have selected PDF or High Comp PDF for file format you can restrict the access level for displaying printing and editing PDF s by assigning a secure password
191. end as E mail A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E mail attachment E mail addresses can be selected from the list or entered at each time Appendix 30 SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol A protocol for E mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet It is used for transferring mail between mail servers as well as for sending mail from clients to their servers Status Page The page lists machine conditions such as the memory capacity total number of prints and scans and paper source settings Subnet Mask The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address A subnet mask represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0 The number of bits in the prefix indicates the length of the network address The term prefix refers to something added to the beginning and in this context indicates the first section of the IP address When an IP address is written the length of the network address is indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash For example 24 in the address 133 210 2 0 24 In this way 133 210 2 0 24 denotes the IP address 133 210 2 0 with a 24 bit prefix network section This new network address section originally part of the host address made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet address When you enter the subnet mask be sure to set the DHCP setting to Off TCP IP Transmission Control P
192. ensity when scanning the originals The table below shows the available settings Adjust density using 7 or 13 levels Optimum density is selected according to the density of the original The procedure for adjusting the density is explained below Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Color Image Quality and then Density 4 el Ready to send TTE When selecting manual density adjustment press Hoca onigital 1 3 to 3 Lighter Darker to adjust density Density IS Li m When selecting auto density adjustment press HH LT Auto Place original Lighter 5 Press OK IIIT Cancel el OK 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending 5 17 Sending Functions Scan Resolution Select the fineness of scanning resolution The finer the scanning becomes the larger the number becomes the better the image quality becomes However better resolution also results in larger file size file capacity and longer scanning and sending times The selectable resolution is 200x100dpi Normal 200x200dpi Fine 200x400dpi Super Fine 300x300dpi 400x400dpi Ultra Fine or 600x600dpi The procedure for adjusting the scanning resolution when sending a scanned image is explained below 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Color Image Quality and then Scan Resolution a Ready to send Eg 4 Select
193. ent Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide for details We suggest you to confirm how the machine performs this function on your environment gt Canceled CODy Print the guard send ami pattern using KX or fax DRIVER Machine Operation after Detecting the Document Guard Pattern Common operation Displays the message that indicates the machine detected the document guard pattern and stops scanning the remaining documents Copy functions Prints the documents in blank from the position that the machine detected the document guard pattern Document Box Document Box functions Does not store Does not store the documents in the harddisk documents in the hard disk functions Cancels the ee B FAX functions Does not send the documents Sends the documents that are scanned before the document guard pattern is detected if you have selected File Separation If not every documents will not to be sent 8 81 Default Setting System Menu Limitations Scanning speed will be limited to the speed of scanning 600 dpi image Printing speed will not be limited FAX transmission will be limited to the memory transmission Note The Printed Document Guard Kit should not fully prevents a leak of information We do not guarantee any loss incurred while using this feature or when malfunction occurred with this feature The guard pattern printed on the colored paper or paper that
194. ents The table below shows the available settings O a a Send color documents in RGB Allows you to match the color space for machines that support sRGB Selecting RGB displays the color profile values set on the machine Use the procedure below to set the color type 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Send and then Change of Color Type 3 Select RGB or SRGB 4 Press OK Entry Check for New Destination When adding new destination display the entry check screen to check the entered destination The table below shows the available settings EE EMEN ae Do not display the entry check screen Display the entry check screen NOTE This setting is available with 55 50 ppm model Use the procedure below to set the destination check before send 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Send and then Change of Entry Check for New Dest 3 Select Off or On 4 Press OK 8 31 Default Setting System Menu Setting the Default Send Screen Use this procedure to set the default screen displayed when you press the Send key The table below shows the available settings Destination Displays the destination screen when the Send key is pressed screen for sending Address Book Displays the address book when the Send key is pressed Use the procedure below to set the default send screen 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Send and then Change of Default Screen 3 Press Destination or Ad
195. ep is activated may be lengthened For more information see S eep and Auto Sleep on page 2 10 Automatic 2 Sided Copy Function This device includes 2 sided copying as a standard function For example by copying two 1 sided originals onto a single sheet of paper as a 2 sided copy it is possible to lower the amount of paper used For more information see Duplex Copying on page 3 12 Paper Recycling This device supports the recycled paper which reduces the load on the environment Your sales or service representative can provide information about recommended paper types Energy Star ENERGY STAR Program We have determined as a participating company in the International Energy Star Program that this product is compliant with the standards laid out in the International Energy Star Program ENERGY STAR XXV About this Operation Guide This Operation Guide contains the following chapters Chapter 1 Part Names Identifies machine parts and operation panel keys Chapter 2 Preparation before Use Explains adding paper placing originals connecting the machine and necessary configurations before first use Chapter 3 Basic Operation Describes the procedures for basic copying printing and scanning Chapter 4 Copying Functions Describes the functions you can use when copying Chapter 5 Sending Functions Describes the functions you can use when sending originals Chapter 6 Document Box Provides a basic guide to us
196. er Ig 1 Remove any paper that is inside a t 2 Open the fuser cover and remove the jammed paper m a 3 Open cassette 1 4 Remove the paper 5 Set the cassette and close the cover 10 10 2008 10 10 Jam Location Indicators If a paper jam occurs the location of the jam will be displayed as the following figure with a letter corresponding to the affected component in the machine Clearing instructions will also be displayed Job No 000021 Job Name doc200810101010 a Paper jam Paper Jam Location Indicator Paper Jam Location Reference Page s emm tt p WWRmesTm RS Peon Em Document finisher Option 10 15 Troubleshooting After you remove the jam the machine will warm up again and the error message will be cleared The machine resumes with the page which jam has occurred Precautions with Paper Jams Donotreuse jammed papers e If the paper tears during removal be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming e Discard paper that has jammed in the optional document finisher A page affected by a paper jam will be printed again CAUTION The fixing unit is extremely hot Take sufficient care when working in this area as there is A a danger of getting burned Cassette 1 Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassette 1 1 Pull up left cover 1 lever and open the left cover
197. er Power and main power indicators This status is referred to as Low Power Mode If print data is received during Low Power Mode the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing Also when fax data arrives while the machine is in Low Power Mode when using the optional fax the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing To resume perform one of the following actions The machine will be ready to operate within 30 seconds Press any key on the operation panel Open the original cover or the optional document processor Place originals in the optional document processor Note that ambient environmental conditions such as ventilation may cause the machine to respond more slowly Auto Low Power Mode Auto Low Power Mode automatically switches the machine into Low Power Mode if left idle for a preset time The default preset time is 3 minutes for 25 25 ppm model 30 30 ppm model 40 40 ppm model and 50 40 ppm model or 5 minutes for 55 50 ppm model Preparation before Use Sleep and Auto Sleep Sleep To enter Sleep press the Power key Touch panel and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save a maximum amount of power except the Main Power indicator This status is referred to as Sleep If print data is received during Sleep the print job is performed while the touch panel remains unlit When using the optional fax received fax data is printed out while the operation panel also
198. er to monitor machine usage The key counter offers a convenient solution for centralized management of copy volume for different departments in a large company Inserting the Key Counter Insert the key counter securely into the key counter slot NOTE When the key counter function is activated copies can only be made when a key counter is inserted If the key counter is not inserted nsert key counter will be displayed Appendix 5 FAX Kit By installing the FAX kit fax send receive is enabled Also it is possible to use it as a network fax by using it with a computer When two FAX kits are installed the units can be connected to two different telephone lines which will enable quicker message transmission to a number of recipients If one of the lines is dedicated to receiving the busy line time can be reduced For further details refer to Fax Kit Operation Guide Expansion Memory Image storage memory 128 MB that allows the machine to receive more pages of incoming faxed originals Expansion memory should only be installed or removed by the service representative Data Security Kit The Data Security Kit overwrites all unnecessary data in the storage area of the hard disk so that it cannot be retrieved The Data Security Kit encrypts data before storing it in the hard disk It guarantees higher security because no data cannot be decoded by ordinary output or operations Printed Document Guard Kit This prevents the u
199. eration 3 35 Custom Box 3 33 6 2 Document deletion time 6 3 Form Overlay 6 7 Job Box 3 33 6 12 Quick Setup Registration 8 33 What is Document Box 3 33 Document Finisher Appendix 4 Appendix 24 Document Guard 8 81 Document Processor Appendix 4 Appendix 23 How to Load Originals 2 35 Loading Originals 2 34 Not Supported Originals 2 34 Part Names 2 34 Supported Originals 2 34 Document Table Appendix 6 Double Copy 4 27 dpi Appendix 29 Duplex 3 12 8 37 E EcoPrint Mode Appendix 29 Copy 4 12 Print 8 36 E mail send as E mail 3 25 Emulation Appendix 29 Selection 8 35 Energy Star Program xxv Enlarged Display 8 84 Enter E mail Subject and Body 5 26 Enter key 1 3 3 3 Entry Body 5 26 Document Name 5 25 File Name 4 41 5 25 Subject 5 26 Error Handling 8 12 Error Messages 10 6 Expansion Memory Appendix 6 E File Format 5 12 PDF 5 14 File Name 4 41 File Separation 5 13 Form Overlay 4 22 Storing a Form 6 17 Front Cover 1 4 Index 3 Index FTP Appendix 29 FTP Reception Protocol Detail 8 75 FTP Encrypted TX 5 31 G Glass Platen Cleaning 9 2 GPL xxii Gray Adjustment 8 51 Grayscale 5 21 Appendix 29 Green Knob 1 6 Grounding the Machine xi H Handles 1 4 Help Appendix 29 Host Name 8 73 HTTP Protocol Detail 8 75 HTTPS Protocol Detail 8 75 Hue adjustment 4 31 Image Quality Send 5 16 Image repeat copy 4 27 Included Guides 2 Installation Precautions ix Interface Block 8 80 Internet Browser
200. ertain period of time automatically reset settings and return to the default setting NOTE Refer to page 8 15 for the default settings Auto Panel Reset ON OFF Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not Use the procedure below to specify the auto panel reset setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press v Date Timer and then Change of Auto Panel Reset 3 Press Off or On 4 Press OK 8 56 Default Setting System Menu Panel Reset Timer If you select On for Auto Panel Reset set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel Reset Options are between 5 and 495 seconds every five seconds NOTE If you select Off for Auto Panel Reset the time display does not appear Use the procedure below to set the reset time 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press 7 Date Timer and then Change of Panel Reset Timer 3 Press or to enter the time until Auto Panel Reset is turned on You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value 4 Press OK Low Power Timer You can specify the amount of time to wait before Low Power Mode opecify a value from 1 240 minutes 1 minute increments For more information on Low Power Mode refer to the Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 2 9 Use the procedure below to set the Low Power Mode 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press 7 Date Timer and then Low Power Timer 3 Press or the numeric keys to enter the time until Low Power Mode is turned
201. es Set the default number of copies from 1 to 999 Use the procedure below to specify the default number of copies 8 37 Default Setting System Menu 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Printer and Change of Copies 3 Press or the numeric keys to set the default number of copies 4 Press OK Orientation oet the default orientation Portrait or Landscape Portrait Landscape Use the procedure below to set the default orientation for printing 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Printer and Change of Orientation 3 Press Portrait or Landscape 4 Press OK Form Feed Timeout Receiving print data from the computer the machine may sometimes wait if there is no information signaling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed When the preset timeout passes the machine automatically prints paper The options are between 5 and 495 seconds Use the procedure below to set the form feed timeout 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Printer A and Change of Form Feed Timeout 3 Press or to set the Form Feed Timeout You can set the timeout delay in seconds You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value 4 Press OK 8 38 Default Setting System Menu LF Action oet the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code character code OAH The table below shows the available settings oj LF Only Only line feed performed LF and
202. es min A4 landscape 300 dpi Image quality Text Photo original 40 40 ppm model 1 sided B W 75 Images min 50 40 ppm model Color 75 Images min 55 50 ppm model 2 sided B W 100 Images min Color 100 Images min A4 landscape 300 dpi Image quality Text Photo original Interface 00000000 Ethernet 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX Network Protocol TCP IP Transmission PC transmission SMB Scan to SMB System FTP Scan to FTP FTP over SSL E mail transmission SMTP Scan to E mail TWAIN scan WIA scan 1 When using the dual scan document processor except TWAIN and WIA scanning 2 Available Operating System Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or later Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 o Available Operating System Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 Appendix 22 Document Processor option EE NEBENMNMNEBENWE INMMMMNMNMNNNN Original Feed Automatic feed Method Supported Sheet originals Original Types Paper Size Maximum Ledger A3 Minimum Statement R A5 R Paper PaperWeight Paper Weight 45 to 4510 160gl 00 4510 160gl 00 Loading Capacity 100 sheets 50 to 80 g m maximum Mixed eet sizes auto selection 30 sheets 50 to 80 g m maximum Dimensions 22 23 32 x 21 13 64 x 7 5 64 W x D x H 577 x 534 x 180 mm 14 kg or less Dual scan DP model 14 kg or less Paper Feeder option ee ZI Paper Supply Friction Feed No Sheets 500 80 g m 2 cassettes M
203. ess Advanced Setup and then File Name Entry Press File Name enter the name for a copy job and press OK To add date and time press Date and Time To add job number Job No Added information is displayed in Additional Info Press OK Press the Start key to start copying Suspends a current job and gives the selected job priority for copying The suspended job resumes after Priority Override copying is finished NOTE The current job that is selected as Priority Override cannot be suspended The procedure for using Priority Override is explained below 1 2 4 41 Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Advanced Setup and then Priority Override Press On to select Priority Override Press OK Press the Start key The current copy job is suspended and the copy job selected in Priority Override starts The suspended job resumes after Priority Override copying is finished Copying Functions Repeat Copy Enable additional copies in the desired quantity as necessary after a copy job is completed For confidential documents you can set up a pass code for the use of Repeat Copy In such a case the correct pass code must be entered when using Repeat Copy or copies will not be delivered IMPORTANT A Repeat Copy job is cleared when the main power switch is turned off Repeat Copy is not available when the machine is equipped with the optional Data Security Kit Repeat C
204. ess Image Repeat pM Tr 4 Press Zoom Priority Image Repeat To make double copies press Double Copy and proceed to step 8 5 Press or to set the zoom size Press Keys to enter with numeric keys 6 Tosetthe area of the original to be repeated press On for Specify Repeat Area P owe el o 10 10 2008 10 10 4 27 Copying Functions T Press or to input the area of the original to be repeated With metric models you can enter the border width directly using the numeric keys after pressing Keys Y1 Length from top left of platen to top edge of repeat area X1 Length from Height from top left of platen to left edge of repeat area Y2 Height of repeat area X2 Width of repeat area 8 Press OK 9 Press the Start key Copying begins 4 28 Copying Functions EcoPrint Use EcoPrint to save toner when printing Use this function for test copies or any other occasion where high quality print is unnecessary The procedure for making copies using EcoPrint is explained below 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Color Image Quality and then EcoPrint Ready to copy Copies 4 Press On EcoPrint 5 Press OK e Conserve toner when printing Use EcoPrint for test copies and other situations where high quality copies are not necessary 10 10 2008 10 10 6 Press the Start key to start copying Single Color
205. ess Printer Change of Emulation 3 Select the desired emulation NOTE If you selected KPDL Auto set Alternative Emulation too Refer to page 8 35 When you have selected KPDL or KPDL Auto set KPDL Error Report too Refer to page 8 36 4 Press OK Setting of Alternative Emulation When you have selected KPDL Auto as emulation mode you can switch between KPDL and another emulation mode alternative emulation automatically according to the data to print The alternative emulation you can set is PCL6 Use the procedure below to select the alternative emulation 1 Press the System Menu Key 8 35 Default Setting System Menu 2 3 Press Printer gt Change of Emulation gt KPDL Auto gt Alt Emulation Select the desired alternative emulation and then press OK 4 Press OK Setting of KPDL error report When an error has occurred during printing in KPDL emulation mode set whether or not the error report is output The default setting is Off not output Use the procedure below to specify the KPDL error report setting 1 2 3 4 Press the System Menu Key Press Printer Change of Emulation KPDL or KPDL Auto KPDL Error Report Press On or Off and then press OK Press OK Color Setting You can choose whether status reports are printed in color or black and white Use the procedure below to select the color setting 1 Press the System Men
206. ess the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 Press Next of Job Accounting Setting Next of Default Setting Change of Count by Paper Size Change of Paper Size 1 to 5 and then On Select the paper size User Login Job Accounting Paper Size 1 i Select the paper sizes and types to count Press Media Type to specify media type Select the media type and press OK Press Close Letter Statement p 1 Media Type 10 10 2008 10 10 11 25 Management Printing an Accounting Report Total pages counted at all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered When Split is selected for Managing the Copier Printer Count ACCOUNT REPORT MFP Firmware Version KYOCERA For the count by paper size the report will be printed by size Use the procedure below to print a job accounting report 1 Check that Letter or A4 paper is loaded in the cassette Press the System Menu key Press User Login Job Accounting If user login administration is disabled the
207. ethod Paper Size Ledger Legal Oficio Il 8 5x13 5 Letter Letter R Executive Executive R Statement R A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 R A5 R Folio 8K 16K 16K R Supported Paper Paper weight 60 163 g m Media types standard recycled color Dimensions 23 1 32 x 24 1 2 x 12 13 32 W x D x H 585 x 622 5 x 315 mm Weight Approx 45 2 lbs Approx 20 5 kg 3 000 Sheet Paper Feeder option ee Paper Supply Friction Feed No Sheets 3 000 80 g m Method Supported Paper Paper weight 60 105 g m Media types standard recycled color Appendix 23 gem serio OoOO Dimensions 23 5 16 x 23 5 8 x 12 23 64 W x D x H 585 x 600 x 314 mm Weight Approx 50 71 Ibs Approx 23 kg Document Finisher option ee e Paper Size Ledger Legal Oficio Il 8 5x13 5 A3 B4 Folio 8K 500 sheets Non stapling Letter Letter R A4 A4 R B5 B5 R 16K 1 000 sheets Supported Paper Stapling 90 g m or less Weight Maximum Sheets Ledger Legal Oficio Il 8 5x13 5 A3 B4 8K 25 sheets for Stapling Letter Letter R A4 A4 R B5 B5 R 16K 50 sheets Paper weight 90 g m or less Dimensions 25 x 20 63 64 x 40 5 16 W x D x H 634 9 x 533 x 1013 5 mm Weight Approx 58 42 Ibs Approx 26 5 kg 3 000 Sheet Document Finisher option ee Tray A Ledger Legal A3 B4 8K 1 500 sheets Non Letter Letter R A4 A4R B5 16K 3 000 sheets Stapling Tray B Folio Ledger Legal 12x18 A3
208. f NOTE If the touch panel is turned off press the Energy Saver key or the Power key and wait for the machine to warm up 2 Place the originals on the platen or in the optional document processor NOTE For loading instructions refer to Loading Originals on page 2 32 Coes q 3 Check that Auto is selected of Paper Selection on the touch panel Paper that matches the size of the ee original will be selected automatically gu To change the paper size press Org Paper pa Finishing Paper Selection and select the desired Auto Normal 0 c Shortcut 4 paper source Selection S Shortcut 5 2 sided 2in1 i gt gt 2 sided RET Advanced Setup 4 w MN NOTE Select paper size manually if necessary instead of using automatic paper selection 5 Press the Start key to start copying 6 Remove the finished copies from the top tray Basic Operation Adjusting Density Use this procedure to adjust the density when copying Adjust density using 7 or 13 levels Optimum density is selected according to the density of the original NOTE You may choose Auto mode as the default setting refer to Density on page 8 19 The procedure for adjusting the density of copies is explained below 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Set the original on the platen and press Color Image Quality gt Density Ready to copy Copies 4 Adjust density manu
209. f Paper Size 3 To detect paper size automatically press Auto and select Metric or Inch for Paper Size To select paper size press Standard Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 Others or Size Entry for Paper Size If you select Size Entry press to enter X horizontal and Y vertical dimensions Press Keys to enter the paper size using the numeric keys 4 Press OK The previous screen reappears 5 Press Change of Media Type to select the media type and press OK Paper Weight Select weight for each media type The options for media type and weight of paper are as follows Paper types and weights Y Available N Not available Weight g m 64 g m Transpar Media type or less and more encies o Rough Y defauty Y Labels yt b du b dd yes Ms M Ves y default Bod o Yea Y o m Gor Ye Y Paper Weight Light Thick Envelope Y y y yt Default Setting System Menu Normal 3 Heavy 1 Heavy 2 Heavy 3 du y y y Heavy Y yt default yr Y Y defaut When Normal 3 is selected with the machine that installs the optional document finisher or 3 000 sheet document finisher the maximum sheets for stapling becomes 40 sheets for A4 or less sized paper CNN Bie ne The media type cannot be selected for the cassettes For Custom 1 8 settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed NEN NENNEN INEENN Duplex Prohibit Duplex printing not
210. fault port 139 For Windows Vista use 445 Port 139 LDAP Select whether or not to use LDAP Of NO SNMP Select whether or not to communicate using SNMP pon SNMPv3 Select whether or not to communicate using SNMPv3 HTTP Select whether or not to communicate using HTTP whether or not to communicate Select whether or not to communicate using HTTP HTTP Lo Select whether or not to communicate using HTTPS SSL must be set to On in SSL Setup on page 8 77 Select whether or not to communicate using IPP When selecting On set the IPP default Port Number Use the IPP default port 631 Port 631 IPP over SSL Select whether or not to use IPP over SSL SSL must be set to On in SSL Setup on page 8 77 Raw Port Port Select whether or not to receive documents using Raw Port whether or not to receive documents Select whether or not to receive documents using Raw Port Raw Port pon YO a The machine must be restarted after the setting is changed N The machine does not need to be restarted after the setting is changed lt lt i lt 8 75 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below The following procedure is an example for specifying the SMTP E mail TX settings 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System and then Next of Network to display the network settings screen 3 Display the item you want to set and press Change for that item In this examp
211. fc0 a1 10ae 140 NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix 7 for details on entering characters Press Connection Test to check the connection to the FTP server you chose If the connection fails check the entries you made 8 61 Default Setting System Menu The Folder SMB Address Press Change of Host Name Path Login User Name and Login Password enter the information for each item and press OK The table below explains the items to be entered Description Max No of E Characters Host name or IP address of the sending computer Patho 0 Path to the folder used to save files e Path to the folder used to save files e g UsenScanData Path to the folder used to save files e g User ScanData L User Name User name for folder access For example abcdnet james smith Login Password Password for folder access C If you specify a port number other than the default 139 use the Host name port number format e g SMBhostname 140 To enter the IPv6 address enclose the address in brackets e g 3ae3 9a0 cd05 b1d2 28a 1fc0 a1 10ae 140 NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix 7 for details on entering characters Press Connection Test to check the connection to the computer you chose If the connection fails check the entries you made 9 Checkifthe destination entry is correct and press Register The destination is added to the Address
212. from the standard sizes Selectable paper sizes are as follows Inch size Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R 8 5x13 5 and Oficio Il Metric size A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R and Folio Select from the standard sizes not included in otandard Sizes 1 Selectable paper sizes are as follows Inch size A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R Folio 8K 16K R and 16K Metric size Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R 8 5x13 5 Oficio Il 8K 16K R and 16K Plain 105 g m or less Rough Vellum 64 g m or less Recycled Preprinted Bond Color Prepunched Letterhead Thick 106 g m and more High Quality and Custom 1 8 To change to a media type other than Plain refer to Paper Weight on page 8 7 When the paper weight settings shown below are selected the media indicated for each setting cannot be selected e Bond Heavy 3 e Thick Heavy 3 or Extra Heavy e Custom 1 to 8 Heavy 3 or Extra Heavy To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead refer to Special Paper Action on page 8 10 NOTE If the optional FAX kit is installed the available media types for printing received faxes are as shown below Plain Recycled Bond Color High Quality Rough and Custom 1 to 8 2 28 Preparation before Use 1 Press the System Menu key ystem Menu 2 Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings Next of Cassette Setting 3 Cassette Setting select one
213. g ES the checkbox 10 10 2008 09 40 21 mB The document is marked with a checkmark am 10 10 2008 09 50 21 MB 10 10 2008 10 00 21 MB NOTE To deselect press the checkbox again and ab remove the checkmark v DE Preview Join Move Copy Delete 4 Press P rin t 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Set the paper selection duplex printing etc as desired 6 Press the Start key Printing of the selected document begins Document Box Sending Documents The procedure for sending documents in a custom box is explained below 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Press Custom Box select the box containing the document you want to send and press Open NOTE If a custom box is protected by a password enter the correct password 3 Select the document you wish to send by checking the checkbox F a 0404200710574501 10 10 2008 09 40 21 MB The document is marked with a checkmark 0002 j amp amp 0404200710574511 10 10 2008 09 50 21 MB o03 0404200710574521 10 10 2008 10 00 21 MB NOTE You cannot select and send multiple documents pei To deselect press the checkbox again and remove the Preview checkmark Vv Move Copy Delete Store File 4 Press Send 08 08 2009 10 10 The screen for sending appears NOTE Depending on the settings the address book screen may appear 5 Set the destination NOTE For more information on selecting destinations refer
214. g Size Original Orientation Original Image Color Selection Continuous Scan Basic Operation Default Registration Functions Available for Registration Document Document Color Selection Color Selection Box otorage Resolution Resolution Density Density 2 sided Book Original 2 sided Book Original Original Orientation Original Orientation Original Image Original Image Original Size Zoom Continuous Scan Storing Size Sending File Format File Format From Box Delete after Transmitted Delete after Transmitted FAX TX Resolution FAX TX Resolution Sending Size Sending Size Printing Paper Selection Paper Selection From Box Delete after Printed Delete after Printed Collate Offset Collate Offset Duplex e Duplex Staple Punch e Staple Punch Combine e Combine Changing Registration Ready to copy copes 4 The following procedure is one example for replacing E the registration of Density with Original Image in the ra mI 2 Quick Setup Screen for copying Rise let E Shortcut 2 z Place original Shortcut 3 i el 2 Zoom 100 Shortcut 5 Paper e 2 sided 2in1 O is 2 sided F z Shortcut 6 Quick Setup Org Paper Color Layout Edit Advanced Finishing Image Quali Setup atus 10 10 2008 10 10 ff Auto 100 Normal 0 Shortcut 4 F Paper PA Zoom i Density z PAS 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Copy Next of Quick Setup Re
215. ge outlines When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines clear copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward Sharpen When copying images made up of patterned dots such as magazine photos in which moire patterns appear edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward Unsharpen Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots Refer to the sample image in Quick Guide to Adjusting Image Quality Follow the steps below to adjust sharpness 1 Press Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Color Image Quality and then Press Sharpness 4 Press 3 to 3 Unsharpen Sharpen to adjust the sharpness Ready to copy Copies Sharpness 5 Press OK Unsharpen Sharpen ie dio dio iio io fo d 10 10 2008 10 10 6 Press the Start key Copying begins 4 34 Copying Functions Background Density Adjust Lightens the background of color originals with dark backgrounds NOTE This feature is used with full color and auto color copying Background Density Adjust is disabled during auto color copying when the a black amp white original has been detected Follow the steps below to use background density adjust a 1 Press Copy key Original 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Color Image Quality and then press Background Density Adj pM m 4 Press On Backgrou
216. gistration and then Change of Original Image 3 44 Copy Original Image e 1 Register Original Image function on the Quick Setup screen off Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Key 5 Key 6 Status 10 10 2008 10 10 3 45 Basic Operation Press Key 3 here as the key to set replacement location Press OK A confirmation screen appears Press Yes The Original Image Quality function will be newly registered Basic Operation Program Copying and Sending By registering sets of frequently used functions as a single program you can simply press the program number as needed to recall those functions You can also name the programs for easy identification when recalling NOTE Sending operation can be registered in the program as well Up to 50 functions combining copying and sending can be registered in the program If user login administration is enabled you can only register functions by logging in with administrator privileges Registering Programs Use the procedure below to register a program The following procedure is an example of registering the copying function 1 Press the Program key while the copy mode is accessed 2 Press Register and press a number 01 to 50 for the program number If entering Program screen from the Copy screen or oend screen go to step 4 NOTE If you select a program number already registered the currently registered functions can be replaced with a
217. h was stored for a certain period of time Types of the counts are as follows Printed Pages Displays the number of pages copied and printed and the total number of pages used You can also use Count by Paper Size and Count by Duplex Combine to check the number of pages used For copying you can check the pages used for black and white full color and single color copying as well as the total pages used For printing you can check the pages used for black and white and full color printing as well as the total pages used You can use Count by Paper Size to check the number of pages used in the paper size set in Counting by Paper Size on page 11 25 as well as the number of pages used in other paper sizes You can use the Count by Duplex Combine to check the number of pages used in Duplex 1 sided mode Duplex 2 sided mode and the total for both as well as the pages used in Combine None mode Combine 2in1 mode Combine 4in1 mode and the total for all three Scanned Pages Displays the number of pages scanned for copying faxing and other functions as well as the total number of pages scanned FAX Transmission Pages Displays the number of pages faxed FAX Transmission Time Displays the total duration of fax transmissions i Only displayed when the optional fax kit is installed Total Job Accounting Resetting the Counter This counts the number of pages for all accounts and resets the counts for those a
218. hange paper size and reduce or enlarge copy to match that size Book to Two sided Facing pages Facing pages Produces two sided copies from an open book original gt Two sided gt Facing pages with facing pages NOTE The following sizes of originals and paper are supported in Book to Two sided mode Original Ledger Letter R A3 B4 A4 R B5 R A5 R and 8K Paper Letter A4 and B5 Original The procedure for using two sided duplex copying is explained below 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Layout Edit and then Duplex Ready to copy Copies 4 Select the desired Duplex option 5 If you choose 1 sided gt gt 2 sided or 2 sided gt gt 2 sided select the binding edge of the Ed finished copies of Finishing me If you choose Book gt gt 2 sided press Book gt gt 2 sided or Book gt gt Book of Finishing to select the iB 2 sided gt gt 2 sided 7 ues oe 1 Book al j EUA Lea setting for duplex em inding Binding m mmc E ooo RS ses gt gt 2 sided 10 10 2008 10 10 Top Edge Top 3 13 Ready to copy SE mm Original gt gt 1 sided 5 Si PF 1 1 sided 22 gt gt 2 sided Binding Binding Left Right Top Basic Operation If you choose 2 sided gt gt 1 sided 2 sided gt gt 2 sided Book gt gt 1 sided or Book gt gt 2 sided select the binding edge
219. hat a Local Area Network LAN be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues At the same time as you send a scanned image you can also print the image or send it to the Document Box To use the Scanning Function perform the following steps Program the settings including the E mail setting on the machine Use COMMAND CENTER the internal HTML web page to register the IP address the host name of the SMTP server and the recipient Register the destination in the Address Book or One Touch keys When the PC Folder SMB FTP is selected it is necessary to share the destination folder For setting up the PC Folder contact your administrator Creating Registering a Document Box when a Document Box is selected as the destination Detailed transmission settings to select a Document Box as the destination or to print and send the image at the same time Follow the steps below for basic sending The following four options are available oend as E mail Sends a scanned original image as an E mail attachment page 3 25 Send to Folder SMB Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC page 3 26 Send to Folder FTP Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server page 3 26 send to Document Box Sends a document stored in a document box on this machine page 6 6 Image Data Scanning with TWAIN WIA Loads the document data stored in a Custom Box to a PC Refer to the TWAIN WIA Driver Oper
220. hat you cannot select multiple documents when you are sending documents 3 37 Basic Operation Viewing Editing Box Details You can check and modify box information Use the procedure below 1 Press Register Edit Box in the box list screen N Highlight the box whose details you wish to check or edit and press Detail Edit Document Box Removable Memory Register Edit Box NOTE If a custom box is protected by a password enter the correct password Detail Edit I slete 10 10 2008 10 10 3 Check the box details Box No 0001 gt To edit details press Change of the detail you Box Name Usage Restriction TERT wish to edit Edit the detail as desired and press SALES T MB OK Box Password Overwrite Setting Change Auto File Deletion 30 day s Permit Free Space Delete after Printed 30 GB Off 08 08 2009 10 10 4 f you have changed the details press Register and then press Yes in the confirmation screen If you did not change the details press No 5 Press Close The display returns to the default Document Box screen 3 38 Basic Operation Previewing Documents Checking Document Details You can use this function to preview the documents stored in a document box or display the document details for checking Use the procedure below 1 Select highlight a document to preview and then press Preview or Detail 2 Preview the document or check the document
221. he SMTP default Set the SMTP Port Number or use the SMTP default port 25 20 Enter the SMTP server IP address or its name The maximum length of the SMTP server name and IP address is 64 characters If entering the name a DNS server address must also be configured The DNS server address may be entered on the TCP IP General tab Set the amount of time to wait before time out in seconds the amount of time to wait before time out in seconds When Other is selected for Authenticate the login user name set here will be used for SMTP authentication The maximum length of the login user name is 64 characters This will test if the This will test if the SMTP connection can be successfully established connection can be This will test if the SMTP connection can be successfully established established Enter the maximum size of E mail that can be sent in kilobytes When the value is 0 the limitation for E mail size is disabled Enter the E mail address of the person responsible for the machine such as the machine administrator so that a reply or non delivery report will go to a person rather than to the machine The sender address must be entered correctly for SMTP authentication The maximum length of the sender address is 128 characters Enter the signature The signature is free form text that will appear at the end of the E mail body It is often used for further identification of the ma
222. he domain name Host name Path Failed to send the e mail Check the followings on the Failed to send i FAX COMMAND CENTER SMTP login user name and login password POP3 login user name and login password Failed to send via FTP Check the FTP settings Login user name and login password If the sender is a domain user specify the domain name Path Folder share permissions of the recipient 1103 Failed to send via SMB Check the SMB settings 3 26 Login user name and login password If the sender is a domain user specify the domain name Path Folder share permissions of the recipient Failed to send via FTP Check the FTP settings 3 26 Path Folder share permissions of the recipient 10 11 Troubleshooting Corrective Actions Reference Page Failed to send the e mail Check the e mail address If the address is rejected by the domain you cannot send the e mail Failed to send i FAX Check the i FAX address FAX System S If the address is rejected by the Operation Guide domain you cannot send i FAX Chapter 8 Internet Faxing I FAX Option Failed to send via SMB Select On of the SMB settings on 2 18 the COMMAND CENTER Failed to send the e mail Select On of the SMTP settings on the COMMAND CENTER Failed to send via FTP Select On of the FTP settings on the COMMAND CENTER Failed to send i FAX Select On of the i FAX settings on the COMMAN
223. he numeric keys Press Start Print to start printing The Repeat Copy box job will be deleted when the main power switch is turned off Document Box Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents This setting specifies that documents such as Private Printing Quick Copying or Proof and Hold Printing saved temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted after they have been saved for a set time The table below shows the available settings Temporary documents are not automatically deleted However the temporary documents will be deleted when the power is turned off Use the procedure below to set automatic deletion for temporary documents 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Document Box Removable Memory Next of Job Box then Change of Deletion of Job Retention 3 Select the time for automatic deletion To deactivate automatic deletion press Off 4 Press OK NOTE This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set Regardless of this function setting temporary documents are deleted when the main power switch is turned off Form for Form Overlay Box Storing a Form You can store forms to be used for the form overlay in the Form for Form Overlay box You can store a 1 page form Use the procedure below to store a form 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Place the original in the document processor or on the platen 3 Press Job Box Document Box 4 Select Form for For
224. he procedure below to delete a document Press the Document Box key Press Job Box Select Private Print Stored Job and press Open s Job Box select the creator of the document and press Open Private Print Stored Job User Name gt 1User 5 Ge amp 4User 1 1 To delete the document select the document and press Delete When the delete confirmation screen appears press Yes 10 10 2008 09 45 30 MB If the document is protected by a password enter the password using the numeric keys and the document is deleted 08 08 2009 10 10 Quick Copy Proof and Hold Print Box Quick Copy Proof and Hold box stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Quick Copy or Proof and Hold Print job Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Quick Copy or Proof and Hold Print job using the printer driver Setting the Number of Stored Jobs To maintain free space on the hard disk you can set the maximum number of stored jobs Use the procedure below to set the number of stored jobs 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Document Box Removable Memory Next of Job Box then Change of Quick Copy Job Retention Document Box Removable Memory Quick Copy Job Retention i Set the maximum number of quick copy proof print jobs to retain Use or the numeric keys to enter a number Set this number to 0 to not retain any jobs 0 50 Document Box Pres
225. hen ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 72 Preparation before Use Installing Software Install appropriate software on your PC from the included Product Library CD ROM Product Library if you want to use the printer function of this machine or perform TWAIN WIA transmission or FAX transmission from your PC NOTE Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges Plug and Play is disabled on this device when in Sleep Wake the device from Low Power Mode or Sleep before continuing See Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 2 9 and Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2 10 2 16 Preparation before Use COMMAND CENTER Settings for E mail COMMAND CENTER is a tool used for tasks such as verifying the operating status of the machine and changing the settings for security network printing E mail transmission and advanced networking NOTE Here information on the FAX settings has been omitted For more information on using the FAX refer to the Fax Kit Operation Guide The procedure for accessing COMMAND CENTER is explained below 1 2 Launch your Web browser In the Address or Location bar enter the machine s IP address E g http 192 168 48 21 The web page displays basic information about the machine and COMMAND CENTER as well as their current status addres Gl http j 192 158 48 21 KyoceERa COMMAND CE
226. her Cassette Paper Load Direction gt gt gt gt gt LATUR MMi n N S gt LATUR LATUR n N S gt gt DT i A A E Document Finisher Cassette Paper Load Direction 7 Mh Mii gt gt i gt gt gt lin Mir i gt gt gt gt Mh f m Document Finisher Cassette Paper Load Direction 7 gt E gt tir n N Il tir gt o WN lit i gt gt E Co 18 Basic Operation Use the procedure below to produce stapled copies 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Org Paper Finishing and then Staple Punch 4 Select the staple position Se Bue NOTE To use saddle stitching press Bind and Fold ER EE When placing originals be sure to place the cover 8 2 sons T Bnd page at the bottom For more information on saddle A stitching refer to Booklet from Sheets on page 4 18 Ready to copy Copies Staple Punch ires es 2 holes f 4 holes Left IE Left Original p Top Zoom 100 f 2d dos D Paper o ie aiw jar 9 Press Original Orientation to choose orientation of
227. iate Select appropriate image quality 9 2 clear image quality for the original Printouts are dirty Is the platen or the document Clean the platen or the document processor dirty processor Is the transfer roller dirty Brush the transfer roller clean Is the drum dirty Carry out Drum Refresh Carry out Developer Refresh Is the scanner dirty the scanner Is the scanner dirty Carry out Laser Scanner Cleaning out Laser Carry out Laser Scanner Cleaning Cleaning 8 53 00 53 Is the Printed Document Disable the Printed Document d Guard Kit enabled Guard Kit Printouts are fuzzy Is the machine being used in Carry out Drum Refresh 6 45 very humid conditions Images are skewed Are the originals placed When placing originals on the correctly platen align them with the original size indicator plates When placing originals in the optional document processor align the original width guides securely before placing the originals Is the paper loaded Check the position of the paper 2 35 correctly width guides 10 3 Troubleshooting Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions a Paper often jams Is the paper loaded Load the paper correctly 2 21 correctly Is the paper of the supported Remove the paper turn it over and 2 21 type Is it in good condition reload it Is the paper curled folded or Replace the paper with new paper 2 21 wrinkled Are there any loose scraps or Remove any jammed p
228. iately move to the copy send or document box screen and press the Reset key Default Setting System Menu Original Orientation Set the original orientation defaults The available default settings are shown below lS Top Edge Top Select the original s top edge at the top Top Edge Left Select the original s top edge at the left Refer to page 4 9 for Original Orientation Use the procedure below to select the default orientation when originals are placed on the platen 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults and then Change of Original Orientation 3 Select Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left for the default 4 Press OK Continuous Scan Set the continuous scan defaults The available default settings are shown below m loeo Continuous scan not performed Continuous scan performed Refer to page 4 9 for Original Orientation Use the procedure below to select the default settings for continuous scanning 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults and then Change of Continuous Scan 3 Select Off or On for the default Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals 4 Press OK 8 16 Default Setting System Menu Original Image oet the default original document type The available default settings are shown below EL NNNM ZEE E This function is only availa
229. ilated place e Store paper flat and unopened in the package Once the package is opened reseal it if the paper is not to be used for a while Store paper sealed in the original package and box Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the floor Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete floors e Before using paper that has been stored keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours e Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat sunlight or dampness Appendix 13 Other Paper Specifications Porosity The density of the paper fibers Stiffness Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine causing jams Curl Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened When paper passes through the fixing unit it curls upward slightly To deliver flat printouts load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray Static electricity During printing paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres Choose paper that can be discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together Whiteness Paper whiteness affects print contrast Use whiter paper for sharper brighter copies Quality Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square edges are rough sheets are uncut or edges or corners are crushed In order to prevent these problems be especially careful when
230. inal on the platen and press Layout Edit gt Zoom Ready to copy ae 4 Press Standard Zoom to use Auto Zoom Press or to change the displayed magnification as desired You can also enter the a magnification directly using the numeric keys by e n 11x15 pressing Keys gt gt A4 1419 A4 gt gt A3 When using Preset Zoom select the key of desired ea magnification When using XY Zoom press XY Zoom 10 10 2008 10 10 Press or to change the displayed magnifications of X horizontal and Y vertical You can also enter the magnification directly using the numeric keys by pressing Keys mm Press Original Orientation to select orientation of the originals either Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left Then press OK 25 400 Standard 7nom t t Me E XY Zoom I tl Top Edge Top Original Orientation 10 10 2008 10 10 5 Press OK 6 Press the Start key Copying begins Basic Operation Duplex Copying Produce two sided copies The following duplex options are available You can also create single sided copies from two sided originals or originals with facing pages such as books The following modes are available One sided to Two sided Produces two sided copies from one sided originals In case of an odd number of originals the back side of the last copy will be blank The following binding options are available A Original Left Right to Bind
231. ine from Sleep mode The machine will be ready to copy within a minute Blank sheets are Are the originals loaded When placing originals on the ejected correctly platen place them face down and align them with the original size indicator plates When placing originals in the optional document processor place them face up Printouts are too light Is the machine in Auto oet the correct density level for Density mode auto density Is the machine in Manual Use Image Quality to set the 3 9 Density mode correct density level When changing the default density level adjust the density manually and choose the desired level Is the toner distributed evenly Shake the toner container from within the toner container side to side about several times Is there a message indicating Replace the toner container the addition of toner 10 2 Troubleshooting Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions T Printouts are too dark Is the machine in Auto Set the correct density level for Density mode auto density Is the machine in Manual Use Image Quality to set the Density mode correct density level When changing the default density level adjust the density manually and choose the desired level Copies have a moire Is the original a printed oet the image quality to Print pattern dots grouped photograph Photo together in patterns and not aligned uniformly Printouts are not Did you choose appropr
232. ing Left Right Images on the second sides are not rotated B Original Left Right to Binding Top Images on the Original second sides are rotated 180 Copies can be bound on the top edge facing the same orientation when turning the pages Two sided to One sided Copies each side of a two sided original onto two individual sheets The optional document processor is required Original The following binding options are available e Binding Left Right Images on the second sides are not rotated e Binding Top Images on the second sides are rotated 180 Two sided to Two sided Produces two sided copies from two sided originals The optional document processor is required NOTE The paper sizes supported in Two sided to E Two sided are Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Original Executive Statement R Oficio II 8 5x13 5 A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R and Folio 3 12 Basic Operation Book to One sided Produces a 1 sided copy of a 2 sided or open book original The following binding options are available Original e Binding Left Originals with facing pages are copied from left to right e Binding Right Originals with facing pages are copied from right to left NOTE The following sizes of originals and paper are supported in Two sided to One sided and Book to One sided Original Ledger Letter R A3 B4 A4 R B5 R A5 R and 8K Paper Letter A4 B5 and 16K You may c
233. ing document boxes Chapter 7 Status Job Cancel Explains how to check the job status and job history and how to cancel jobs being printed or waiting to print Also explains how to check the remaining paper and device status and how to cancel fax transmission Chapter 8 Default Setting System Menu Describes the System Menu options for general machine operation Chapter 9 Maintenance Describes cleaning and toner replacement Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Explains how to handle error messages paper jams and other problems Chapter 11 Management Explains user login administration and job accounting Appendix Explains how to enter characters and lists the machine specifications Introduces the convenient optional equipment available for this machine Provides information on media types and paper sizes Also includes a glossary of terms XXVI Conventions in This Guide The following conventions are used depending on the nature of the description comu seinen mmm Bold Indicates the operation panel Press the Start key keys or a computer screen Regular Indicates the touch panel keys Press OK Italic Indicates a message displayed Ready to copy is displayed on the touch panel Used to emphasize a key word For more information refer to Sleep and phrase or references to Auto Sleep on page 2 9 additional information Indicates supplemental information or operations for reference Indica
234. ion 8 38 Override A4 Letter 8 37 Paper Feed Mode 8 40 Printing 3 22 Printing from Applications 3 22 Printing Reports Sending Notice 8 41 Font List 8 41 Network Status Page 8 42 Service Status Page 8 42 Status Page 8 41 Transmission Result Reports 8 42 Priority Override 4 41 7 14 Product Library 2 2 Programmed Copying 3 46 Editing and Deleting 3 47 Recalling 3 46 Index 6 Registering 3 46 Punch 3 20 Q Quick No Search key 1 3 3 3 Quick Setup Screen 3 43 Changing Registration 3 44 8 29 8 30 8 33 R RA Stateless Appendix 30 Raw Port Protocol Detail 8 75 Receive Indicator 1 4 Repeat Copy 4 42 Maximum Number 4 43 Outputting 4 42 Selecting 4 42 Replacement Toner Container 9 8 Waste Toner Box 9 8 Reserve Next 3 16 Reserve Next Priority 8 28 Resolution Appendix 21 Restarting the System 8 72 S Safety Conventions i Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power xvi Scan Resolution 5 18 Default settings 8 17 Scanner Cleaning 8 53 8 54 Secure Protocol 8 77 send File Format 5 12 Image Quality 5 16 Original Size Selection 5 2 Print 5 30 sending Size Selection 5 3 Setup 8 30 Store 5 30 sending Index Send as E mail 3 25 send to Folder FTP 3 28 send to Folder SMB 3 27 sending E mail 2 18 Sending Functions 5 1 Sending Settings 8 30 Color Type 8 30 8 31 Quick Setup Registration 8 30 sending Size Selection 5 3 Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending 3 32 Separato
235. ion to close left cover 1 Troubleshooting Optional Document Processor Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the optional document processor 1 Remove the original from the original tray 2 Open the document processor top cover 3 Remove the jammed original If the original tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine If the original is difficult to remove turn the dial The mill Original will scroll out to a position where it can be Z em removed easily D If the original tears remove every loose scrap from E inside the machine O LL i554 J S Ov 2 10 28 Troubleshooting 4 Liftup reverse unit 5 Remove the jammed original If the original tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine 6 Putreverse unit back in its original place and close the document processor top cover 7 Reload the originals on the document processor tray Optional Document Finisher If a misfeed occurs in the optional document finisher refer to the respective Operation Guides to clear the jam Optional Job Separator Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the optional job separator 1 Ifjammed paper is seen through the paper ejection slot of the job separator pull it toward your side to remove it If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine 10 29 T S SI Troubleshooting 2 Pull up left
236. is selected V J Preview To deselect press the checkbox again and remove the Join Move Copy M m File ch eckmark See 4 Press Delete The delete confirmation screen appears 5 Press Yes The document is deleted 6 11 Using a Job Box Private Print Stored Job Box Document Box Private Print Stored Job Box stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Private Print Stored Job Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Private Print or Stored Job using the printer driver Printing a Document in Private Print Stored Job Box You can print documents stored in a Private Print Stored Job box Use the procedure below to print a document T Job Box Private Print Stored Job Ej Zrie LU LU ZUUG6 UJZ 45 SU MB J 8 3File 10 10 2008 09 50 36 MB a Fite 10 10 2008 09 55 21 MB Press the Document Box key Press Job Box Select Private Print Stored Job and press Open oelect the creator of the document to print and press Open Select the document and press Print If the document is protected by a password enter the password using the numeric keys Specify the number of copies to print as desired Press Start Print to start printing Upon completion of printing the Private Print job is automatically deleted Document Box Deleting a Document You can delete documents stored in a Private Print Stored Job box Use t
237. is explained below 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Layout Edit and then Booklet 4 Press 1 sided gt gt Booklet to produce a booklet Ready to copy hee from single sided originals Booklet EXSDTES s Jum Press 2 sided gt gt Booklet to produce a booklet 2 51 EN from two sided originals Place original E eB XU g z Finish om Press Book gt gt Booklet to produce a booklet from Stitch Book en an open book original a gt gt Booklet FOMENTO o TOW He Orientation 10 10 2008 10 10 5 Ifyou selected 2 sided gt gt Booklet or Book gt gt Booklet choose the binding orientation in Finishing If you selected 1 sided gt gt Booklet choose the binding orientation in Finishing 6 Ifyou choose 1 sided gt gt Booklet 2 sided gt gt Booklet or Book gt gt Booklet you can add the cover Press Cover select Cover and press OK 7 Press Original Orientation to choose orientation of the originals either Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left Then press OK 8 Ifthe optional 3 000 sheet document finisher and folding unit are installed the Saddle Stitch option is displayed To use saddle stitching press Saddle Stitch and then press Bind and Fold You can saddle stitch up to 16 sheets 64 pages 9 Press OK 10 Platen and press the Start key Copying begins 4 19 Copying Functions NOTE When using the platen be
238. l position 9 8 4 5 9 9 Maintenance Open the provided plastic disposal bag and place it at the toner container slot Open the provided plastic disposal bag and place it at the toner container slot Remove the old toner container by holding the handle and place it in the provided plastic disposal bag Hold the new toner container in both hands and shake it from side to side several times Maintenance 6 Hold the new toner container in both hands and gently push it in 7 Turn the toner container release lever to the NI FK m J horizontal position gt N Use the same procedure to replace the other color VIN toner containers lt 6 ys a mw 8 Close the front cover NOTE Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations 9 10 Maintenance Waste Toner Box Replacement 1 Open the front cover 2 Pressthe release button 1 and pull out the waste toner tray 2 3 Capthe old waste toner box 4 Remove the old waste toner box at an angle and place it in the plastic disposal bag provided p CAUTION Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box Dangerous sparks may cause burns 9 11 Maintenance 5 Open the new waste toner box cap 6 Install a new waste toner box
239. l functions but can be changed as necessary Six items in the following options are available Original Size 2 sided Book Original Sending Size Original Orientation File Format Density Original Image Scan Resolution FAX TX Resolution Color Selection Zoom Continuous Scan Use the procedure below to register the Quick Setup functions 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Send and Next of Quick Setup Registration 3 Press Change of the function to be registered in Quick Setup 4 Select a key 1 6 allocated on the Quick Setup Registration screen Press Off to delete a key from the Quick Setup D Press OK If you overwrite the setting a confirmation screen appears Press Yes Destination Check before Send When performing sending jobs display the confirmation screen of destinations after pressing the Start key The table below shows the available settings EN NENNEN IMEEM Do not display the confirmation screen of destinations Display the confirmation screen of destinations NOTE Refer to Confirmation Screen of Destinations on page 3 29 for the Quick Setup steps This setting is available with 55 50 ppm model 8 30 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to set the destination check before send 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Send and then Change of Dest Check before Send 3 Select Off or On 4 Press OK Color Type Set the color type when you send color docum
240. lable for copying functions Paper Selection 8 27 e Auto Paper Selection 8 27 Auto Priority 8 28 Reserve Next Priority 8 28 e Preset Limit 8 29 e Quick Setup Registration 8 29 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Paper Selection Set the default paper selection The table below shows the available settings Item Description am Auto Automatically select the cassette containing paper in the same size as originals Default Paper Source Select paper source set by Default Paper Source refer to page 8 9 Use the procedure below to set the default paper selection 1 Press the System Menu key Press Copy and Change of Paper Selection Press Auto or Default Paper Source Press OK ao fF W N Move to the copy screen and press the Reset key Auto Paper Selection If Auto is selected for Paper Selection set the paper size selection method when the zoom changes The table below shows the available settings a NENNEN Most Suitable Size Select paper based on the current zoom and the size of the original oame as Original Size Select paper that matches the size of the original regardless the zoom 8 27 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to specify the action performed for Auto Paper Selection 1 Press the System Menu key Press Copy and Change of Auto Paper Selection P
241. lacement 9 8 otatus 7 15 WIA Appendix 32 WSD Print Setup 8 77 WSD Scan 5 27 Setup 8 76 X XPS File formats 5 12 8 18 Printing documents stored in Removable USB Memory 6 20 Saving documents to Removable USB Memory 6 22 Z Zoom Copying Auto Zoom 3 10 Manual Zoom 3 10 Preset Zoom 3 10 XY Zoom 3 11 Zoom Mode Copy 5 5 Send 5 5 Index 8 E1 We recommend the use of our own brand supplies We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine QUALITY CERTIFICATE This machine has passed all quality controls and final inspection MEMO MEMO PASSIONATE PEOPLE FROM ALL OVER THE WORLD KYOCERA MITA EUROPE B V EUROPEAN HEADQUARTERS Bloemlaan 4 2132 NP Hoofddorp The Netherlands Phone 31 20 654 0000 Fax 31 20 653 1256 www kyoceramita europe com KYOCERA MITA Europe B V Amsterdam NL Zweigniederlassung Zurich Hohlstrasse 614 CH 8048 Zurich Phone 41 1 908 49 49 Fax 41 1 908 49 50 www kyoceramita ch KYOCERA MITA SALES COMPANIES IN EMEA KYOCERA MITA INTERNATIONAL SALES Europe Middle East amp North Africa Bloemlaan 4 2132 NP Hoofddorp The Netherlands Phone 31 20 654 0000 Fax 31 20 653 1256 www kyoceramita europe com AUSTRIA KYOCERA MITA AUSTRIA GmbH Eduard Kittenberger Gasse 95 A 1230 Wien Phone 43 1 86 338 0 Fax 43 1 86 338 400 www kyoceramita at BELGIUM S A KYOCERA MITA Belgium N V Sint M
242. lack and White 1 Low Quality High Comp to Auto Color Color Grayscale Auto 5 High Quality Low Comp Color Color Black and White Full Color Grayscale Black and White JPEG 1 Low Quality High Comp to Auto Color Color Grayscale Full 5 High Quality Low Comp Color Grayscale 1 Low Quality High Comp to Auto Color Color Grayscale Full 5 High Quality Low Comp Color Grayscale High Comp 1 Compression Ratio Priority Auto Color Color Grayscale Auto PDF to 3 Quality Priority Color Color Black and White Full Color Grayscale NOTE In the color mode when auto color color black and white is selected JPEG and XPS cannot be specified and when black and white is selected JPEG High Comp PDF and XPS cannot be specified When High Comp PDF is specified you cannot adjust the image quality In addition when previewing the color of the image by selecting High Comp PDF it may differ from the actual color You can use PDF encryption functions For details refer to the following PDF Encryption Functions 0 12 Sending Functions Use the procedure below to select the file format for transmission 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Original Sending Data Format and then File Format e Ready to send Destination 4 Select the file format from PDF TIFF JPEG Place original 1 XPS and High Comp PDF File Format Image Quality Wh
243. laying Status Screens Use the procedure below to display the Status screen 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key 2 The Status screen appears Press either of Status Printing Jobs Sending Jobs or Storing Jobs to r UU check the status pted Time es Job Name User Name Status 438 14 47 L abc def com InProcess To check the scheduled transmission job press Sending Jobs and then Scheduled Job For an explanation of the screen refer to Details of the Status Screens on page 7 3 Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device _ Paper Supplies J J J Communication n 10 10 2008 10 10 1 2 Status Job Cancel Details of the Status Screens The items and keys displayed on the status screens are as follows For information on how to display the Status screen see Displaying Status Screens on page 7 2 Printing Jobs Status Screen Status Status Job No End Date Type Job Name User Name Result 000001 10 10 09 50 e doc10102008095050 AAAAA InProcess 000002 10 10 09 55 doc10102008095510 AAAAA Waiting 000003 10 10 10 00 doc10102008091000 AAAAA Waiting 1 1 1 2 3 4 6 8 9 10 11 12 Pause All Cancel Priority Move Up Detail Print Jobs Override Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device _ Paper Supplies Communication atus 10 10 2008 10 10 The table below lists the items displayed in the Printing Jobs Status screen Me eee E Accepted Time
244. le press Change of SMTP E mail TX Press On or Off 5 Press OK After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 72 NetWare Setup Select the NetWare network connection After that select frame types for NetWare network from Auto Ethernet Il 802 3 802 2 or SNAP The default settings are On Frame Type Auto Use the procedure below Press the System Menu key Press System Next of Network and then Change of NetWare Press On 1 2 3 4 Press the key for the frame type you want to use 5 Press OK 6 After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 72 AppleTalk Setup Select the Apple Talk network connection Refer to AppleTalk Setup on page 2 15 about the procedures WSD Scan Setup Select whether or not to use WSD Scan The default setting is On Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key Press System Next of Network and then Change of WSD Scan Press On or Off Press OK a fF W N After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 72 8 76 Default Setting System Menu
245. letion of all entries press Connection Pace original 1 Test to check the connection Folder Path Entry Host Name mq NOTE Connected appears when connection to the destination is correctly established If Cannot connect rU appears review the entry om i Specify the folder on the destination computer prm To specify another destination go to the step 6 To specify only one destination go to step 7 Add to Addr Book Next Dest Cancel el OK 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Press Next Dest and repeat steps 3 to 5 to specify the destination You can specify a combined total of up to 10 FTP and SMB destination folders NOTE When Add to Addr Book is displayed the entry is registered in the Address Book T Press OK to register the entry in the destination list 3 28 Basic Operation El Ready to send 8 Check the destination list Place original 3 Destination Detail nares Select a destination and press Detail Edit to check E shelf m and edit it Edit it if necessary referring to steps 3 TUVW 10 200 188 120 Auto TEM to 5 OO Group e Folder Path KTUENCUNEES CTI QU CUN FAX No Select a destination and press Delete to remove e aor xz os oos 0005 Cro the destination from the list AAA BBB CCC DDD EEE b SEDES 3 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 4 WSD Scan m omm e NOTE When On is selected in FTP E
246. licy and then press OK Proxy Settings Use the procedure below to specify the proxy settings 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press v and then Internet NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 Press Change of Proxy and then press On To set a proxy server HTTP 1 Press Keyboard of Proxy Server HTTP enter the proxy address and press OK 2 Press Keys and enter the port number To set a proxy server HTTPS 1 Press Keyboard of Proxy Server HTTPS enter the proxy address and press OK 2 Press Keys and enter the port number To set domains for which no proxy is used 1 Press Keyboard of Do Not Use Proxy for Following Domains enter the domain name and press OK NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix 7 for details on entering characters 4 Press OK 8 68 Default Setting System Menu Applications You can install and use applications that will make your day to day use of this machine more efficient Installing Applications You can install new applications Use the procedure below to install an application 1 Insert the USB memory containing the application to be installed into the USB memory slot A1
247. llate Offset ce Use the procedure below to set the default Collate Offset settings 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings 7 Next of Function Defaults Press s twice and Change of Collate Offset 3 Select the defaults for Collate and Offset respectively 4 Press OK JPEG TIFF Print Select the image size resolution when printing JPEG or TIFF file The table below shows the available settings a ae a Fit to Paper Size Fit the image size to the selected paper size Image Resolution Print at resolution of the actual image Fit to Print Resolution Fit the image size to the print resolution Use the procedure below to set the default JPEG TIFF Print settings 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings s Next of Function Defaults Press v twice and Change of JPEG TIFF Print 3 Select the default for Fit to Paper Size Image Resolution or Fit to Print Resolution Press OK 8 25 Default Setting System Menu XPS Fit to Page Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS file Use the procedure below to set the default XPS Fit to Page settings 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings 7 Next of Function Defaults Press v twice and Change of XPS Fit to Page 3 Select Off or On for the default Press OK 8 26 Default Setting System Menu Copy Settings The following settings are avai
248. lor Background Density Adjust 4 35 5 20 Color Grayscale Black and White Selection 5 21 Color balance adjust 4 30 Color Calibration Cycle 8 50 Index 1 Color Profiles 5 32 Color Registration 8 47 Color Type 5 31 8 30 8 31 Gray Adjustment 8 51 Hue adjust 4 31 One touch image adjust 4 33 Single Color copy 4 29 Color balance adjust 4 30 Color Calibration 8 52 Color mode 3 6 Color Selection Copy 8 17 Color Selection Send Store 8 18 Color Toner Empty Action 8 15 Color type 5 31 Combine Mode 2 in 1 Mode 4 12 4 in 1 Mode 4 12 Page Boundary Lines 4 13 COMMAND CENTER 2 17 Connecting LAN Cable 2 5 Power Cable 2 6 USB Cable 2 6 Connection Method 2 3 Continuous Scan Copy 4 36 send 5 22 Conventions in This Guide xxvii Copy Appendix 6 Adjusting Density 3 8 Collate Copying 3 14 Duplex Copying 3 12 Offset Copying 3 14 Originals 4 2 Selecting Image Quality 3 9 Setup 8 27 Zoom Copying 3 10 Copy Settings 8 27 Auto 9o Priority 8 28 Auto Paper Selection 8 27 Border Erase for Back Page 8 27 Paper Selection 8 27 Preset Limit 8 29 Quick Setup Registration 8 29 Reserve Next Priority 8 28 Copying Functions 4 1 Index Counting the Number of Pages Printed by Paper Size 11 25 Counter 11 27 Each Job 11 24 Printing a Report 11 26 Total Job 11 23 Unknown Account ID Jobs 11 27 Counting the Number of Pages Printed 11 23 Cover Mode 4 21 Custom Box D Creating a New Box 6 2 Deleting Documents 6 11 Editing Documents
249. lose left cover 1 10 23 Troubleshooting Duplex Unit and Cassette 1 Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in duplex unit and cassette 1 1 Pull up left cover 1 lever and open the left cover 2 Remove the jammed paper 3 Press the specified position to close left cover 1 4 If the left cover 2 indicator is flashing open left cover 2 MN MIU 10 24 10 25 Troubleshooting Remove the jammed paper If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine Close the left cover 2 Pull out cassette 1 and remove the jammed paper If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine Push cassette 1 back in place securely Troubleshooting Fixing unit Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the fixing unit 1 Pull up left cover 1 lever and open the left cover 1 2 Remove the jammed paper Rl ee m I v bb ce CL RUNE J 3 Open the fuser cover A1 CAUTION The fixing unit is extremely hot Take A sufficient care when working in this area as there is a danger of getting burned 10 26 nx Z uM RES Z Im T 6 10 27 Troubleshooting Remove the jammed paper If the paper tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine If jammed paper is seen through the paper ejection slot pull it toward your side to remove it Push fuser cover back in place and press the specified posit
250. lowing types of the boundary lines are available m B n I Borders Cropmark Dotted The procedure for using Combine mode copying is explained below Ready to copy Combine Place original Lad Eis lg Copies Layout Right then Left then Down Down Top Edge Top Down then Down then Right Lert Original Orientation 10 10 2008 10 10 1 2 3 4 4 13 Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Layout Edit and then Combine Press 2 in 1 or 4 in 1 and choose the page layout of Layout Press Border Line to choose the type of the lines to indicate page boundaries Press OK Press Original Orientation to choose orientation of the originals either Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left Then press OK Press OK Press the Start key Copying begins If the original is placed on the platen replace the original and press the Start key After scanning all originals press Finish Scan to start copying Copying Functions Margin Centering Mode Shift the original image to make space on the copy for binding on the left right or top bottom side When you copy onto paper different from the original size you can center the original image on the paper The following margin widths are available Inch Models 0 75 to 0 75 in 0 01 increments Metric Models 18 mm to 18 mm in 1 mm increments Margin on the B
251. m Overlay and press Open NEMIS Files amp Private Print Stored Job 21 E Quick Copy Proof and Hold 21 Repeat Copy 21 E Form for Form Overlay 21 Status 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Press Store File Form for Form Overlay fj 1010200809530900 10 10 2008 09 00 E MB 1010200800530910 10 10 2008 09 10 30 MB 1010200800530920 10 10 2008 09 20 30 MB l Close Status 08 08 2009 10 10 6 If necessary select the image quality of original scanning density etc before the original is scanned 7 Press the Start key The original is scanned and stored in the Form for Form Overlay box NOTE For information on using image overlays with a stored form see Form Overlay on page 4 22 and Form Overlay from Custom Boxes on page 6 7 Deleting a Form Stored You can delete the form stored in the Form for Form Overlay box Use the procedure below to delete a form 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Press Job Box 3 Select Form for Form Overlay and press Open 6 18 Document Box 4 Select the form to delete and press Delete Form for Form Overlay The delete confirmation screen appears V Jy T Close Status 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Press Yes The form is deleted 6 19 Document Box Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB
252. m the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity the hue of printed color output may shift or color drift may occur Using this function enables printing in the most appropriate color by adjusting hue and color drift in detail Use gray adjustment when the color is not enhanced even after performing color calibration see page 8 51 If the hue and color are not enhanced use color registration see page 8 47 1 2 3 4 Press the System Menu key Press v Adjustment Maintenance v and then Next of Color Calibration Press Execute Color Calibration begins Press OK after Color Calibration is complete 8 52 Default Setting System Menu Developer Refresh When the printing is too light or incomplete even though there is enough toner refresh the developer 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Vv Adjustment Maintenance v and then Next of Developer Refresh 3 Press Execute Developer Refresh begins NOTE Waiting time may be longer when the toner is refilled during developer refresh 4 Press OK after Developer Refresh is complete Laser Scanner Cleaning If white or color streaks appear on images perform Laser Scanner Cleaning 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Adjustment Maintenance v and then Next of Laser Scanner Cleaning 3 Press Execute Laser Scanner Cleaning begins 4 Press OK after Laser Scanner Cleaning is complete MP Tray Cleaning If dirt appears on i
253. mages when using the multi purpose tray perform MP Tray Cleaning 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press 7 Adjustment Maintenance v and then Next of MP Tray Cleaning 3 Load two sheets of A4 or Letter paper in the multi purpose tray 4 Press Execute MP Tray Cleaning begins Press OK after MP Tray Cleaning is complete 8 53 Default Setting System Menu First Print Position Using this function speeds up either of the first print time of black and white printing or color printing by changing the default start position of the first print In addition the machine can automatically detect the appropriate position depending on your usage a Auto Automatically detects the appropriate position depending on your usage 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press 7 Adjustment Maintenance v and then Next of First Print Position 3 Select Standard Black amp White Priority Color Priority or Auto 4 Press OK 8 54 Default Setting System Menu Date Timer Date Timer settings include Date Time 8 55 e Date Format 8 55 Time Zone 8 56 Auto Panel Reset 8 56 Low Power Timer 8 57 e Auto Sleep 8 57 Error Clear Timer 8 59 e Interrupt Clear Timer 8 59 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Date Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine If you
254. me way as the entry of Password to Open Document enter the password to change the PDF file 10 Press Detail 11 File Format Detail Printing Allowed Not Allowed Changes Allowed Not Allowed y Copying of Text Images Others f Disable Enable Cancel n OK 08 08 2009 10 10 The table below shows the available settings Sending Functions Restrict the access level of the PDF file Press 47 of Printing Allowed to select the item the scope of limit The item to be displayed differs according to the version of Acrobat selected in Compatibility in step 4 Not Allowed Make the printing of PDF file impossible Allowed Low Resolution Can print the PDF file only in low resolution only Allowed Can print the PDF file in original resolution Only displayed when Acrobat 5 0 and later is selected in Compatibility 12 Press wy of Changes Allowed and select the The table below shows the available settings item the scope of limit The item to be displayed differs according to the version of Acrobat selected in Compatibility in step 4 Not Allowed Cannot change the PDF file Inserting Deleting Can only insert delete and rotate the pages of the Rotating Pages PDF file Page Layout except Can change the page layout except extracting the extracting Pages pages of the PDF file Any except extracting Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages Pages of the PDF file
255. ment Maintenance and then Change of Display Brightness 3 Press 1 4 Darker Lighter to adjust brightness 4 Press OK Silent Mode Make the machine run more quietly Select this mode when the running noise is uncomfortable Use the procedure below to set Silent mode 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press V Adjustment Maintenance and then Change of Silent Mode 3 Press Off or On 4 Press OK Auto Color Correction This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine to determine whether the original is color or black and white during Auto Color Mode Setting a lower value will result in more originals being identified as color while a larger value will tend to increase the number of originals being identified as black and white ami Use the procedure below to set the Auto Color Detection Level 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press 7 Adjustment Maintenance v and then Change of Auto Color Correction 3 Press one of keys 1 to 5 Color B amp W to set the detection level 4 Press OK Color Registration When first installing the machine or moving it to a new location color drift during printing may occur Use this function to correct the color position of each of cyan magenta and yellow to resolve color drift Normal registration and detailed settings are available for Color Registration Color drift can be largely corrected through normal registration However if
256. mm increments Plain 105 g m or less Transparency Rough Vellum 64 g m or less Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Thick 106 g m or more Envelope Coated High Quality Custom 1 to 8 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper sizes Custom 1 to 4 refer to Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on page 8 4 i The input units can be changed in the System menu Refer to Switching Unit of Measurement on page 8 11 Forinstructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8 refer to Paper Weight on page 8 7 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead refer to Special Paper Action on page 8 10 NOTE You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them as default refer to Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray on page 8 6 Copying Functions Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type Copies Ready to copy Paper Selection MP Tray Setting Standard Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 A4 d B4 B6 Others Size Entry O Media Type mu e 10 10 2008 10 10 Copies Original Size f X Standard Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 Others l Y Nl Plain Media Type OK 10 10 2008 10 10 1 10 Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen
257. n CopyResticion Select whether or not to reject usage of copy functions whether or not to Select whether or not to reject usage of copy functions usage of copy functions Copy Restriction Color Select whether or not to reject usage of the color copy functions 11 10 Management re a Copy Restr Full Color Select whether or not to reject usage of only the full color copy functions Send Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of the send functions FAX TX Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of the FAX transmissions Storing Restr in Box Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document boxes Storing Restr in Memory Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the removable memory For Group ID specify PrimaryGrouplD assigned by ActiveDirectory of Windows If you are using Windows Server 2008 check Attribute Editor tab of user properties If you are using Windows Server 2000 2003 check ADSIEdit ADSIEdit is a support tool included on the installation CD ROM for Windows Server OS under SUPPORT TOOLS Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user nam
258. n for the elderly and those who are physically challenged or visually impaired Touch panel characters can be enlarged while the touch panel is adjustable in two angles AppleTalk AppleTalk which comes with Apple Computer s Mac OS is a network protocol AppleTalk enables file printer sharing and also enables you to utilize application software that is on another computer on the same AppleTalk network Auto Form Feed Timeout During data transmission the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data This is the auto form feed timeout When the preset timeout passes the machine automatically put paper out However no output is performed if the last page has no data to be printed Auto Paper Selection A function to automatically select paper in the same size as original at printing Auto Sleep A mode designed for electrical power saving activated when the machine is left unused or data transfer for a specific period In Sleep mode power consumption is kept to a minimum Bonjour Bonjour also known as zero configuration networking is a service that automatically detects computers devices and services on an IP network Bonjour because an industry standard IP protocol is used allows devices to automatically recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set Bonjour also sends and receives network packets by UDP port 5353 If a firewall is enabled the user must check that UDP port
259. n the details to be edited Status 10 10 2008 10 10 Changing account information 1 Press Detail mum 2 Referto steps 5 to 7 of Adding an Account and Account Name ge steps 2 to 5 of Restricting Using the Machine 2 N to change account information Account ID Change 00001000 mil 3 Press Register Copy Restriction Total Change Print Restriction Total Change p g F off p off 4 Press Yes in the registration confirmation Copy Restr Full Color Change Print Restr Full Color SCreen The accou nt information IS changed i off off Copy Restr SingleColor ange ia 12 Cancel l Register Status 10 10 2008 10 10 Deleting an account 1 Press Delete 2 Press Yes To delete the account 11 17 Management Managing the Copier Printer Counts You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown either the total of both or each of copying and printing individually The selection may influence restriction on the count and count method Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11 18 Counting the Number of Pages Printed on page 11 23 and Printing an Accounting Report on page 11 26 for details Use the procedure below to set the counting methods 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 Ifuser login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For
260. n the operation panel Using the Enter key The Enter key works in the same way as keys displayed on the touch panel such as OK and Close The Enter symbol is displayed next to the keys whose operations are carried out by the Enter key e g 9 OK 4 Close The operation of the Enter key is explained below using copy paper selection as an example For details of the procedure refer to Paper Selection on page 4 3 Gps 1 Inthe paper selection screen press the key for the cassette containing the required paper size Ready to copy The Enter symbol appears on the OK on the touch panel indicating that the Enter key performs the same action as OK Place original SENE Original 2 Tocopy using the selected paper press the Enter EX GEN key or OK Paper DES Add Shortcut S Use the Quick No Search keys to perform an action by simply entering a number directly using the numeric keys For example you can specify the speed dial for a transmission destination or recall a stored program by its program number The Quick No Search key performs the same action as the No displayed on the touch panel The use of the Quick No Search key is explained below using an example in which a speed dial number is specified and used to select a destination For more information on speed dialing refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 30 1 Press the Quick No Search key or No
261. n up to 10 documents Detail Y Preview Status 08 08 2009 10 10 NOTE To deselect press the checkbox again and remove the checkmark 4 Press Join 6 9 Document Box 5 Arrange the documents into the order in which they are to be joined i Confirm the order of documents to combine File Name BE TIS Highlight the document you want to rearrange and 8 2008101010574501 10 10 2008 02 40 21m8 press Up or Down to move it to the correct place amp 2008101010574511 10 10 2008 09 50 21 MB in the sequence 2008101010574521 10 10 2008 10 10 21 MB 6 Press Next 08 08 2009 10 10 7 Press File Name enter the file name for the joined document and press OK NOTE Enter up to 32 characters as the file name 8 Press Join and then press Yes in the confirmation screen The documents are joined NOTE After joining the original documents are left unchanged Delete the documents if they are no longer needed 6 10 Document Box Deleting Documents The procedure for deleting documents in a custom box is explained below 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Press Custom Box select the box containing the document you want to delete and press Open NOTE If a custom box is protected by a password enter the correct password 3 Select the document you wish to delete by checking the checkbox The document is marked with a checkmark am NOTE Delete is disabled until a document
262. n with the three black boxes aligned to the top 5 Press Execute The color pattern is read and adjustment begins The second color pattern is output 6 Check that the number 2 to 3 is printed at the bottom of the color pattern and repeat steps 4 to 6 twice to read color patterns 2 and 3 in sequence 7 Press OK in the adjustment end confirmation screen 8 51 Detailed Adjustment Default Setting System Menu A total of 5 color pattern pages No 1 to 5 are printed during detailed adjustment As with normal adjustment page 8 51 the printed color patterns are read sequentially during detailed adjustment Use the procedure below to carry out detailed adjustment 1 2 Color Calibration Press the System Menu key Press v Adjustment Maintenance v and then Next of Gray Adjustment Press Detail Press Execute A color pattern is printed Check that the number 1 is printed at the bottom of the color pattern As shown in the illustration place the printed side down on the platen with the three black boxes aligned to the top Press Execute The color pattern is read and adjustment begins The second color pattern is printed Check that the number 2 to 5 is printed at the bottom of the color pattern and repeat steps 5 to 7 four times to read color patterns 2 3 4 and 5 in sequence Press OK in the adjustment end confirmation screen After prolonged use or fro
263. nauthorized copying and or transmission of documents that contain important confidential or personal information When a document is printed from a computer this feature imprints a special pattern on the document When anyone attempts to copy or send that document on this machine the machine detects the pattern and protects the information by printing the document in blank prohibiting transmission Document Table Place original or other documents when using the machine It has a drawer to accommodate clips Appendix 6 Character Entry Method To enter characters for a name use the on display keyboard in the touch panel following the steps as explained below NOTE QWERTY QWERTZ and AZERTY are available as keyboard layouts the same as a PC keyboard Press the System Menu key Common Settings and then Change of Keyboard Layout to choose desired layout QWERTY layout is used here as an example You may use another layout following the same steps Entry Screens Lower case Letter Entry Screen a Use the keyboard to enter Limit 128 characters Input 0 characte WS 3 E E RE US IZ ER ER IS ES EN EA S EA ES EA ES EA A RA A A eA AA Bee oe oe ee AA No Symbol Space Cancel e ok 10 10 2008 10 10 me sees eme 2 Lint ay Dilys marmu rumoer or ducem a Press to move the cursor on the display to move the cursor on the Press to move the cursor on the display Backspace
264. nced Setup and then Continuous Scan If Continuous Scan is selected press On If Job Build is selected press Job Build and select desired binding orientation Press OK Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen and press the Start key If Job Build is selected the next page can be changed Press Sheet Insertion to insert a blank paper Press Next Copy On Back in duplex copying to print the next page on back page Place the next original and press the Start key Repeat these steps to scan the remaining originals After scanning all originals press Finish Scan to start copying Auto Image Rotation Copying Functions Automatically rotates the image when the sizes of the original and the loaded paper matches but the orientations are different The images will be rotated 90 counter clockwise prior to copying NOTE To set Auto Image Rotation as the default mode refer to Auto Image Rotation on page 8 22 The procedure for making copies using Auto Image Rotation is explained below 1 2 3 Negative Image Inverts black and white portions of the image for printing Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Advanced Setup and then Auto Image Rotation Press On to select Auto Image Rotation Press OK Press the Start key to start copying NOTE This function is only available for black and white copy mode Use the procedure below to make neg
265. ncrypted TX scd Mn A page 5 31 keys appear for selecting the encryption l method for the FTP transmission destination Select Auto DES 3DES or AES as the encryption method When selecting On for Entry Check for New Destination page 8 31 the confirmation screen appears Enter the same host name and path again and press OK When selecting On for Destination Check before Send page 8 30 the confirmation screen appears after pressing the Start key For details refer to Confirmation Screen of Destinations on page 3 29 Confirmation Screen of Destinations When selecting On for Destination Check before Send page 8 30 the confirmation screen of destinations appears after pressing the Start key Follow the steps below to confirm the destinations el Ready to send mU 1 Press or A to confirm every destination Place original Press Detail to display the detailed information on Destination the selected destination 3 A OFFICE 1234567890 To delete the destination select the destination you D 1d Rn d want to delete and press Delete Press Yes in the LL confirmation screen The destination is deleted To add the destination press Cancel and then return to the destination screen 08 08 2009 10 10 2 Press Check NOTE Be sure to confirm every destination by displaying them on the touch panel You cannot press Check unless you have confirmed eve
266. nd facing will differ depending on the type of envelope Be sure to load it in correctly otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face NOTE When you load envelopes in the multi purpose tray select the envelope type by referring to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2 30 2 27 Preparation before Use Specifying Paper Size and Media The default paper size setting for cassettes 1 and 2 for multi purpose tray and for the optional paper feeder cassettes 3 and 4 is Auto and the default media type setting is Plain To fix the type of paper to be used in cassettes specify the paper size and media type setting Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2 28 To fix the type of paper to be used in multi purpose tray specify the paper size setting Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2 30 Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes To fix the type of paper to be used in cassettes 1 or 2 or the optional paper feeder cassettes 3 and 4 specify the paper size Also you use a media type other than plain paper specify the media type setting Selection Item Selectable Size Type Paper Auto oize Standard Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 Media Type Paper size is automatically detected and selected Select whether the paper is in Metric size or in nch size Select
267. nd Density Adj Background Lighter Darker ALA A x 10 10 2008 10 10 5 Press 1 to 5 Lighter Darker to adjust the background color intensity 6 Press OK 7 Press the Start key Copying begins 4 35 Continuous Scan Copying Functions When a large number of originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time the originals can be scanned in separate batches and then copied as one job With this function originals are scanned until you press Scan Finish Any of the following settings can be changed during scanning Original size selection Original orientation Image quality selection Type of original 2 sided book original e Zoom e Border erase Density e Color Selection If you use Job Build you can insert a blank paper during scanning or a blank page during duplex copying The procedure for making copies using Continuous Scan is explained below Ready to copy Continuous Scan Copies i Select desired binding orientation Binding Binding Binding Left Right Scan next original s Place the originals and press Start key Press Finish Scan to start copying Job No 000021 Job Name doc20080505113414 Scanner Setting T ABC D E Original Original Original Siz Orientation Image O Border Erase Copies Finishing Next Copy On Back Sheet Insertion 10 10 2008 10 10 4 36 Press the Copy key Press Adva
268. nd details oe ren Volume Mute 1 Minimum to Set the buzzer volume level rera Key Confirmation Off On Emit a sound when the control panel and touch panel keys are pressed Job Finish Off On Emit a sound when a print job is normally completed Ready Off On Emit a sound when the warm up is completed Warning Emit a sound when errors occur Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to set the sound options 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings Next of Sound and then Next of Buzzer 3 Press Change of Volume Key Confirmation Job Finish Ready or Warning 4 Select the buzzer volume level or other sound options Original Paper Settings Register additional types and sizes of originals and paper Custom Original Size Setup oet up frequently used custom original sizes The custom size options are displayed on the screen to select original size The dimensions available are as follows The table below lists the sizes that can be registered Inch models X 2 to 17 in 0 01 increments Y 2 to 11 69 in 0 01 increments Metric models X 50 to 432 mm in 1 mm increments Y 50 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments Up to four custom original sizes can be added Use the procedure below to set a custom original size Press the System Menu key Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings and then Next of Custom Original Size Press Change of any one of Custom
269. nd then Log Status 3 Select the job to check details from the list and press Detail Job Type All Job No EndDate Type Job Name User Name Result Detailed information of the selected job is 000080 01 25 14 14 ox doc20070225141427 Completed displayed 000081 01 25 14 22 fJ doc20070225142253 Completed 000082 01 25 14 23 Bd doc20070225142310 Completed 001 001 000083 01 25 14 24 doc20070225142458 Error 000084 01 25 14 30 doc20070225143034 Completed NOTE To check the information of the next previous page press v or A Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device _ Paper Supplies Communication atus 10 10 2008 10 10 4 To exit from the detailed information press Close 10 Status Job Cancel Sending the Log History You can send the log history by e mail You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically whenever a set number of jobs is reached Setting the Destination oet the destination to which log histories are sent Use the procedure below to set the destination 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Report Next of Sending Log History and then Change of Destination 3 Toenter a new e mail address press E mail Address Entry Press E mail Address enter the destination e mail address and then press OK 4 Tosetan address from the address book press E mail Address Book Press Address Book Select
270. nd to Folder and Fax Transmission optional Adding a Destination Add a new destination to the Address Book There are two registering methods contacts and groups When adding a group enter the group name and select group members from the Address Book NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges Adding a contact A maximum of 2 000 contact addresses can be registered Each address can include the information such as destination name E mail address FTP server folder path computer folder path and FAX No optional Use the procedure below to register a new individual contact 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Edit Destination Register Edit of Address Book Add Contact and then Next 3 To specify the address number press Change in Address Number 4 Press or numeric keys to enter a particular Address Number 1 2500 To have the number assigned automatically enter 0000 NOTE Address Number is an ID for a destination You can select any available number out of 2 500 numbers for contacts and 500 numbers for groups If you specify an address number that is already in use an error message appears when you press Register and the number cannot be registered If you set 0000 as the address number the address is registered under the lowest available number 5 Press OK The screen shown in step 3 reappe
271. nding Sending Functions Border Erase Use Border Erase to remove black shadows that appear around the outside of the original when scanning and sending originals The following options can be selected Border Erase Sheet Erases black borders around the single sheet original Original Border Erase Book Erases black borders around the edges and in the middle of the original such as a thick book You can specify the widths individually to erase the borders around the edges and in the center of the book Original Individual Border Erase opecify border erase widths individually for all edges Plaid Original In each option the available ranges are as below Input units Border Erase Range Inch models 0 to 2 in 0 01 increments Metric models 0 mm to 50 mm in 1 mm increments 5 23 Border Erase to Back Page Sending Functions When scanning a 2 sided original this allows you to erase the borders on the back of the original The table below shows the available settings Same as Front Border Erase performed using the same setting as the Page front page Do Not Erase No Border Erase performed on the back page Use the procedure below to erase borders when sending scanned originals Destination Ready to send Place original t Border Erase 0 50 Border lt ee Do Border Erase Front Page Book A Gutter OG Back Page E Individual 5
272. new set of functions Check that Copy is selected and press Next 4 Enter the new program name and press Register to register the program Recalling Programs Use the procedure below to recall a registered program 1 Press the Program key 2 Press Recall and press the key corresponding to the program number 01 to 50 to recall Press the Quick No Search key or No to enter the program number directly for recalling i Program recalling NOTE If the program cannot be recalled the Document Box or the form overlay specified in the program might have been deleted Check the Document Box 10 10 2008 10 10 3 Place the originals and press the Start key Copying is performed according to the registered program 3 46 Basic Operation Editing and Deleting Programs You can change program number and program name or delete program Use the procedure below to edit or delete a program 1 Press the Program key 2 Press Edit and press the key s corresponding to the program number 01 to 50 to change or delete 3 Toedita program use the procedure for registering a program and press Change Then change the program number and program name and press Register Choose Yes in the confirmation screen to change the program To delete the program press Delete this Program Choose Yes in the confirmation screen to finally delete the program 3 47 Basic Operation Registering
273. ng Sending to Different Types of Destinations 3 32 N Negative Image 4 37 NetBEUI Appendix 30 Protocol Detail 8 75 NetWare Appendix 30 Setup 8 76 Network Preparation 2 13 Setup 8 73 Network Cable 2 4 Connecting 2 5 Network Interface 2 4 O OHP backing sheet mode 4 44 One Touch Key Changing the Registered Information 8 65 Deleting the Registered Index Information 8 65 Editing 8 65 One touch image adjust 4 33 Open SSL xxii Operation Panel 1 2 1 4 Option 3 000 sheet document finisher Appendix 4 3 000 sheet paper feeder Appendix 4 Data Security Kit Appendix 6 Document Finisher Appendix 4 Document Processor Appendix 4 Document Table Appendix 6 Expansion Memory Appendix 6 FAX Kit Appendix 6 Job Separator Appendix 5 Key Counter Appendix 5 Overview Appendix 2 Paper Feeder Appendix 4 Option Interface Slot 1 6 Optional Functions 8 83 Orientation Confirmation 8 15 Original Loading in the Document Processor 2 34 Placing on the Platen 2 32 Size xxviii Original Cover 1 4 Cleaning 9 2 Original Orientation Copy 4 9 Document Processor 4 9 Orientation Confirmation 8 15 oend 5 11 Original Placement Indicator Indications and Status 2 35 Original Size Indicator Plates 1 4 2 32 Original Size Selection Send 5 2 Original SSLeay License xxiii Originals Automatic Detection 8 9 Copy 4 2 Custom 8 4 oetup 8 4 Size Selection 4 2 5 2 Index 5 Output Destination 4 11 Output Tray 8 14 P Page Numbering 4 23 Paper
274. ng Priority Override is explained below 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key 2 Press Printing Jobs Status 3 Select the job to be given priority and press Status Priority Override All Job No End Date Type Job Name User Name Result 000001 10 10 09 50 doc10102008095050 AAAAA InProcess Waiting Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device _ Paper Supplies Communication 10 10 2008 10 10 4 Press Yes in the confirmation screen The current job in printing is suspended and the job for override printing starts 5 When the Priority Override is completed the printing job that has been suspended will be resumed Reordering Print Jobs This function allows you to select a queued print job and raise its output priority The procedure for reordering print jobs is explained below 1 Press the Status Cancel key 2 Press the Printing Jobs Status 3 Select the job to be assigned a higher priority and fiue press Move Up The priority of the selected job is increased by 1 To further raise the job s priority press Move Up again Each time you press Move Up the priority increases by 1 Pause All Cancel Print Jobs Printing 306s Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Paper Supplies OLEO 10 10 2008 10 10 14 Status Job Cancel Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper Check the remaining amount of toner paper and staples on the touch panel Use the procedure below to
275. ng the size of the original is selected automatically EB A5 I MP Tray BEN E 5 Press OK Original i Oo mee eoi 6 Press the Start key to start copying 10 10 2008 10 10 Selecting the Multi Purpose Tray Change the paper size and media type Copying Functions The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below How to Category Select Standard Sizes 1 Choose from the standard Size Standard Sizes 2 Choose from the standard sizes not included in the Standard Sizes 1 Others Choose from non standard sizes and custom Sizes Enter the size not included in the standard sizes 1 and 2 Inch models Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement 8 5x13 5 Oficio Il and Executive Metric models A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R B6 B6 R A6 R and Folio Inch models A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R B6 R A6 R Folio 8K 16K and 16K R Metric models Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement 8 5x13 5 Oficio Il Executive 8K 16K and 16K R ISO B5 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 Envelope 9 Commercial 9 Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope CA Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Youkei 4 Youkei 2 and Custom 1 to 4 Inch models Horizontal 5 83 to 17 in 0 01 increments Vertical 3 86 to 11 69 in 0 01 increments Metric models Vertical 98 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments Horizontal 148 to 432 mm in 1
276. nly End is available press End The job will be canceled Paper jam If a paper jam occurs the machine will stop and the location of the jam Will be indicated on the touch panel Leave the machine on and follow the instruction to remove the jammed paper Removable memory This job is canceled Press End error Removable memory This job is canceled Press End is full Remove originals from the document processor put them back in their original order and place them again Press Continue to resume printing Press Cancel to cancel the job Replace the waste The waste toner box is full Replace toner box the waste toner box Remove all originals Are there any originals leftin Remove originals from the document in the document the document processor processor processor Replace all originals and press Continue Scanner memory is Scanning cannot be performed due full to insufficient memory of scanner Only one copy of the scanned pages is available Press Continue to print send or store the scanned pages Press Cancel to cancel the printing job Send error An error has occurred during transmission Refer to Responding to Send Error for the error code and corrective actions Set the waste toner The waste toner box is not installed box correctly Set it correctly 10 9 Reference Page 10 15 10 11 Co A MEN O Troubleshooting Checkpoints Corrective Actions gr re
277. nly domain names entered in uppercase will be recognized 6 Press OK Login Logout Once you enable user login administration a login user name and password entry screen appears each time you use this machine Login Use the procedure below to login 1 Ifthe screen below appears during the operations press Login User Name Enter login user name and password Login to EZ Y Press Keys to enter the login data using the Uer name_cat numeric keys po 2 Enter the login user name and press OK NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on IC Card in Appendix 7 for details on entering characters Cancel 4 Login 10 10 2008 10 10 3 Press Login Password Press keys to enter the login data using the numeric keys Logout Logout Management 4 Enterthe login password and press OK NOTE If Job Accounting is enabled you can browse the number of pages printed and the number of pages scanned by pressing Check Counter If Network Authentication is selected as the user authentication method either Local or Network can be selected as the authentication destination 5 Check the login user name and password are correct and press Login To log out the machine press the Logout key to return to the login user name login password entry screen Auto Logout Logout is automatically executed in the following cases When the Power key is pressed to enter the slee
278. node Because the network addresses that can be used are allocated automatically the IPv6 node management workload is reduced in systems where the administrator has to exercise close control over IP address allocation dpi dots per inch A unit for resolution representing the number of dots printed per inch 25 4 mm EcoPrint Mode A printing mode that helps save toner Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal Emulation The function to interpret and execute other printers page description languages The machine emulates operation of PCL6 KPDL and KPDL automatic FTP File Transfer Protocol A protocol to transfer files on the TCP IP network whether the Internet or an intranet Along with HTTP and SMTP POP FTP is now frequently used on the Internet Grayscale A computer color expression Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray varying from black at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest without any other colors Gray levels are displayed in numerical levels that is white and black only for 1 bit 256 gray levels including white and black for 8 bits and 65 536 gray levels for 16 bits Help A Help key is provided on this machine s operation panel If you are unsure of how to operate the machine would like more information on its functions or are having problems getting the machine to work properly press the Help key to view a detailed explanation on the touch panel
279. notes OHP film Original Copied Sheet After copying to a transparency copies the same original image to the backing sheet paper denotes OHP film Original Copy Follow the steps below for OHP Backing Sheet mode 1 Press Copy key 2 Place the original 3 Loadthe transparencies into the multi purpose tray IMPORTANT Fan through the transparencies before loading Up to 10 transparencies can be loaded at one time Be sure that paper of the same size and orientation as the transparencies is loaded in the cassette 4 44 Ready to copy Copies OHP Backing Sheet i Select the paper source to feed paper Blank Sheet ey Poker Auto Copied Sheet Plain Plain Original Zoom 100 _Paper Herm NT 10 10 2008 10 10 Plain 4 45 Copying Functions Press Advanced Setup and then Press OHP Backing Sheet Press Blank Sheet or Copied Sheet Select the media to be fed If you press Auto the machine automatically selects media that matches the size of the original Press OK Press the Start key Copying begins Copying Functions 4 46 5 Sending Functions This chapter explains the functions available for sending originals Gy uie ede ETE TUUM 5 2 ames 6 618 Size eiie eee eee eee ee eee eee 5 9 scio 5 5 MN oom mmm 5 6 9 Po SIE E E TE E NNO 5 7 e 1 sided 2 sided SSISCUON cso 0sasisacedasnsigse
280. nt finisher set Set the document finisher correctly correctly For details refer to the respective Operation Guides Clean the slit glass Clean the slit glass using the cleaning 9 3 cloth supplied with the document processor The machine detects the documents guard pattern The scanned document is printed in blank and sending of the document is canceled Failed to specify Job The job is canceled Press End Accounting Failed to store job The job is canceled Press End retention data Confidential document is detected FAX box limit exceeded Finisher tray is full of Is the acceptable storage paper capacity exceeded for the document finisher tray Hard Disk error Job is canceled Press End Troubleshooting Checkpoints Corrective Actions era FAX box is full and no further storage is available The job is canceled Press End Try to perform the job again after printing or deleting data from the FAX box Remove paper from the document finisher tray If printing can be restarted the touch panel display will prompt you to press Continue Then press Continue An error has occurred on the hard disk The possible error codes and their descriptions are as follows 01 Initialization error Initialize the hard disk 04 Insufficient space on the hard disk to complete this operation Move or delete data stored on the hard disk to increase available space Incorrect acc
281. nu key Press System Next of Network and then Next of TCP IP Setting Press Next of Pv6 Press Next of Manual Setting Press IP Address Manual to enter IP address The format of the IPv6 address is a sequence of numbers 128 bit in total separated by colons e g 2001 db8 3c4d 15 1a2c 1a1f Press OK Press Keys of Prefix Length 0 128 to enter the prefix length using the numeric keys Press Default Gateway to enter the default gateway Check that all the entries are correct and Press OK After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 72 RA Stateless Settings Select whether or not to use RA Stateless The RA Stateless settings are available when selecting On for TCP IP IPv6 The default setting is On Use the procedure below JO Oc PP c N Press the System Menu key Press System Next of Network and then Next of TCP IP Setting Press Next of Pv6 Press Change of RA Stateless Press On or Off of RA Stateless When selecting On P Address 1 to 5 Stateless appears Press OK After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 72 DHCP IPv6 Settings Select whether or not to use the DHCP IPv6 serve
282. ny of Standard Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 Others or Size Entry and select the paper size If you have chosen Size Entry press or to enter X horizontal and Y vertical sizes You may enter the size directly using the numeric keys by pressing Keys Press OK The previous screen reappears Press Change of Media Type and select the media type Then press OK Preparation before Use Loading Originals Follow the steps below to load originals for copying sending or storing Placing Originals on the Platen You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals 1 Open the original cover NOTE If the optional document processor is installed open the document processor Before opening the document processor be sure that there are no originals left on the original table or on the original eject table Originals left on the original table or on the original eject table may fall off when the document processor is opened Keep the document processor open if the original is 40 mm 1 5 8 or thicker 2 Place the original Put the scanning side facedown and align it flush against the original size indicator plates with the back left corner as the reference point 2 32 Preparation before Use Original size indicator plates Inch models Letter Letter Statementa 85 Letter Legala Ledger a 7 11 13 15 17 A6O B6tc1
283. o Special Paper Action on page 8 10 NOTE If the optional FAX kit is installed and the multi purpose tray is used to print a received FAX the available media types are as shown below Plain Recycled Bond Color High Quality Rough and Custom 1 to 8 2 30 ystem Menu Common Settings Multi Purpose Tray Setting i Set the multi purpose tray paper size MN o c o Standard M A6 B4 B5 B5 G Sizes 1 y Standard B6 5 Folio z Sizes 2 Others Size Entry z 10 10 2008 10 10 Common Settings Paper Size 1 Set the multi purpose tray paper size Auto Standard X 148 432 Y 98 297 420 297 Em Standard om Sizes 2 i Others Size Entry Cancel d OK 10 10 2008 10 10 Common Settings Media Type i Select type of paper in Multi Purpose Tray e lL E pn Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Envelope p Coated High Quality Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 Custom 4 Custom 5 Custom 6 Custom 7 Custom 8 10 10 2008 10 10 Preparation before Use Press the System Menu key Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings Next of MP Tray Setting and then Change of Paper Size For automatic detection of the paper size press Auto and select Metric or Inch as the unit To select the paper size press a
284. o USB 6 22 6 1 Document Box Using a Custom Box NOTE In the following explanation it is assumed that user login administration is enabled For details on User Logon privileges refer to User Privileges on page 3 40 Creating a New Custom Box Use the procedure below to create a new box in the user box 1 Press the Document Box key s Custom Box 2 Press Custom Box and then Register Edit Box 0001 l s SALES Anonymous a 1 1 Register Edit Box Vv Store File Detail P alu 08 08 2009 10 10 Press Add 4 Press Change for each item enter the information and then press OK The table below lists the items to be set Enter the box number by pressing or number keys The box number can be from 0001 to 1000 A Custom Box should have a unique number If you enter 0000 the smallest number available will be automatically assigned Box Name Enter a box name consisting of up to 32 characters Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix for details on entering characters Box Password User access to the box can be restricted by specifying a password to protect the box Entering a password is not mandatory Enter the same password of up to 16 characters in both Password and Confirm Password Document Box Usage Restriction To preserve the hard disk capacity the storage capacity for a box can be restricted To enable a capacity restriction enter
285. o select the paper size and media type used by Auto Selection 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings and then Change of Media for Auto Color or Media for Auto B amp W 3 Select All Media Types or any media type for paper selection 4 Press OK Paper Source for Cover Paper Select paper source for cover paper from Cassette 1 4 or Multi Purpose Tray Cover is used for Booklet see page 4 18 and Cover see page 4 21 modes NOTE Cassette 3 is displayed when either of the optional paper feeder or 3 000 sheet paper feeder is installed and Cassette 4 is displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed Use the procedure below to select the paper source for the cover 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings Vv and then Change of Paper Source for Cover 3 Select the paper source to load cover paper 4 Press OK Special Paper Action When printing on Prepunched Preprint and Letterhead punch holes might not be aligned or the print direction might be upside down depending on how originals are set and the combination of copying functions In such a case select Adjust Print Direction to adjust the print direction When paper orientation is not important select Speed Priority The table below lists the available settings and their details ee re Adjust Print Direction Adjust print direction Print speed i
286. o start copying Copying Functions Booklet from Sheets The Booklet copying option allows you to copy sheet originals and produce booklets such as small brochures or pamphlets A booklet such as a magazine is made by folding at the center You can copy the cover page onto colored paper or thick paper Paper for the cover is supplied from the multi purpose tray To feed the cover paper from the cassette refer to Paper Source for Cover Paper on page 8 10 NOTE Using the optional 3 000 sheet document finisher and the folding unit enables you to saddle stitch your copies fold them in two with staples in the center This is limited to the A3 B4 A4 R Ledger Legal Letter R The supported original and paper sizes are as follows One sided original A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 A5 R Two sided original Ledger Legal Letter and Letter R A3 B4 A4 R Ledger Legal and Letter R Book original A3 B4 A4 R B5 R A5 R A4 A4 R B5 B5 R Letter and Letter R Ledger Letter R and 8K A3 B4 A4 R B5 R A5 R A4 R and Letter R Ledger and Letter R Except for custom sized originals For binding on the left side Original The folded copies can be read from left to right For binding on the right side The folded copies can be read from right to left Original 4 18 Copying Functions For top binding The folded copies can be read from top to bottom Original The procedure for using Booklet copying
287. ob E mail 10 10 2008 10 10 Status Destination Processing Destination ABCDE User Name User1 Job Name doc20070404115151 Accepted Time 10 10 10 Status 10 10 2008 10 10 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key 2 Press Printing Jobs Sending Jobs or Storing Jobs To check the scheduled transmission press Sending Jobs and then Scheduled Job 3 Select the job whose details you wish to check from the list and press Detail Detailed information of the selected job is displayed Use 7 or A to see the next or previous page of information In Sending Jobs you can check the destination by pressing Detail in Status Destination Detail Job No 000081 Type Destination Status doc20070404131415 Sending User01 Waiting 10 10 2008 10 10 Status Job Cancel Status Destination is displayed when address is selected Press Detail to display the list Press v or A select a destination and press Detail Information on the selected job is displayed for checking 4 To exit from the detailed information press Close Checking Job History Check the history of completed jobs Status Job Cancel NOTE Job history is also available by COMMAND CENTER or KMnet Viewer from the computer Available Job History Screens The job histories are displayed separately in three screens Printing Jobs Sending Jobs and Storing Jobs The following jo
288. ocument finisher is required Original Copy each set The procedure for using collate offset copying is explained below 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Org Paper Finishing and then Collate Offset Ready to copy Ta 4 Touse collate copying press On of Collate Collate Offset To use offset copying press Each Set of Offset ag Press OK Eee If Off is selected for Collate press Off or Each Page of Offset 5 Press OK Collate Sym um a ues af sem UN _ 10 10 2008 10 10 6 Press the Start key Copying begins 3 15 Basic Operation Reserve Next This function allows you to reserve the next job during printing Using this function the original will be scanned while the machine is printing When the current print job ends the reserved copy job is printed The procedure differs depending on the Reserve Next Priority refer to page 8 26 If Reserve Next Priority is set to On The Copy function default screen appears on the touch panel during printing Ready to copy cones 4 1 Place the originals onto the machine for reserving copy and configure the copy settings Shortcut 1 ej Shortcut 2 5 e Shortcut 3 el Auto 100 Normal 0 l l Shortcut 4 uu SS SS SS SS Ee gpm pm e fen election J Shortcut 5 2 sided 2in1 off z gt gt 2 sided um pun s r Shortcut 6 o Advanced Setup 10
289. ode Recovers from Sleep if in Sleep Mode Lit when the machine s main power is on Receive Memory Attention Interrupt Logout Feo Gea 333 Numeric keys Returns settings to Enter numbers and symbols their default states Clears entered numbers and characters Cancels or pauses the Recalls already registered destinations and printing job in progress programs for sending Starts copying and scanning operations and processing for setting Finalizes numeric key entry and finalizes screen during operations setting of functions Operates linked with the on screen OK 1 3 Machine dd T l Ha Mi RAN D icm ig 1 Original Cover Option 2 Platen 3 Original Size Indicator Plates 4 Slit Glass 5 Left Cover 1 6 Left Cover 1 Indicator 7 Left Cover 1 Lever 8 Left Cover 2 Indicator 9 Left Cover 2 10 Left Cover 3 11 Handles 12 Clip Holder 13 Operation Panel 14 Attention Indicator Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped 15 Receive Indicator Blinks while data is received 16 Front Cover 17 Cassette 1 18 Cassette 2 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Part Names 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 19 20 21 22 24 25 26 29 30 Toner Container Release Lever Magenta Toner Container Magenta Toner Container Release Lever Cyan Toner Container Cyan Toner Container Release Lever
290. of Cassette 1 to Cassette 4 and press Next Then press Change of Paper Size NOTE Cassette 3 and Cassette 4 are shown when the optional paper feeder is installed 4 Forautomatic detection of the paper size press Auto and select Metric or Inch as the unit aan ee To select the paper size press Standard Sizes 1 ees or Standard Sizes 2 and select the paper size 5 Press OK The previous screen reappears zo Jug e r Standard i D B5 J Folio Dp Sizes 1 ni Standard Sizes 2 z 10 10 2008 10 10 ee res 6 Press Change of Media Type and select the ll ce oF paper in Cassette 1 media type Then press OK Rough Vellum Recycled Preprinted Bond Color Prepunched Letterhead Thick High Quality Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 Custom 4 Custom 5 Custom 6 Custom 7 Custom 8 10 10 2008 10 10 2 29 Preparation before Use Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray To fix the type of paper to be used in the multi purpose tray specify the paper size When using other than a plain paper specify the media type EE BENE EN Paper Auto Paper size is automatically detected and selected oize Select whether the paper is in Metric size or in Inch size otandard Select from the standard sizes Selectable paper sizes oizes 1 are as follows Inch size Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement R Exe
291. of the originals of Original Press Original Orientation to select orientation of 2 sided X gt gt 1 sided 1 2 sided gt gt 2 sided or gt gt 1 sided ee Original mmu 8 Press OK o the originals either Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left Then press OK 10 10 2008 10 10 9 Press the Start key Once an original placed on the platen is scanned replace it with the next one Then press the Start key After scanning all originals press Finish Scan to start copying Collate Offset Copying The machine can collate and offset at the same time as it copies You can use the Collate Offset copy function for tasks such as those shown below Collate Scan multiple originals and deliver complete sets of copies as required according to page number Original Offset Without Document Finisher If the optional document finisher is not installed when you use offsetting printed copies are produced after rotating each set or page by 90 NOTE You need to load the same sized paper with different orientation in the paper source other than the selected paper source The paper sizes supported in Offset are A4 B5 Letter and 16K Original Copy each set 3 14 Basic Operation With Document Finisher When you use offsetting printed copies are segregated after each set of copies or after each page NOTE The optional document finisher or 3 000 sheet d
292. ok you can send the FAX by entering the address directly viii Caution Warning Labels Caution Warning labels have been attached to the machine at the following locations for safety purposes Be sufficiently careful to avoid fire or electric shock when removing a paper jam or when replacing toner A A m E ATTENTION High temperature inside Do not EUN uere cata CHAUDE gt touch parts in this area because smwawe SERIE O N j j renem CALIENTE there is a danger of getting burned Ei LM EXTREMELY SEHR HEISSE HOT SURFACE OBERFLACHE Avoid contact Do not touch the support area for the document processor as there is a danger that your fingers or other objects may become caught or pinched and this can result in injury High temperature inside Do not touch parts in this area because there is a danger of getting burned Label inside the machine Laser radiation warning DANGER CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM ATTENTION CLASE 3B RAYONNEMENT LASER EN CAS D OUVERTURE EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU VORSICHT KLASSE 3B LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNE NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN ATTENZIONE CLASSE 3B RADIAZIONE LASER IN CASO DI APERTURA EVITARE L ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO PRECAUCION CLASSE 3B RADIACIONE LASER CUANDO SE ABRE EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO VARO
293. ol on off SMTP Port Number SMTP Server Name mailserver kyocera com E mail Recipient 1 SMTP Server Timeout seconds Management E mail Recipient 2 SMMP b E mail Recipient 3 LDAP Authentication Protocol On O POP before m al a a 2 2 18 Preparation before Use 2 Enterthe correct settings in each field The settings to be specified in the SMTP settings screen are shown below EE a ee XEM SMTP Protocol Enables or disables SMTP protocol To use E mail this protocol must be enabled SMTP Port Number Port Number Server Name SMTP Server Timeout Server Timeout E Enables or disables the MEET authentication protocol or sets POP before SMTP Protocol as the protocol The SMTP authentication supports Microsoft Exchange 2000 Authenticate as Authentication can be set from three POP3 accounts or you can choose a different account Login User Name Login Password When Other is selected for Authenticate the password set here will be used for authentication The maximum length of the login password is 64 characters POP before SMTP oet the amount of time to wait before time out in seconds when you have Timeout selected POP before SMTP as the Authentication Protocol Tet MEE Size Limit Sender Address Domain Restriction 3 Click Submit Set the SMTP Port Number or use the SMTP default port 25 the SMTP Port Number or use t
294. olor Color Gray Automatically recognize whether the document is color or black and white and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Grayscale Auto Color Color B amp W Automatically recognize whether the document is color or black and white and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Black and White Full Color Scan document in full color Scan document in grayscale for smoother and finer finish Black amp White Scan document in black and white File size is smaller than Full Color or Grayscale Use the procedure below to select the default color mode 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults and then Change of Color Select Send Store 3 Select the default color mode 4 Press OK File Format Select the default file type to send the scanned originals The available default settings are shown below mem Desppion Send files in PDF format TIFF Send files in TIFF format JPEG send files in JPEG format send files in XPS format High Comp PDF Send files in High Comp PDF format refer to page 5 14 NOTE Refer to page 5 12 for file formats 8 18 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to select the default file format 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults and then Change of File Format 3 Select the default file format
295. ommon Settings s Next of Function Defaults 7 and then Change of Border Erase to Back Page 3 Press Same as Front Page or Do Not Erase 4 Press OK Margin Default oet the default margin The table below shows the measurement ranges that can be set Fee Re 0 75 to 0 75 in 0 01 increments Metric 18 mm to 18 mm in 1 mm increments Use the procedure below to set the default margin width 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults X and then Change of Margin Default 3 Use the or to enter the margin widths for Left Right and Top Bottom You can use the numeric keys to enter the number directly 4 Press OK Auto Image Rotation Select the default Auto Image Rotation setting The table below shows the available settings EE NEM No Auto Image Rotation performed Auto Image Rotation performed NOTE Refer to page 4 37 for Auto Image Rotation Use the procedure below to set the default Auto Image Rotation settings 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v Next of Function Defaults N and then Change of Auto Image Rotation 3 Select the default for Off or On 4 Press OK 8 22 Default Setting System Menu EcoPrint oelect the EcoPrint default The table below shows the available settings a No EcoPrint performed EcoPrint performed NOTE Refer to page 4 12 for EcoPrint
296. on 4 Press OK Auto Sleep If no job runs for a certain period of time automatically enter Sleep Mode Refer to Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2 10 for Sleep Auto Sleep ON OFF oelect whether to use Auto Sleep or not NOTE Time remaining before Auto Sleep can be modified as necessary Use the procedure below to specify the auto sleep setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press 7 Date Timer and then Change of Auto Sleep 3 Press Off or On 4 Press OK 8 57 Default Setting System Menu Sleep Timer Set the amount of time to wait before Auto Sleep Options are between 1 and 240 minutes every one minute NOTE If you select Off for Auto Sleep the time display does not appear Use the procedure below to set the Auto Sleep time 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press 7 Date Timer and then Change of Sleep Timer 3 Press and or the numeric keys to enter the time until Auto Sleep is turned on 4 Press OK Auto Error Clear If an error occurs during printing the print job stops to wait for the next step to be taken by the user In the Auto Error Clear mode automatically clear the error after a set amount of time elapses The following errors are automatically cleared Print overrun Memory is full Auto Error Clear ON OFF Select whether to use Auto Error Clear or not Use the procedure below to specify the auto error clear setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press
297. onnect to Check the domain name authentication server hacia imsbpame Check the connection status with the Server Responding to an Attention Indicator Flashes If an attention indicator flashes press Status Job Cancel to check an error message If the message is not indicated on the touch panel when Status Job Cancel is pressed or the attention indicator flashes for 1 5 seconds check the following Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Cannot send fax Is the modular cord Connect the modular connected correctly cord correctly Is Permitted FAX No or Check Permitted FAX FAX System S Permitted ID No No and Permitted ID Operation Guide registered correctly No Chapter 6 Registering Permit FAX No and Registering Permit ID No Has a communication Check error codes in the FAX System S error occurred TX RX Result Report Operation Guide and Activity Report If Appendix the error code starts with Error Code List U or E perform the corresponding procedure Is the destination FAX oend again line busy Does the destination send again FAX machine respond Is there an error other Contact your Service than above Representative 10 14 Troubleshooting Clearing Paper Jams Job No 000021 Job Name doc200810101010 User Name Mike If a paper jam occurs the touch panel will display Paper E Jam and the machine will stop Refer to these procedures to remove the jammed pap
298. ons to be registered for Quick Setup Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary Six items from the following options are available Paper Selection Zoom Staple Punch Density Duplex Combine Collate Offset Original Image Original Size Original Orientation Color Selection Continuous Scan NOTE Refer to Quick Setup Screen on page 3 43 for the Quick Setup steps am Use the procedure below to register the Quick Setup functions 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Copy and Next of Quick Setup Registration 3 Press Change of the function to be registered in Quick Setup 4 Select a key 1 6 allocated on the Quick Setup Registration screen Press Off to delete a key from the Quick Setup 5 Press OK If you overwrite the setting a confirmation screen appears Press Yes 8 29 Default Setting System Menu Sending Settings The sending settings allow you to specify the following sending function options Quick Setup Registration 8 30 Destination Check before Send 8 30 Color Type 8 31 Entry Check for New Destination 8 31 e Setting the Default Send Screen 8 32 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Quick Setup Registration Select the sending functions to be registered for Quick Setup Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated to typica
299. ontenvatzeennnaieteinsiapeetniaeeisens 5 10 l EEO E g Pr E EE 5 11 Wii zac 0 12 diia O ON T mets 5 13 TDI ED VDHOD FUNCHONS ae Haentie ue oIOoUrPI 2X IHE EMI Ti 5 14 dio A aE A E 5 16 EE 19 8110 916 DOnSiy emm 5 17 i tre I Tee s 5 18 A Me NUES Tm 5 19 e Background Density AOIUSUDBDL ui eot eter SEE HER IG Ure EE EE FER Cete Ott n2 5 20 e Color Grayscale Black and White Selection 5 21 I 0m ET 0 22 i e misc TEE 0 23 e Enter Document Name File Name cccccccceecsseeeseeeeeseeteseeeeeees 5 25 e Enter E mail Subject and Body c ccccccsccseccsseseeeeeeeeeeeeseeesanes 5 26 a epee t 5 27 e SOD O aE E 5 29 Gg wipe 5 30 Send and SOTE mem 5 30 e FEN T E TRE 5 31 EE C Luo a eee ee ee ce eee eee eee ee eee ee 5 31 diro deeem 5 32 Original Size Selection Sending Functions Select the size of originals that will serve as the basis for scanning Be sure to select the original size when using originals of nonstandard sizes Choose the original size from the following groups of original size Standard Sizes 1 Select from automatic detection and standard Sizes Standard Sizes 2 Select from standard sizes except Standard Sizes 1 Inch models Auto Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement Statement R 8 5x13 5 Oficio Il R 11x15 Metric models Auto A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 A5 R B6 B6 R A6 R Folio Inch models A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5
300. opy cannot be used when the maximum number of Repeat Copy jobs to retain in the document box is set to zero refer to Maximum Number of Repeat Copy Jobs Retained on page 4 43 You can select Repeat Copy as default setting Refer to Repeat Copying on page 8 24 Giving a file name to a copy job will facilitate identification of the data when copying refer to File Name on page 4 41 Selecting Repeat Copy Use the procedure below to select repeat copying Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Advanced Setup and then Repeat Copy B N Ready to copy Copies Press On Repeat Copy To register a password press Keys and enter a 4 digit password Password 4digits IMPORTANT If you forget the pass code Repeat Copy will be unavailable Make a note of the pass code beforehand if necessary 10 10 2008 10 10 5 Press OK 6 Press the Start key to start copying and register this job as a Repeat Copy job Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs The Repeat Copy jobs are stored in the Document Box Refer to Job Box on page 3 33 to print out the Repeat Copy jobs 4 42 Copying Functions Maximum Number of Repeat Copy Jobs Retained You can use the procedure below to change the maximum number of copy jobs that can be retained in the document box Use the procedure below to change the maximum number of copy jobs retained 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Document Box Removable Memory
301. ount ID The Account ID does not match Check the registered Account ID Incorrect box Enter the correct password password Incorrect Login User Enter correct login user name or Name or Password password Job Accounting Is the acceptable printing restriction exceeded count restricted by Job Accounting exceeded The printing count exceeded the acceptable count restricted by Job Accounting Cannot print any more This job is canceled Press End Job separator is full Is the maximum capacity of Take some paper out of the job of paper the job separator exceeded separator Printing then resumes KPDL error PostScript error has occurred The job is canceled Press End Machine failure Maximum number of Is the acceptable scanning scanned pages count exceeded Internal error has occurred Make a note of the error code displayed on the touch panel Turn off the machine unplug the power cord and contact your Service Representative Only one copy of the scanned pages is available Press Continue to print send or store the scanned pages Press Cancel to cancel printing sending or storing Troubleshooting Checkpoints Corrective Actions Memory is full Unable to continue the job as the memory is used up Press Continue to print the scanned pages The print job cannot be processed completely Press Cancel to cancel the job The process cannot be performed due to insufficient memory If o
302. ows The administrator is not required to enter a password to gain access to any box The user is required to enter a password to gain access to a box which is protected by a password The user is not required to enter a Administrator User password to gain access to his her own boxes Creating new Custom Boxes when user login administration is enabled Box No 0001 Box Name SALES Box Password SRR KKK KKK KK Owner DCBA9876 Usage Restriction 21 GB Change gt Change gt Permission Private Change gt Auto File Deletion 30 day s Free Space 30 GB Status Overwrite Setting Permit Delete after Printed Off Change gt Change gt 08 08 2009 10 10 If you create a new Custom Box when user login administration is enabled the screen appears and you can change the owner and permission settings Only administrators and machine administrators can create new Custom Boxes Press Change of Owner and select the new owner for the box from the displayed list Then press OK Changing the permission Press Change of Permission and select either Private or Shared Then press OK Changing the owner NOTE For information on specifying other settings refer to Creating a New Custom Box on page 6 2 Working With User Privileges When User Login Administration is Enabled Box No 0001 Box Name Change gt SALES Owner DCBA9876 Us
303. ox select the destination box Move to Custom Box Select the destination box and press Move To copy the document to USB memory select the destination folder and press Next If necessary Ano A name owner AUsed Area set the saved file size and the file format etc 0001 9 Documenti Administrator 2 MB 0002 BJ Document Administrator 3 MB 8 Press Move or Copy and then press Yes in the 0003 CJ Document3 Administrator 3M B B 0004 J Document4 Administrator 5M confirmation screen The selected document is moved or copied Cancel Back Move Status 08 08 2009 10 10 NOTE If the box to which the document is to be moved or copied is protected by a password enter the correct password Joining Documents The procedure for joining documents in a custom box is explained below NOTE You can only join a document to other documents in the same custom box If necessary move the documents to be joined beforehand 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Press Custom Box select the box containing the documents you want to join and press Open NOTE If a custom box is protected by a password enter the correct password 3 Select the documents in the list that you wish to join SS n by pressing the checkbox 10 10 2008 09 40 21 MB Search Name 10 10 2008 09 50 21 MB RAL A File Name The document is marked with a checkmark 10 10 2008 10 00 21 MB You can joi
304. ox To use an address book on the LDAP server select Ext Address Book from the Addr Book pull down menu You can change the order in which the destinations are listed by selecting Name or No from the Sort pull down menu NOTE To cancel the selection press the check box and remove the checkmark For details on the external address book refer to KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide 3 Press OK to register the selected destination in the destination list NOTE To delete a destination in the list select the destination and press Delete 3 30 Basic Operation Destination Search Destinations registered in the Address Book can be searched Advanced search by type or by initial letter is also available f Address Book Addr Book Address Book Dest No Type Name 0001 ABCD abcd efg com Detail J gt Search No Register Edit Address Book Detail f Search Name l Q 0002 TUVW tuvw xyz com 0003 9 Groupi LJ 0004 Q amp Group2 LJ 0005 Group3 i ere P Qa ga Group 08 08 2009 10 10 Keys l Search type Subjects searched Search by name Search by registered name 2 Search by address Search by registered address number number 3 Advanced search Advanced search by initial letter of registered name by initial letter 4 Advanced search Advanced search by type of registered destination
305. p mode e When auto sleep is activated When auto panel reset is activated When auto low power mode is activated e When low power mode is activated by pressing the Energy Saver key Management Adding a User This adds a new user You can add Up to 1 000 users including the default login user name The table below explains the user information to be registered User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list up to 32 characters Login User Name Enter the login user name to login up to 64 characters The same login user name cannot be registered Login Password Enter the password to login up to 64 characters Access Level Select Administrator or User for user access privileges Account Name Add an account where the user belongs The user who registered his her account name can login without entering the account ID Refer to Job Accounting on page 11 14 E mail Address The user can register his her E mail address The registered address will be automatically selected for subsequent operations that need any E mail function Mandatory at user registration NOTE By default one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already stored Each user s properties are Machine Administrator User Name DeviceAdmin Login User Name 25 25 ppm model 2500 30 30 ppm model 3000 40 40 ppm model 4000 50 40 ppm model 5000 55 50 ppm model 5500 Login Pas
306. pendix Be careful when choosing paper Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled Supported Paper Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers The printing quality will be affected by the quality of paper Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output Basic Paper Specifications The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine Refer to the subsequent sections for further details NOTE Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic Paper Specifications shown below such as moisture or pulp content For this reason we recommend purchasing a small amount of recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use Choose recycled paper that gives the best printing results and contains low levels of paper dust We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our specifications Appendix 1 1 Choosing the Appropriate Paper This section describes guidelines for choosing paper Condition Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled dirty or torn Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper fiber lint or that is especially delicate Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor copies but may also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine Choose paper with a smooth and even surface however avoid
307. per or on letterhead refer to Special Paper Action on page 8 10 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type for each cassette 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings Next of Cassette Setting Next of Cassette 1 to Cassette 4 on which you want to register the size and then Change of Paper Size 3 To detect paper size automatically press Auto and select Metric or Inch for Paper Size To select paper size press Standard Sizes 1 or Standard Sizes 2 for Paper Size 4 Press OK The previous screen reappears 5 Press Change of Media Type to select media type and press OK Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray Select size and media type for multi purpose tray Set up frequently used size and media type before use The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below D AM Paper Automatically detect paper size Select Metric or Inch for paper size Size Standard Available options are as follows oizes 1 Inch models Ledger Legal Letter Letter R Statement R 8 5x13 5 Oficio Il Executive Metric models A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R B6 R A6 R Folio Standard Select a standard size except that selected in Standard Sizes 1 Sizes 2 Inch models A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R B6 R A6 R Folio 8K 16K 16K R Metric models Ledger Legal Letter Letter R
308. perform Send as E mail the date and time set here will be displayed on the header CAUTION Be sure to set Time Zone before the Date Time setup Use the procedure below to set the date and time 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press 7 Date Timer and then Change of Date Time 3 Press or to enter the date and time respectively 4 Press OK NOTE If you try to change the date time when a trial application page 8 83 is running the f you change Date Time setting trial functions will be unavailable Are you sure message is displayed To change the date time press Yes Date Format Select the display format of year month and date The year is displayed in Western notation Use the procedure below to select the date format 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press v Date Timer and then Change of Date Format 3 Select MM DD YYYY DD MM YYY Y or YYYY MM DD and press OK 8 55 Default Setting System Menu Time Zone oet the time difference in the location you are from GMT Use the procedure below to set the time difference 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press 7 Date Timer and then Change of Time Zone 3 Selectthe location NOTE Press A or 47 to select the location 4 Press Off or On of Summer Time and press OK NOTE If you select a region that does not utilize summer time the summer time setting screen will not appear Auto Panel Reset If no jobs are run for a c
309. plies Communication Status 10 10 2008 10 10 The table below lists the items displayed in the Sending Jobs Status screen Me eee m Accepted Time Accepted Time of job 3 Type Icons that indicate the job type iSending Job FAX M mSending Job i FAX iSending Job PC SMB FTP o iSending Job E mail iSending Job Application LJ Sending Job Multiple S Destination Destination Either destination name FAX number E mail address Or server s 5 UserName User Name for the executed job otatus otatus of job InProcess The status before starting sending such as during scanning originals sending sending Waiting Sending Waiting Canceling Canceling the job Pause Pausing the job a7 of Job Type Only selected type of jobs is displayed rm Cancel Select the job you want to cancel from the list and press this key Detail Select the job whose detailed information you want to display from the list and press this key Refer to Checking the Detailed Information of Histories on page 7 10 Status Job Cancel Storing Jobs Status screen Status Status om cepted Time Type e atus 438 m 14 47 doc20070225144758 InProcess 1 Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device _ Paper Supplies Communication Status 10 10 2008 10 10 The table below lists the items displayed in the Storing Jobs Status screen Mel emere Ta Accepted Time Accepted Time of job 3 Type Icons that indicate the job
310. printers If you need to have access to the fonts on more than three printers you need to acquire a multi user license agreement which can be obtained from Monotype Imaging Monotype Imaging retains all rights title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access to and use of the Software and Typefaces You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces except that you may make one backup copy You agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces unless sooner terminated This License may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not remedied within thirty 30 days after notice from Monotype Imaging When this License expires or is terminated you shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as requested You agree that you will not modify alter disassemble decrypt reverse engineer or decompile the ooftware Monotype Imaging warrants
311. r Cleaning 9 5 Setting Date and Time 2 12 Sharpness adjust Copy 4 34 send 5 19 Shortcuts 3 48 Adding 3 48 Single Color copy 4 29 Sleep 2 10 Slit Glass 1 4 Cleaning 9 3 SMTP Appendix 31 SMTP E mail TX Protocol Detail 8 75 SNMP Protocol Detail 8 75 SNMPv3 Protocol Detail 8 75 oolving Malfunctions 10 2 opecifications Document Finisher Appendix 24 Document Processor Appendix 23 Environmental Specifications Appendix 26 Job Separator Appendix 25 Machine Appendix 18 Paper Feeder Appendix 23 Printer Appendix 21 Scanner Appendix 22 opecifying Destination 3 29 3 30 otatus Job Cancel 7 1 otatus Page 8 41 Appendix 31 Subnet Mask Appendix 31 Supplies Index 7 Checking the Remaining Amount 7 15 owitching the Language 2 11 8 2 Switching Unit of Measurement 8 11 oymbols i system Initialization 8 72 system Menu 8 1 T TCP IP Appendix 31 TCP IP IPv4 Setup 2 13 TCP IP IPv6 Appendix 29 Setup 8 73 Toner Container 1 5 Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner 7 15 Replacement 9 8 Trade Names xxi Transfer Roller Cleaning 9 6 TWAIN Appendix 31 U USB Appendix 31 USB Cable Connecting 2 6 USB Interface 1 6 2 4 USB Memory Printing Documents 6 20 Removing 6 21 Saving Documents 6 22 User Login Administration 11 2 Adding 11 5 Changing Properties 11 7 Index Enabling Disabling 11 2 Group Authorization Settings 11 10 Login 11 3 Logout 11 4 Unknown login user name Job 11 9 W Waste Toner Box 1 5 Rep
312. r The DHCP IPv6 Settings are available when selecting On for TCP IP IPv6 The default setting is On Use the procedure below i Press the System Menu key Press System Next of Network and then Next of TCP IP Setting Press Next of Pv6 Press Change of DHCP Press On or Off of DHCP When selecting On P Address Stateful appears 8 74 Default Setting System Menu 6 Press OK 7 After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 72 Protocol Detail The table below lists the network related function settings The network related functions are available when TCP IP is On asc Default Restarting P the NetBEUI oelects whether or not to receive documents using NetBEUI select whether or not to receive documents using LPD as uM the network protocol SMTP Select whether or not to send e mail using SMTP Off E mail TX POP3 Select whether or not to receive e mail using POP3 E mail RX FTP Client Select whether or not to send documents using FTP Transmission When selecting On set the FTP Port Number Use the FTP default port 21 Port 21 FTP Server select whether or not to receive documents using FTP Reception SMB Client Select whether or not to send documents using SMB On Transmission When selecting On set the SMB default Port Number Use the SMB de
313. r is turned off all stored jobs will be deleted NOTE When you attempt to store documents in excess of the above maximum the oldest document data will be overwritten by the latest document data The Proof and Hold feature produces only a single proof print of multiple print job and holds printing of the remaining copies Printing a multiple print job in Proof and Hold using the printer driver allows only a single copy to be printed while maintaining the document data in the Job Box To continue to print the remaining copies use the operation panel You can change the number of copies to print Repeat Copy Box page 6 15 Repeat Copy feature stores the copied original document data in the Job Box and allows you to print additional copies later By default up to 32 documents can be stored When power is turned off the original data will be deleted NOTE Repeat Copy function is not available when the optional Data Security Kit is installed Form for Form Overlay Box page 6 17 Image Overlay feature copies the original document overlaid with a form or image This Job Box is used to store the forms or images for overlaying Removable Memory Box A USB memory inserted into the USB memory slot A1 of the machine is also recognizable as a Job Box This allows printing of the PDF data stored in the USB memory You can print PDF data directly from the USB memory without a PC Image files scanned using this machine can also be sa
314. r the authentication method in Enabling Disabling User Login Administration on page 11 2 The table below explains the required information to be registered Use the procedure below ee Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address up to 64 characters Pot Set the LDAP port number or use the default port 389 Name LN Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed from the LDAP server up to 32 characters Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed from the LDAP server up to 32 characters E mail Address Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the e mail address from the LDAP server to 32 characters Search Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time out in seconds from 5 to 255 seconds LDAP Security Select the type of encryption according to the type of security employed by the LDAP server If using Active Directory of Windows the server name may be same as the server name entered in the network authentication 2 If using Active Directory of Windows displayName of Attribute may be used as Name f 3 Name 2 can be left out When you assign displayName in Name 7 and department in Name 2 and if the value of displayName is Mike Smith and the value of department is Sales in Active Directory of Windows the user name appears as Mike Smith Sales 4 If using Active Directory of Windows mail of Attribute may be used as E mail Address 11 12 Management 1 Press the
315. ra Staple jam If a staple jam occurs the machine will stop and the location of the jam will be indicated on the touch panel Leave the machine on and follow the instruction to remove the jammed staple System error oystem error has occurred Confirm that the Attention indicator is lighting and then turn the main power switch off and on The phone receiver is Put down the receiver off the hook The removable Is the removable memory Use the removable memory memory is not formatted by this machine formatted by this machine formatted Top tray of the Remove paper from the top tray and machine is full of press Continue paper Unknown Toner Is the unauthorized product Install our genuine product that is Installed PC installed specified for this machine Warning low memory I Job cannot be started Try again later I 10 10 Troubleshooting Responding to Send Error When an error occurs during transmission Send Error appears Check the error code and error message below and follow the corresponding corrective actions Corrective Actions Reference Page Failed to send the e mail Check the host name of the SMTP 2 18 Failed to send i FAX server on the COMMAND CENTER Failed to send via FTP Check the host name of FTP Failed to send via SMB Check the host name of SMB Failed to send via SMB Check the SMB settings 26 Login user name and login password If the sender is a domain user specify t
316. rating system for details on how to share a folder Be sure that SMB Protocol or FTP in the COMMAND CENTER is On For details refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide 1 Press the Send key Se N d Displays the screen for sending 4 NOTE Depending on the settings the address book screen may appear In this event press Cancel to display the screen for sending 2 Press Folder Path Entry and then SMB or FTP NOTE Destination can be specified using the Address Book or the One Touch Keys For details refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 30 3 26 Basic Operation gl Ready to send MENU 3 Enter host name path login user name and login Place original 1 password Press the key of each item to first Folder Path Ent display the entry screen Host Name Path Login User Name Login IEEE 3 Password Gnacifv th folder on the destination computer Connection Test Add to Addr Book Next Dest Cancel el OK Status 08 08 2009 10 10 4 Enterthe destination data and press OK i Use the keyboard to enter Lifit 128 characters Irfut Ocharacters P HE EN ES E ES EA ES S EA A ES EX C3 JE EY EY EX CR eae ARR aA NERE A Lower case No Symbol Space Status 10 10 2008 10 10 Data to be entered are as follows NOTE You will be unable to send the data if you forget your login user name or login passwor
317. re c It 10 10 2008 10 10 4 Press OK 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 for other accounts to be restricted 6 Press Register The restricted account is added Applying Limit of Restriction This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction The table below describes the action taken Item Description Immediately Job stops when the counter reaches its limit Subsequently Printing scanning of the job continues but the subsequent job will be rejected Alert Only Job continues while displaying an alert message The next job will be prohibited in sending or in storing in the box Use the procedure below to apply the restriction limit 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 Ifuser login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 Press Next of Job Accounting Setting Next of Default Setting and then Change of Apply Limit 5 Select Immediately Subsequently or Alert Only 6 Press OK 11 20 Management Default Counter Limit When you add a new account you can change the default restrictions on the number of sheets used You can set any number from 1 to 9 999 999 in 1 sheet increments The items th
318. reated or deleted by a user NOTE You can set up the machine so that temporary documents in job boxes are automatically deleted For details refer to Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents on page 6 17 Private Print Stored Job Box page 6 12 In Private Printing you can specify that a job is not printed until you release the job at the operation panel When sending the job from the application software specify a 4 digit access code in the printer driver The job is released for printing by entering the access code on the operation panel ensuring confidentiality of the print job The data will be deleted upon completion of print job or after the main power switch is turned off In Hold Job access codes are not mandatory but can be set on the printer driver if printing with PIN security is required In this event you need to enter the access code to print the stored jobs Print data will be stored in the hard disk after printing This will allow printing of the same print data repeatedly Quick Copy Proof and Hold Box page 6 13 Quick Copy feature facilitates additional prints of a document already printed Activating Quick Copy and printing a document using the printer driver allow the print data to be stored in the Quick Copy Job Box 3 33 Basic Operation When additional copies are required you can reprint the required number of copies from the operation panel By default up to 32 documents can be stored When powe
319. remains unlit To resume press the Power key The 25 25 ppm or 30 30 ppm model will be ready to use within 30 seconds the 40 40 ppm or 50 40 ppm model will be ready within 45 seconds or the 55 50 ppm model will be ready within 57 5 seconds Note that ambient environmental conditions such as ventilation may cause the machine to respond more slowly Auto Sleep Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep if left idle for a preset time in the Low Power Mode The default preset time is 30 minutes for 25 25 ppm and 30 30 ppm models 45 minutes for 40 40 ppm model or 60 minutes for 50 40 ppm model and 55 50 ppm models 2 10 Preparation before Use Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle E Adjust the angle of the operation panel in two as shown by releasing the operation panel lock lever ge Lr eee be WI Wo a J DS ee We A Switching the Language for Display Language Select the language displayed on the touch panel Use the procedure below to select the language 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings and then Change of Language LL a 3 Press the key for the language you want to use E J Set the language to use for the touch panel display ELEM DCN 10 10 2008 10 10 4 Press OK The touch panel language will be changed Preparation before Use Setting Date and Time Follow the steps below to set the local
320. ress Most Suitable Size or Same as Original Size Press OK Oc Ff o N Move to the copy screen and press the Reset key Auto Priority When a paper source of different size from the original is selected select whether automatic zoom reduce zoom is performed The table below shows the available settings eee No zoom performed copied in original size Automatic zoom performed as appropriate Use the procedure below to specify the automatic Zoom priority 1 Press the System Menu key Press Copy and Change of Auto Priority Select the default for Off or On Press OK ao amp o N Move to the copy screen and press the Reset key Reserve Next Priority Select the operation of the reserve copy and interrupt copy functions and for canceling jobs Use the procedure below to select the default Reserve Next Priority setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Copy and Change of Reserve Next Priority 3 Select the default for Off or On 4 Press OK 8 28 Default Setting System Menu Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time Options are 1 999 copies Use the procedure below to set the limit on the number of copies 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Copy and Change of Preset Limit 3 Press or or use the numeric keys to enter the limit for the number of copies 4 Press OK Quick Setup Registration Select the copying functi
321. rk authentication login page Use the procedure below to enable user login administration 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 Press Next of User Login Setting and then Change of User Login Management Loin E Y 5 Select Local Authentication or Network i User login administration Select authentication method Authentication Select Off to disable user login administration Off o Loa ili i den aa Ap dies terii enter ne Domain Name ost name characters or less a i e utnentication 9 name 256 characters or less for the e E DEN Server Type Authentication Server Select NTLM or Kerberos as the server type NTLM Kerberos E XE NOTE If the login user name and password are rejected check the following settings Network Authentication setting of the machine User property of the Authentication Server e Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine login with any administrator registered in the local user list and correct the settings If the server type is Kerberos o
322. rotocol Internet Protocol TCP IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each other over a network TCP IP IPv6 TCP IP IPv6 is based on the current Internet protocol TCP IP IPv4 IPv6 is the next generation Internet protocol and expands the available address space which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4 while also introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission TWAIN Technology Without Any Interested Name A technical specification for connecting scanners digital cameras and other image equipment to the computers The TWAIN compatible devices enable you to process image data on any relevant application software TWAIN is adopted on a large amount of graphic software e g Adobe Photoshop and OCR software USB Universal Serial Bus 2 0 A USB interface standard for Hi Speed USB 2 0 The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps This machine is equipped with USB 2 0 for high speed data transfer Appendix 31 WIA Windows Imaging Acquisition A function to import images supported after Windows Me XP from digital cameras and other peripheral devices This function replaces what TWAIN used to do the feature is provided as a part of Windows functions and improves ease of operation so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any application Appendix 32 Inde
323. rted types Supported paper sizes No of sheets Plain paper 60 to 105 g m Letter A4 B5 3 000 80 g m Recycled paper 60 to 105 M Multi Purpose tray MP tray Supported types Supported paper sizes No of sheets Plain paper 60 to 220 g m Letter Letter R Executive R Statement 100 80 g m Recycled paper 60 to 220 m A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 R B6 R A6 R Colored paper 60 to 220 g m Folio 16K 16K R Other sizes Portrait 3 7 8 to 11 5 8 or 98 to 297 mm Landscape 5 7 8 to 17 or 148 to 432 mm Plain paper 60 to 220 g m Ledger Legal A3 B4 Oficio Il 50 80 g m Recycled paper 60 to 220 g m 8 5 x 13 5 8K Colored paper 60 to 220 g m Postcards Postcards 100 x 148 mm 30 Oufuku Hagaki return postcard Return postcard 148 x 200 mm Appendix 10 Supported types Supported paper sizes No of sheets Envelopes Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope C4 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 Envelope 9 Commercial 9 Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 Monarch ISO B5 Youkei 2 Youkei 4 Other sizes Portrait 3 7 8 to 11 5 8 or 98 to 297 mm Landscape 5 7 8 to 17 or 148 to 432 mm Transparency OHP film Letter Letter R A4 A4 R Basic Paper Specifications This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular dry copiers and page printers such as laser printers It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given in this ap
324. ry destination 3 Press the Start key to start sending 3 29 Specifying Destination Basic Operation When specifying destination choose from the Address Book or use the One Touch Keys NOTE You can set the machine up so that the address book screen appears when you press the Send key For details refer to Setting the Default Send Screen on page 8 32 Choosing from the Address Book Select a destination registered in the Address Book e Ready to send Destination Place original 3 Destination Detail TET ABCD abcd efg com Book E mai TUVW 10 200 188 120 V1 B addr Entry Group1 Group1 Folder Path Entry On Hook Direct Chain Detail Edit Delete Recall eG FAX No Entry 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 No AAA BBB ccc DDD EEE LEAK Addr Entry 0008 0009 0010 HHH JJJ Destination Quick Setup Original Sending Color Advanced Data Format Image Quality Setup atus 08 08 2009 10 10 G WSD Scan Address Book Yy Name e Search Name tuvw xyz com Search No Groupi DERI RM Register Edit Group2 Address Book Group3 Detail E mail ere G Gai fa Group 08 08 2009 10 10 1 Inthe basic screen for sending press Address Book 2 Press the checkbox to select the desired destination from the list You may choose multiple destinations The selected destinations are indicated by a checkmark in the check b
325. s or to enter the maximum number of stored jobs You can enter any number between 0 and 50 You can also enter the number using the numeric keys Z NOTE If you enter a value of 0 zero you cannot use the Repeat Copy function NE status TEE 4 Press OK The maximum number of stored jobs is set Printing a Document You can print documents stored in the Quick Copy Proof and Hold box Use the procedure below to print a document 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Press Job Box 3 Select Quick Copy Proof and Hold and press Open 4 Select the creator of the document and press Open gt 1User A 2user amp 3User 1 amp 4User 1 amp 5User 1 Status 08 08 2009 10 10 5 Select the document to print and press Print KM File Name A Date and Time 14 Size Lj arie 10 10 2008 09 45 30 MB LJ 8 3File 10 10 2008 09 50 36 MB Brite 10 10 2008 09 55 21 MB amp srie 10 10 2008 10 00 30 MB Status 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Specify the number of prints as desired 7 Press Start Print to start printing 6 14 Document Box Deleting a Document You can delete documents stored in the Quick Copy Proof and Hold box Use the procedure below to delete a document 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Press Job Box Quick Copy Proof and Hold then Open In Job Box 3 Select the creator of the document and press Open Quick Copy Proof and Hold gt 1User 5
326. s Change of Internet Browser 4 Press On or Off 5 Press OK Browser Preferences This specifies Internet browser preferences such as your home page setting and how pages are displayed NOTE This is not displayed if you selected Off in Internet Browser Setting page 8 67 Use the procedure below to set your Internet browser preferences 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press v and then Internet NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 Press Next of Browser Environment 4 Toset your home page press Change of Home Page press URL enter the URL and then press OK Press OK again NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix 7 for details on entering characters 8 67 Default Setting System Menu 5 Tosetthe text size press Change of Text Size select Large Medium or Small as the text size and then press OK 6 Tosetthe display mode press Change of Display Mode select Normal Just Fit Rendering or Smart Fit Rendering as the display mode and then press OK 7 To specify the settings for accepting cookies press Change of Cookie select Accept All Reject All or Prompt before Accepting as your cookie acceptance po
327. s you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 Press Block 4 Press OK USB Device USB interface setting This locks and protects the USB interface connector B1 USB Device The default setting is Unblock Use the procedure below to specify the USB Device setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Interface Block Setting and then Change of USB Device 3 Press Block 4 Press OK Optional interface Optional interface card setting This locks and protects the optional interface slots OPT1 or OPT2 The default setting is Unblock Use the procedure below to specify the optional interface setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Interface Block Setting and then Change of Optional Interface 1 or Optional Interface 2 3 Press Block Press OK 8 80 Default Setting System Menu Security Level Security Level setting The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service personnel for maintenance work There is no need for customers to use this menu Document Guard Setting When the optional Printed Document Guard Kit is installed the machine prevents the unauthorized copying and or transmission of documents that contain important confidential or personal information Use the Security Watermark of Advanced in KX DRIVER to embed the guard pattern in a docum
328. s you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 Select the desired application and press Activate You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing Detail NOTE To exit an application press Deactivate 4 Enter the license key and press Official Some applications do not require you to enter a license key If the license key entry screen does not appear go to Step 5 To use the application as a trial press Trial without entering the license key 5 When the confirmation screen appears press Yes IMPORTANT If you change the date time while using an application you will no longer be able to use the application Launching Applications You can launch any application for which Activate is set Use the procedure below to launch an application 1 Press the Application key A list of available applications appears on the touch panel 2 Press the key for the application to be launched The application starts up 3 Toexitthe application press X 4 When the application exit confirmation screen appears press Yes NOTE The procedure for exiting some applications may differ 8 70 Default Setting System Menu Deleting Applications Use the procedure below to delete an installed application IMPORTANT Always exit the application to be deleted before deleting the application Refer to Activating
329. s Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 Ifyou include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgment This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh Qcryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BU
330. s a keyboard You can then perform a search by entering a keyword and pressing the Search Title bar Displays the page title Closes the Internet browser and returns you to the application list screen ME IRSE LL sloba THE NEW VAI Region Scroll bars These allow you to scroll the displayed page up down left Document Solutions and defi pressing Los Liv i Advanced Technology that Simplifies Your Business Life lt or Or by moving one of y I 4 a xl the slide bars with your finger Security lock icon Displayed when you are viewing a protected page News Download Aboutus Select a Country LLLI I TUM NEN NNNM NNNNNENN Loader Progress bar Shows the status of page loading When the browser is loading a web page the loader changes to an animated display Menu Displays the browser setup menu You can use this menu to specify the browser s display magnification set the text encoding scheme and check the server certificate Search Search Internet Retrieval in page Enter URL Displays a search menu in which you can select Retrieval Use this display a desired web in page or an Internet search site page by entering the URL for Search Internet Use the selected search site to search that page with the entered keyword Retrieval in page Search from the entered keyword in the currently displayed page You can continue your search by pressing SearchUp or SearchDown
331. s a large quantity of finished copies The finisher offers a convenient means of sorting Sorted finished copies may also be stapled For further details refer to the document finisher Operation Guide This is a large capacity document finisher capable of holding large print runs and of separating and offsetting multiple copies of a printout into individual copies It can also staple or hole punch optional the offset printouts For details refer to the 3 000 Sheet Document Finisher Operation Guide A mail box and folding unit are also available as options Appendix 4 Job Separator oeparate paper according to output tray for easier sorting Specify as the output tray for copy or print jobs Or specify as the default output tray for printing from the copy or Document Box screen printing from the PC and printing of the received fax data There is a paper indicator in the front of the machine that shows whether there is paper in the Job Separator CAUTION Note that some paper types have a tendency to curl and may jam in the paper eject unit If the ejected paper slips or stacks unevenly turn the paper in the cassette over and try again NOTE e To ensure that paper is delivered to the Job Separator select the output destination or change the default setting For details refer to the Paper Output on page 8 14 e When removing paper from the Job Separator pull it out at an angle Key Counter Use the key count
332. s a little slower Select this item to print on Prepunched Preprint and Letterhead Speed Priority Give the job speed top priority and disregard the paper orientation Select this item when paper orientation is not important 8 10 Default Setting System Menu If you select Adjust Print Direction load paper according to the steps below Example copying on Letterhead Original Paper Finished Cassette eii Original Paper Finished Cassette Multi Purpose Tray NOTE When loading cover paper in a cassette or multi purpose tray load the face on which printing is supposed to be done upward Use the procedure below to specify the actions performed for special paper types 1 Press the System Menu key am 2 Press Common Settings Next of Original Paper Settings X and then Change of Special Paper Action 3 Select Adjust Print Direction or Speed Priority Press OK Switching Unit of Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions Use the procedure below to change the input units 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings and then Change of Measurement 3 Select mm for metric or inch for inch 4 Press OK 8 11 Default Setting System Menu Error Handling Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred The possible errors and what to do for the errors are as follows Duplexing Error Select what to do when duple
333. s of one ream 500 sheets of paper cut to the standard size or trade size for a specific grade of paper Paper that is too heavy or too light may be supplied incorrectly or cause paper jams which may cause excessive wear of the machine Mixed paper weight i e thickness may cause several sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails to adhere correctly Thickness Avoid using paper that is too thick or thin Signs that paper may be thin include frequent problems with paper jams or with several sheets being supplied at once Paper jams may also indicate that the paper is too thick The proper thickness is between 0 086 and 0 110 mm Moisture Content Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage Moisture affects how the paper is supplied the electrostatic changeability of the paper and how the toner adheres Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room High relative humidity causes paper to become damp making the edges expand so it appears wavy Low relative humidity causes paper to lose moisture making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast Wawvy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied Try to keep the moisture content between 4 to 696 To maintain the right level of moisture content bear in mind the following considerations e Store paper in a cool well vent
334. s the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Press Advanced Setup and then Job Finish Notice To select the destination from the address book press Address Book on the left of the screen and then press Address Book in the next screen Select the destination to be notified then press OK You can view information on the notification destination by pressing Detail 4 39 Copies Ready to copy Job Finish Notice E Address Book I J SL Address N Entry j Lows Je 10 10 2008 10 10 Add Shortcut Status 4 40 Copying Functions To directly enter the E mail address press Address Entry Press E mail Address enter the address and press OK Press OK Press the Start key to start copying Upon completion of the job an E mail notice is sent to the selected destination File Name Copying Functions Names a copy job Add other information such as date and time or job number as necessary You can check a job history or job status using the job name date and time or job number specified here Use the procedure below to assign a name to your copy job Cop 4 Ready to copy Mer File Name Entry e 1 Adda file name Additional information such as Job No and Date and Time can also be set File Name Hee Additional Info 5 Job No Job No Date and Time s 10 10 2008 10 10 Priority Override Press the Copy key Place the originals on the platen Pr
335. select the orientation in which the original is set on the platen e 2 sided Book Original Border Erase If On is selected as the Orientation Confirmation page 8 15 setting in the System Menu the selection screen for original orientation appears when you select any of the above functions When placing the original on the platen Original Top Edge Top Top Edge Left ERN Ll Original Top Edge Top Top Edge Left Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen for sending 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Original Sending Data Format and then Original Orientation Sending Functions l Ready to send Deamon 4 Select original orientation from Top Edge Top and Place original 1 Top Edge Left Original Orientation Place original Select the orientation of the 5 P ress O K original document s top edge a uem LOCA Top Edge Top Top Edge Left Cancel el OK 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending File Format oelect the file format of the image to send The table below lists the file formats and their details Adjustable range of image Color mode quality 1 Low Quality High Comp t Auto Color Color Grayscale Auto 5 High Quality Low Comp S Color Color Black and White Full Color Grayscale B
336. ss Reject or Permit 6 Press OK Management Group Authorization Settings Set restrictions of the machine usage by each individual group registered in the authentication server NOTE To use the group authorization settings Network Authentication must be selected for the authentication method in Enabling Disabling User Login Administration on page 11 2 Select On for LDAP in Protocol Detail on page 8 75 Group Authorization Use the group authorization Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press User Login Job Accounting 3 Ifuser login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 Press Next of User Login Setting Next of Group Authorization Set and then Change of Group Authorization 5 Press On 6 Press OK Group List Register the groups that is restricted the machine usage Up to 20 groups can be individually registered Other users and groups belong to Others The table below explains the group information to be registered ee Pos Print Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of print functions for the printer Print Restriction Color Select whether or not to reject usage of the color print functions for the printer CopyResticio
337. sses can be specified NOTE When Add to Addr Book is displayed the destinations are registered in the Address Book 5 Press OK The destinations are registered in the destination list 3 25 Basic Operation ul Ready to send Destination 6 Check the destination list Place original 3 a d Jg Address Select a destination and press Detail Edit to check ABCD abed efg com Book E and edit it mE Folder Path Select a destination and press Delete to remove Entry Lu ll L Q e oem ED the destination from the list e 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 No AAA BBB ccc DDD EEE e i FAX Addr Entry 0008 0009 0010 0006 0007 Tree FFF GGG HHH IH m E a 2 Destination page 8 31 the confirmation screen esunation UICK Setup riginal Senaing olor vance A a BRE Ec mmy E appears Enter the same destination again and press Entry NOTE When selecting On for Entry Check for New 08 08 2009 10 10 OK When selecting On for Destination Check before Send page 8 30 the confirmation screen appears after pressing the Start key For details refer to Confirmation Screen of Destinations on page 3 29 Send to Folder SMB Send to Folder FTP otores a scanned original image file in the specified shared folder of any PC otores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server NOTE e Refer to Help of your ope
338. sure to place the originals in page order If the originals are placed on the platen consecutively replace each original after pressing the Start key After scanning all originals press Finish Scan to start copying 4 20 Copying Functions Cover Mode Add a cover to the finished copies You can copy the first page and or the last page onto colored paper or thick paper fed from the different paper source than the regular one The following two options are available Paper for the cover is supplied from the multi purpose tray To feed the cover paper from the cassette refer to Paper Source for Cover Paper on page 8 10 First page of the originals is copied on a different paper Front and Back First page and last page of the originals are Covers copied on different paper The procedure for using Cover mode copying is explained below 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Layout Edit and then Cover Ready to copy one 4 Press Front Cover or Front and Back Covers 5 Press OK il Print cover pages on the different type of paper using a different paper source Select either Front Cover or Front and Back Covers Set paper source for cover in System Menu iudei pa f Front Cover Front and Back E Q Covers Preview Status 10 10 2008 10 10 6 Press the Start key Copying begins If the originals are placed on the platen consecutively replace each origin
339. sword 25 25 ppm model 2500 30 30 ppm model 3000 40 40 ppm model 4000 50 40 ppm model 5000 55 50 ppm model 5500 Access Level Machine Administrator 4 4 Administrator User Name Admin Login User Name Admin Login Password Admin Access Level Administrator It is recommended to periodically change the user name login user name and login password regularly for your security Use the procedure below to register a new user Login as a user with administrator rights Press the System Menu key Press User Login Job Accounting Aa OO N If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator 11 5 Management privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 5 Press Next of User Login Setting Register Edit of Local User List and then Add 6 Press Change of User Name User Name hange 01 User mm f Enter the user name and press OK Login User Name Change Login Password Change 0099 2 2 Access Level Change Account Name Change User gt 02Account gt NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix 7 for details on entering characters E mail Address Change IC Card Information Change abcd efg com 2 Empty gt 8 Enter the login user name and E mail address following 6 and 7 above
340. t Delete after Transmitted 8 33 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to register the Quick Setup functions 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press the System Menu key Press Document Box Removable Memory and Next of Quick Setup Registration Press Next of Store File Print or Send Press Change of the function to be registered in Quick Setup Select a key 1 6 allocated on the Quick Setup screen Press Off to delete a key from the Quick Setup Press OK If you overwrite the setting a confirmation screen appears Press Yes 8 34 Default Setting System Menu Printer Settings Printing from computers settings are generally made on the application software screen However the following settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine e Emulation 8 35 Color Setting 8 36 e EcoPrint 8 36 e Override A4 Letter 8 37 Duplex 8 37 Copies 8 37 Orientation 8 38 Form Feed Timeout 8 38 e LF Action 8 39 CR Action 8 39 Paper Feed Mode 8 40 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Emulation Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of printers Selection of emulation The printer can emulate PCL 6 KPDL and KPDL Auto Use the procedure below to select the emulation 1 Press the System Menu Key 2 Pr
341. t on page 8 11 Use the procedure below to select the original size 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Org Paper Finishing and then Original size Copying Functions 4 Press Standard Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 Others or Size Entry to select the original size Ready to copy Copies Original Size LECT TS A4 t A5 af A5 a Place original Irem 7 l I i resi B5 B6 B6 NENNEN Original gie Enuy Folio m _Paper us 10 10 2008 10 10 m If Size Entry is selected press or to specify the horizontal size X and the vertical size Y Press Keys to enter the size directly using the Standard REUS numeric keys E 5 Press OK Others 6 Press the Start key to start copying Zoom Paper ere 10 10 2008 10 10 Paper Selection Select the paper source that contains the required paper size NOTE Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette refer to Original Paper Settings on page 8 4 Selecting the Cassette Use the procedure below to select the paper supply cassette 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Org Paper Finishing and then Paper Selection Ready to copy ape 4 Press the key of the paper source corresponding to E the required paper size The cassette in which the Marius paper is loaded is selected p If Auto is selected the paper matchi
342. tart sending 2 26 WSD Scan Sending Functions WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD compatible computer NOTE To use WSD Scan confirm that the computer used for WSD scanning and the machine is network connected and WSD Scan Setup page 8 76 is set to On in the network settings For information on operating the computer refer to the computer s help or the operation guide of your software Installing Driver Software for Windows Vista Procedure Using this machine 1 2 Click Start and then Network in the computer Right click the machine s icon Kyocera Taskalfa XXX XXX and then click Install 5 NOTE If the User Account Control window appears click Continue If the Found New Hardware window appears click Cancel 3 During the installation double click the icon shown on the task bar to display the Driver Software Installation screen When Your devices are ready to use is displayed on the Driver Software Installation screen the installation is completed Press the Send Key Displays the screen for sending NOTE Depending on the settings the address book screen may appear In this event press Cancel to display the screen for sending 2 5 27 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen Press WSD Scan Press From Operation Panel and press Next Sending Functions 5 Select the destination computer and press OK WSD Sc
343. te Time 6 Set the date and time Press or in each setting Date Timer Date Time 7 Press OK Preparation before Use Network Setup LAN Cable Connection The machine is equipped with network interface which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP IP IPv4 TCP IP IPv6 IPX SPX NetBEUI IPSec and AppleTalk It enables network printing on the Windows Macintosh UNIX NetWare and other platforms This section explains the TCP IP IPv4 Setup and AppleTalk Setup procedures For other network settings refer to the Network Setup on 8 73 e TCP IP IPv4 Setup 2 13 e AppleTalk Setup 2 15 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter a login user name and password and press Login Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password TCP IP IPv4 Setup by Entering IP Addresses oet up TCP IP to connect to the Windows network Set the IP addresses subnet masks and gateway addresses The default settings are TCP IP Protocol On DHCP On Bonjour Off Auto IP On NOTE Prior to the IP address entries obtain permission from the network administrator Auto IP is available with 55 50 ppm model Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Ne
344. ter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 When the confirmation screen appears press Yes Initialization starts IMPORTANT The Formatting Do not turn off the main power switch message appears during initialization Wait until initialization ends 5 Once the initialization ends the message Task is completed Turn the main power switch off and on appears Turn the main power switch off Restarting the System Restart the CPU without turning the main power switch off Use this to deal with any unstable operation by the machine Same as the computer restart Use the procedure below to restart the system 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System and Execute of Restart NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter a login user name and password and press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 When the confirmation screen appears press Yes The system is restarted 8 72 Default Setting System Menu Network Setup The following network settings are available Checking Host Name 8 73 e TCP IP IPv4 Setup 8 73 TCP IP IPv6 Setup 8 73 e Protocol Detail 8 75 e NetWare Setup
345. tes items that are required or prohibited so as to avoid IMPORTANT problems Caution Indicates what must be observed to prevent injury or machine breakdown and how to CAUTION deal with it Description of Operation Procedure In this Operation Guide continuous operation of the keys on the touch panel is as follows Description in this Actual procedure Operation Guide Press Copy Press Copy Next of Quick v Setup v twice and then Press Next of Quick Setup Change of Original Image v Press v twice Press Change of Original Image XXVII Originals and Paper Sizes This section explains the notation used in this guide when referring to sizes of originals or paper sizes As with A4 B5 and Letter which may be used either in the horizontal or vertical direction horizontal direction is indicated by an additional letter R in order to indicate the orientation of the original paper Placement direction Indicated size Vertical direction A4 B5 A5 B6 A6 16K Letter Statement Original Paper For the originals paper dimension A is longer Horizontal direction A4 R B5 R A5 R B6 R A6 R 16K R Letter R Statement R Original Paper For the originals paper dimension A is shorter than B a The size of the original paper that can be used depends on the function and source tray For further details refer to the page detailing that function or source tray
346. that for ninety 90 days after delivery the Software will perform in accordance with Monotype Imaging published specifications and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs errors and omissions The parties agree that all other warranties expressed or implied including warranties of fitness for a particular purpose and merchantability are excluded Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is repair or replacement of defective parts upon their return to Monotype Imaging In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits lost data or any other incidental or consequential damages or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces Massachusetts U S A law governs this Agreement You shall not sublicense sell lease or otherwise transfer the Software and or Typefaces without the prior written consent of Monotype Imaging Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 252 227 7013 subdivision b 3 ii or subparagraph c 1 ii as appropriate Further use duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52 227 19 c 2 You acknowledge that you have read
347. the paper storage bag If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag NOTE If you use special paper such as letterhead paper with holes or paper with pre prints like logo or company name refer to the Paper on Appendix 10 2 20 Preparation before Use Loading Paper in the Cassettes The 2 standard cassettes will each hold plain paper recycled paper or color paper Cassette 1 holds up to 500 sheets of A4 or smaller plain paper 80 g m or up to 250 sheets of B4 or larger plain paper 80 g m Cassette 2 holds up to 500 sheets of plain paper 80 g m or up to 550 sheets of 64 g m plain paper The following paper sizes are supported Ledger Legal Oficio Il 8 5x13 5 Letter Letter R Statement A3 B4 A4 A4 R B5 B5 R A5 Folio 8K 16K and 16K R IMPORTANT e For clearer and brighter color copies use the special color paper You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating Such paper may cause paper jams or other faults e When using media types other than plain paper such as recycled or colored paper always specify the media type setting Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2 28 The cassettes can hold paper with weights up to 163 g m If you are using a paper weight between 106 and 163 g m set the media type to Thick
348. the leading edge raised a few millimeters Label Be sure to feed labels from the multi purpose tray For selecting labels use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the machine and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet Adhesives that stick to the drum or rollers and peeled labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure When printing onto labels you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble Labels consist of three layers as shown in the illustration The adhesive layer contains materials that are easily affected by the force applied in the machine Top sheet The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is DNE Adhesive layer used This composition of labels may cause more Carrier sheet problems The label surface must be covered completely with the top sheet Gaps between labels may cause peeling of labels resulting in a serious failure Appendix 16 Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet When using such paper do not peel these margins from the carrier sheet before completing output Allowed Not allowed 41 Top sheet Carrier sheet Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications Top sheet weight 44 to 74 g m Basis weight 104 to 151 g m overall paper weight Top sheet thickness 0 086 to 0 107 mm Overall paper thickness 0 115 to 0 145 mm Moisture content 4 to 6 9o composit
349. the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 72 LAN Interface Setup opecify the settings for the LAN interface to be used The default setting is Auto Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Network and then Change of LAN Interface 3 Select Auto 1OBASE T Half TOBASE T Full 100BASE TX Half or 100BASE TX Full as the LAN interface Press OK 5 After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 72 8 79 Default Setting System Menu Interface Block Setting This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces The following interface block settings are available e USB Host USB memory slot setting e USB Device USB interface setting Optional interface Optional interface card setting USB Host USB memory slot setting This locks and protects the USB memory slot A1 or USB port A2 USB host The default setting is Unblock Use the procedure below to specify the USB Host setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Interface Block Setting and then Change of USB Host NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For thi
350. this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 4 Press Next of Job Accounting Setting Next of Default Setting and then Change of Copier Printer Count 5 Press Total or Split 6 Press OK Restricting the Use of the Machine This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether Split or Total is selected for Managing the Copier Printer Counts on page 11 18 Restriction Items Split selected for Copier Printer Count Copy Restriction Total Limits the total number of sheets used for full color single color and black and white copying Copy Restr Full Color Limits the number of sheets used for full color copying Copy Restr SingleColor Limits the number of sheets used for single color copying Print Restriction Total Limits the total number of sheets used for color and black and white printing Print Restr Full Color Limits the number of sheets used for color printing ocan Restriction Others Limits the number of sheets scanned excludes copying 11 18 Management FAX TX Restriction Limits the number of sheets sent by fax This is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed FAX Port Restriction Restricts the ports used for faxing This is displayed when two optional FAX kits
351. tion eoesereoss i2 tuti gatorts toa ote Hex Otia 9 XXV amp Paper icit nc RTT XXV e Energy Star ENERGY STARS miseri ERE XXV e coodEigi8e ius nClle m E T TT TT xxvi XIX Legal Information Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of Kyocera Mita Corporation is prohibited XX Regarding Trade Names e PRESCRIBE and ECOSYS are trademarks of Kyocera Corporation e KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation Microsoft MS DOS Windows Windows NT and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U S A and or other countries e Windows Me Windows XP and Windows Vista are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation e PCL is a trademark of Hewlett Packard Company Adobe Acrobat Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell Inc e IBM and IBM PC AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation Power PC is a trademark of IBM in the U S A and or other countries e AppleTalk is a registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc This machine has been developed using embedded real time operating system Tornado by Wind River oystems Inc TrueType is a registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc e TypeBankG B TypeBankM M and Typebank OCR are trademarks of TypeBank All European langu
352. tories by e mail Use the procedure below to set the subject 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Report Next of Sending Log History and then Change of Job Log Subject 3 Enter an e mail subject not more than 60 characters NOTE Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix 7 for details on entering characters 4 Check that the entry is correct and press OK 12 Status Job Cancel Pause and Resumption of Jobs Pause resume all printing jobs in printing waiting The procedure for pausing and resuming jobs is explained below 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key Status 2 Press Pause All Print Jobs on the Printing Jobs Status Status screen Printing is paused All Job No End Date Type Job Name User Name Result 000001 10 10 09 50 doc10102008095050 AAAAA InProcess 000002 10 10 09 55 doc10102008095510 AAAAA Waiting 1 1 000003 10 10 10 00 e doc10102008091000 AAAAA Waiting Priority Move Up Detail Override l Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device Paper Supplies Communication 10 10 2008 10 10 3 When resuming the printing of jobs that have been paused press Resume All Print Jobs Canceling of Jobs For more information on canceling jobs refer to the Canceling Jobs on page 3 42 7 13 Status Job Cancel Priority Override for Waiting Jobs Priority Override function suspends the current job and prints the job in waiting first The procedure for usi
353. ts the default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning excludes copying FAX TX Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes This is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed 11 21 Use the procedure below to specify the counter limits User Login Job Accounting Copy Restriction Total Set the default limit value for restricting use of the functions for each account by counter i 1 9999999 gqq9999 z 10 10 2008 10 10 11 22 Management Press the System Menu key Press User Login Job Accounting If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter a login user name and password and press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password Press Next of Job Accounting Setting Next of Default Setting and then Next of Default Counter Limit Press Change for the item you want to modify and then press or or use the numeric keys to enter the default restriction on the number of sheets Press OK To set another default restriction repeat steps 5 to 6 Management Counting the Number of Pages Printed This counts the number of pages printed Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job Accounting A new count can also be started after resetting the count data whic
354. tting and then Change of Auto File Deletion Time Document Box Removable Memory Auto File Deletion Time i Set the time to automatically delete stored documents Cancel d OK 10 10 2008 10 10 Storing Documents Document Box oet the time at which the document is deleted by pressing Press Keys to enter the time directly using the numeric keys Press OK The time for document deletion is set The procedure for storing documents in a custom box is explained below T Custom Box Search Name Search No Register Edit Box _ OTT Store File Igstail Custom Box Job Box Removable Memory 08 08 2009 10 10 Press the Document Box key Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen Press Custom Box select the box where the document will be stored and then press Store File Select the type of originals scanning density etc as necessary Press the Start key The original is scanned and the data is stored in the specified Custom Box NOTE Enter up to 64 characters as the file name Document Box Printing Documents The procedure for printing documents in a custom box is explained below 1 Press the Document Box key 2 Press Custom Box select the box containing the document you want to print and press Open NOTE If a custom box is protected by a password enter the correct password 3 Select the document you wish to print by checkin
355. ttings for printing the result reports can also be configured NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only print by logging in with administrator privileges Printing Reports Printable reports are as follows Status Page Check the information including current settings available memory space and optional equipment installed Status Page Ga KYOCERA MFP Firmware Version Font List Check the font samples installed in the machine Scalable Bitmap Passwor d Selection FSET Font ID Scalable Bitmap Selection FSET 8 41 Default Setting System Menu Network Status Page Check the information including network interface firmware version network address and protocol Network Status Page Gi KYOCERA Service Status Page More detailed information is available than on the Status Page Service personnel usually print the service status pages for maintenance purpose Use the procedure below to print a report 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Report and Next of Print Report 3 Press Print for the report you want to print Printing starts A confirmation screen appears Press Yes Send Result Report Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete The table below shows the available settings a IMEMAMU Off No result report No result report printed o report automatically printed Transmitted im
356. type ilStoring Job Scan es iStoring Job Printer et iStoring Job FAX iStoring Job i FAX LE B Join Box Document Sige mCopy Box Document get Job name or file name is displayed User Name for the executed job Status Status of job InProcess The status before starting to save such as during scanning originals Storing Storing Data Canceling Canceling the job Pause Pausing the job a7 of Job Type Only selected type of jobs is displayed Cancel Select the job you want to cancel from the list and press this key 9 Detail Select the job whose detailed information you want to display from the list and press this key Refer to Checking the Detailed Information of Histories on page 7 10 Status Job Cancel Checking the Detailed Information of Jobs Check the detailed information of each job Use the procedure below to check a job s information Status Scheduled Job Z Job Type 0 J Accepted Time Type 9 438 14 47 Printing Jobs Status Sending Jobs Detail Job No 000080 Job No 000080 Job Type Sending Job E mail Job Name e abc def com User Name Status InProcess Storing Jobs Device Paper Supplies Communication 10 10 2008 10 10 Status Destination Processing 2 Destination ABCDE User Name Useri Job Name doc20070404115151 Accepted Time 10 10 10 Status Detail Job No 000080 Job No 000080 Job Type Sending J
357. u key 2 Press Printer and then Change of Color Setting 3 Select Color or Black amp White 4 Press OK EcoPrint EcoPrint conserves toner when printing This is recommended for test copies where faded printing is not a problem Use the procedure below to specify the EcoPrint setting 1 2 3 4 Press the System Menu key Press Printer and Change of EcoPrint Press Off or On Press OK 8 36 Default Setting System Menu Override A4 Letter Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter which are similar in size as the same size when printing The table below shows the available settings LL ee On A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size The machine will use whichever size is in the paper source A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size Use the procedure below to specify the override A4 Letter setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Printer and Change of Override A4 Letter 3 Press Off or On 4 Press OK Duplex Select binding orientation for duplex mode The table below shows the available settings ami Ce NENNEN NN 2 sided Bind Shorter edge bound Se ShortEdge 2 sided Bind Longer edge bound LongEdge EB Use the procedure below to select a duplex setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Printer and Change of Duplex 3 Press 1 sided 2 sided Bind LongEdge or 2 sided Bind ShortEdge 4 Press OK Copi
358. uipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Radio Tag Technology Europe In some countries the radio tag technology used in this equipment to identify the toner container may be subject to authorization and the use of this equipment may consequently be restricted NOTE Product marked with the Crossed out Wheeled Bin Symbol includes the battery that complies with the European Parliament and Council Directive 2006 66 EC the Battery Directive in European Union Do not remove and dispose of the batteries included in this machine XVI Legal Restriction on Copying Scanning It may be prohibited to copy scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner Copying Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by law It may not be limited to these items Do not knowingly copy scan the items that are not to be copied scanned Paper money Bank note Securities otamp Passport Certificate Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying scanning of other items not mentioned above XVII xviii Legal and Safety Information Please read this information before using your machine This chapter provides information on the following topics e Legal VOY apr sens Em XX amp Rogardmng Trade VN EDITT XXI Energy Saving Control FUNC HOM s ooa isu o dosE nosti tS e Art DE EERI SIRO E cob oria XXV e Automatic 2 Sided Copy Func
359. ular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through Before purchasing envelopes in volume try testing a sample to ensure the print quality Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled Thus keep the package sealed until you are ready to use them Appendix 15 Keep the following points in mind Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive In addition do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive is exposed after the top layer is peeled off Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive comes off in the machine Do not use envelopes with certain special features For example do not use envelopes with a grommet for winding a string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film covered window If paper jams occur load fewer envelopes at once To prevent paper jams when printing onto multiple envelopes do not allow more than ten envelopes remain in the output tray at once Thick Paper Before loading thick paper in the multi purpose tray fan it and align the edges Some thick paper may still have rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki by placing the paper on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler Printing onto paper with rough edges may cause jams NOTE If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed load the paper in the multi purpose tray with
360. ult for Compression Ratio Priority Standard or Quality Priority 4 Press OK Color TIFF Compression Settings Select the compression method for TIFF images handled on this machine Use the procedure below to set the default Color TIFF Compression setting 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v and Next of Function Defaults Press s twice and then Change of Color TIFF Compression 3 Select TIFF V6 or TTN2 4 Press OK Repeat Copying Select the Repeat Copy default The options are as follows The table below shows the available settings ae No Repeat Copy is performed Repeat Copy is performed NOTE This setting is not displayed when the optional Data Security Kit is installed or the Repeat Copy job is set to 0 Refer to page 4 42 for Repeat Copy Use the procedure below to set the default Repeat Copy setting 8 24 Default Setting System Menu Press the System Menu key 2 Press Common Settings v and Next of Function Defaults Press v twice and Change of Repeat Copy 3 Select the default for Off or On 4 Press OK Collate Offset Set the defaults for Collate Offset The table below shows the available settings ee Collate Collate not performed C Collate performed Of Offset not performed Offset Set Offset performed If Off is selected of Collate it is Each Page performed Each Pagel NOTE Refer to page 3 14 for Co
361. uring stanby 160 W or less During Low Power Mode 100 W or less Recovery time from Low Power 30 seconds or less Mode 1 Factory default 2 Power consumption in Plugged in Mode can only be terminated by removing the power plug from the outlet Appendix 26 Environmental Specifications 40 40 ppm model and 50 40 ppm model Description I Nose emission During copying rless Power During copying Black amp White 980 W o 1110 W or less consumption with full optional 120V 120V 1000 W or less 1130 W or less 230V 230V 1130 W or less 120V equipment 1150 W or less 230V During stanby 210 W or less During Low Power Mode 130 W or less Recovery time from Low Power 30 seconds or less Mode Recovery time from sleep 1 Factory default 2 Power consumption in Plugged in Mode can only be terminated by removing the power plug from the outlet a NOTE Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types Maschinenlarminformations Verordnung 3 GPSGV der h chste Schalldruckpegel betragt 70 dB A oder weniger gemass EN ISO 7779 Das Ger t ist nicht f r die Benutzung am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gem BildscharbV vorgesehen Um st rende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld platziert werden Appendix 27 Glossary Accessibility The machine is designed featuring good accessibility eve
362. uring the trial period differ depending on the application Starting Application Use a Use the procedure below to start using an application 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System and then Next of Optional Function NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 Select the desired application and press Activate You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing Detail 4 Inthe license key entry screen press Official oome applications do not require you to enter a license key If the license key entry screen does not appear go to Step 5 To use the application as a trial press Trial without entering the license key 5 When the confirmation screen appears press Yes IMPORTANT If you change the date time while using an application you will no longer be able to use the application 8 83 Default Setting System Menu Checking Application Details Use the procedure below to check the details of an application 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System and then Next of Optional Function NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login
363. urity employed by the LDAP server LDAP over SSL Use implicit mode for data communication The server provides services using the LDAP over SSL port 636 Encryption is applied to any data communication using this port LDAPv3 TLS Use explicit mode for data communication Select this if the server supports the start TLS command This uses the same port 389 as LDAP Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Network Next of Secure Protocol and then Change of LDAP Security 3 Press Off LDAP over SSL or LDAPv3 TLS 8 78 Default Setting System Menu 4 Press OK 5 After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 72 IPSec Setting Sets up IPSec The default setting is Off Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Network and then Change of PSec NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password 3 Press On 4 Press OK 5 After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again a For detailed information on restarting
364. user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 11 5 for the default login user name and password Press Next of Job Accounting Setting and then Print of Print Accounting Report Press Yes on the screen to confirm the printing 11 26 Management Unknown Account ID Jobs The behavior of the machine when it receives a job from unknown account ID i e unsent ID can be specified Refer to Unknown login user name Job on page 11 9 for details Checking and Printing Counter Counter Press the Counter key to check the number of sheets Printed Pages printed and scanned Copy Printer Black amp White You can check the number of pages printed in each Pulea paper size by pressing Printed Pages by Paper Size SingleColor Total Scanned Pages Copy FAX Others Originals 600 200 1800 Print Printed Pages Status Page by Paper Size us 10 10 2008 10 10 Data Security Kit Operations Installing the optional Data Security Kit adds Data Security on the System Menu Refer to the Data Security Kit E Operation Guide on the bundled CD ROM for descriptions of the Data Security options and the procedures for using them 11 27 Management 11 28 Appendix e Optional Equipment seseeseeeemmH Appendix 2 e Character Entry MOITIO
365. ustment esas sd bob em deter dedadAdddes m RU dodo E UR dier dors 4 31 One touch Image Adjust cc rr 4 33 Sharpness Adjust 0 0 ehh 4 34 Background Density Adjust 0 0 0 0 ccc ee has 4 35 Continuous Scan 0 eee eee rns 4 36 Auto Image Rotation 0 0 eee eee ees 4 37 Negative Image 1 ee ee rares 4 37 are IMAG oo agent aes cee eeoena ue ee eeeceseeans ee des HHGeE see Seeees cess 4 38 Job Finish INOUCE 22 202 06040264 4b4 4000488 0beee ad douce ded eed eger women ene bes 4 39 Pile AMG g 04 404 4 thane oe 44 OR Deed Hes oo awed ees cee oS oe Ae oe oe ede o 4 41 Priority Override 0 0 cc eee ee eee eee eee eee 4 41 Repeal CODVu congas ees 2522933 599 9 P 933 282 5652 9 992 15295 1995 92 iS ee 4 42 OHP Backing Sheet Mode 1 0 leen 4 44 Sending Functions Original Size Selection 0 2 0 ehh 5 2 sending Size Selection 0 0 anana aa ee ete eee ee 5 3 Vo L 5 5 COROIN Ge eria ia i aE ond 2 da cared wed ee AE a i bawdy E a a a a ceed wee E A 5 6 Mixed Size OriginalS 2 0 hrs 5 7 1 sided 2 sided Selection 0 0 0 rn 5 10 Orignal Orientation ss ss isset ka aeai ee DE a aE a E a de PRAES SEP E a a e bene E ia 5 11 FIFTA eses neresna k a eae oe A E a a og a a ee 2 Bed are Pee OE 5 12 File SopalaUO 13 2 234 3 2251 0233 19 29 13509939 99572 oes OEE LI EU RR PU E E 5 13 PDF Encryption Functions 20 0
366. ut 1 Ready for interrupt copy is displayed RUNE y for interrupt copy is display HILTNN The current print job is temporarily interrupted O Shortcut 3 z Zoom Paper fo 2 sided 2in1 Off gt gt 2 sided Nu ME O Shortcut 6 Org Paper Color Layout Edit Advanced Finishing Image Quality Setup 10 10 2008 10 10 S i Auto 100 Normal 0 O Shortcut 4 7 P Paper JU Zoom m Density z O Shortcut 5 ej 2 Place the originals onto the machine for interrupt copy and configure the copy settings Press the Start key to start interrupt copying 4 When interrupt copying ends press the Interrupt key The machine resumes the paused print jobs Basic Operation Staple Use this feature to staple your finished copies NOTE Stapling requires the optional document finisher or 3 000 sheet document finisher Note also that saddle stitching center stapling requires the folding unit The following stapling options and orientations are available Original Orientation Original Orientation Original Orientation Original Orientation i Left Top Edge Left top Left Top Edge Left top Top Edge Back Edge Top Edge Back Edge corner corner gt Mh q li A 3 000 Sheet Document Finisher Cassette Paper Load Direction gt gt i gt Mi ll N Wi ll A gt gt ui 3 000 Sheet Document Finis
367. utlet to avoid the danger of fire or electrical shock Then contact your service representative Do not remove or connect the power plug with wet hands as there is a danger of electrical shock Always contact your service representative for maintenance or repair of internal parts XII eoe A ooo A CAUTION Do not pull the power cord when removing it from the outlet If the power cord is pulled the wires may become broken and there is a danger of fire or electrical shock Always grasp the power plug when removing the power cord from the outlet Always remove the power plug from the outlet when moving the machine If the power cord is damaged there is a danger of fire or electrical shock Always hold the designated parts only when lifting or moving the machine If this machine will be left unused for an extended period e g overnight turn it off at the main power switch If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time e g vacation remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution If the optional Fax kit is installed note that turning the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception For safety purposes always remove the power plug from the outlet when performing cleaning operations lf dust accumulates within the machine there is a danger of fire or other trouble It is therefore recommended that you consult with your service representative in regard to cle
368. values for each chart Press Execute after all values have been entered Color registration begins Press OK after color registration is complete Refer to Steps 1 2 of Normal Registration to display the Color Registration screen Press Detail Press Print of Chart Details A chart is printed On the chart for each of M magenta C cyan and Y yellow charts for H 1 to 7 and V 3 are printed al MH 5 IGECA13579 HFDB02468 i ii CH 5 IGECA13579 HFDB02468 YH 5 IGECA13579 HFDB02468 ULL z lt ww WONUWEPOQMQH 00 Ov iS I9 O UJ O d ii INIL 2 lt gt WNUWEPORQAH Qo Ovi NoUUtmud ONWEPEPAHQH 0 Ovi I0 O UJ O fd rni K 3 ll ds MH 6 IGECA13579 HFDBO0246 il i IGBCAIS3S57 7S9 HFDB02468 YH 6 IGECA13579 HFDB02468 VLLL Q0 U10ppPoObudgod WNUWEPOHQAH WINUWEPOHQAH MH 7 IGECA13579 HFDBO246 8 CH 7 IGECA13579 HFDBO2468 YH 7 IGECA13579 HFDB02468 IGECA13579 HFDBO02468 Ht M Ii Default Setting System Menu Find the location on each chart where 2 lines most closely match If this is the O position registration for that color is not required For the illustration B is the appropriate value From charts V 1 to V 5 read only the values from V 3 center Press Next of Registration Details Press Change for the chart to be corrected Press or to enter the values read from the chart and press OK
369. ved to USB memory in the PDF TIFF JPEG XPS or high compression PDF format Scan to USB Fax Box Fax Box stores the fax data received For details refer to the Operation Guide supplied with the fax kit 3 34 Basic Operation for Document Box Basic Operation This section explains basic operations for document boxes using examples where tasks are carried out with custom boxes NOTE In the following explanation it is assumed that user login administration is enabled For details on User Logon privileges refer to User Privileges on page 3 40 The basic procedure for using document boxes is explained below rs Custom Box 0001 s SALES Anonymous poe Wl search Name D EN Store File Detail Removable Memory Custom Box 08 08 2009 10 10 Ta Custom Box XT an 1096 Search Name Search No 0003 0003 Box 30 li Register Edit Box 0001 0001 Box HT 0002 0002 Box 2 User 20 0 Store File Detail p pees Ere Custom Box 08 08 2009 10 10 1 Press the Document Box key The default document box screen appears 2 Press Custom Box Job Box or Removable Memory to select the type of document box you want to work with In this example press Custom Box The box list screen appears You can use this screen for tasks such as registering and editing boxes For more information on using the box list refer to Custom Box List on page 3 36 N
370. vel may cause the originals to jam see the figure Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed in such a way that the holes or perforations will be scanned last not first The original placement indicator is lit or unlit depending on how originals are placed Indications and their status are as follows e Green left indicator lit Original is placed properly e Green left indicator blinking Original is not placed properly Remove and place again e Red right indicator blinking Original is jammed Remove the jammed original and place it properly 2 35 Preparation before Use 2 36 3 Basic Operation This chapter explains the following operations dii ss ciNese ln 3 2 e Enter key and Quick No Search key ccccscccseeceeeesseeseeeseeeeaeeees 3 2 TOVON Faner SAY esine rr raa E AENEA 3 4 El eie i is RERO 3 5 di 21119 0 Go 6 duee m d 3 6 ilic sii emm 3 7 e Printing Printing from PO DCAMONS ecedetesnoncassecesecscncatersssecsepenee ctancea 3 22 amp 2 e er EE E TAA AEAN 3 24 s Oe CSUN ANON sssri iais UERLSUTOS 3 30 EE USNO DOCUMONU DON TRE TETUUMS 3 33 e Basic Operation for Document BOX orti irr e ceno eie 3 35 e ANCEN JODS EE 3 42 ME OSS CUD OOOO 9 eee een eee eee ee ee ee eee 3 43 e Program Copying and Sending o pcccccsescestencceascacasepescnndecegseacecteseceee 3 46 e Registering Shortcuts Copy Send and Document Box Settings 3 46
371. ven below Removable Memory USB Memory The usage and capacity of the external media connected to this machine are displayed Press Format to format external media Press Remove to safely remove the external media For details refer to Removing the USB Memory in the next section FAX Port 1 FAX Port 2 The information such as sending receiving and dialing is displayed Press Line Off to cancel a fax in sending receiving For details refer to Canceling FAX Communication on page 18 in the section afterwards Press Manual RX to start a fax Use this function when you want to talk to the sender before receiving the fax originals For details refer to the Operation Guide of FAX kit Press Log to display the fax transmission history For details refer to the Operation Guide of FAX kit Removing the USB Memory There is a way to remove the USB memory safely Use the procedure below to remove the USB memory 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key r 2 Press Device Communication gt Remove in Scanner Hard Disk Removable Memory Printer Removable Memory Not connected OS Format Remove FAX Port 1 FAX Port 2 Line Off Manual RX FAX Ra i FAX Check New FAX Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device _ Paper Supplies Communication Status 10 10 2008 10 10 3 When Removable memory can be safely removed is displayed remove the USB memory 17 Status Job Cancel
372. w to set the background density when sending scanned images 1 Press the Send key N Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Color Image Quality and then Background Density Adj e Ready to send Destination 4 Press On and press 1 to 5 Lighter Darker to ace orgie 1 adjust the background density Background Density Adj Background 5 P ress O K Lighter Darker Cancel el OK 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending 2 20 Sending Functions Color Grayscale Black and White Selection This feature allows you to select the color mode used for scanning when sending images You can select from Auto Color Gray Auto Color B amp W Full Color Grayscale or Black amp White Use the procedure below to select the color mode when sending scanned images 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the platen 3 Press Color Image Quality and then Color Selection gi Ready to send MENS 4 Select the color mode to be used for scanning Place original 1 SE SEE 5 Press OK i Select scanning color Select Auto Color to automatically send color originals in full color and black amp white originals in black amp white Auto Colo Auto Color Color Gray Color B amp W an on ew LL Full Color Grayscale Black ite m 08 08 2009 10 10 6 Specify the destination and press the Start ke
373. witch again immediately Wait more than 5 seconds and then turn on the main power switch Preparation before Use Power Off Before turning off the main power switch press the Power key on the operation panel to off Make sure that the Power key and the memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch CAUTION The hard disk may be operating when the Power key or Memory indicator is lit or blinking Turning off the main power switch while the hard disk is operating may cause damage OJ Y 000gO O 3d 8 O00004Q O 0O0O0O0J O Make sure that the indicators are off v In case of not using the machine for an extended period of time CAUTION If this machine will be left unused for an extended period e g overnight turn it off at the main power switch If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time e g vacation A remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution If the optional Fax kit is installed note that turning the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception CAUTION Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity Preparation before Use Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode Low Power Mode To activate Low Power Mode press the Energy Saver key Touch panel and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save power except the Energy Sav
374. x Numerics 1 sided 2 sided Selection 5 10 3 000 sheet document finisher Appendix 4 3 000 sheet paper feeder Appendix 4 A Accessibility 8 84 Appendix 28 Adjusting Density 5 17 Auto 3 8 Manual 3 8 Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle 2 11 Adjustment Maintenance 8 44 Auto Color Correction 8 47 Color Calibration 8 52 Color Calibration Cycle 8 50 Color Registration 8 47 Copy Density Adjustment 8 44 Correcting Fine Black Lines 8 46 Developer Refresh 8 53 Display Brightness 8 46 Drum Refresh 8 45 Gray Adjustment 8 51 Laser Scanner Cleaning 8 53 MP Tray Cleaning 8 53 8 54 Send Box Density 8 45 Silent Mode 8 47 System Initialization 8 46 AppleTalk Appendix 28 Setup 2 15 Applications 8 69 Attention Indicator 1 4 Auto Image Rotation 4 37 Auto Low Power Mode 2 9 Auto Paper Selection Appendix 28 Auto Sleep 2 10 Appendix 28 B Background density adjust Index Copy 4 35 Send 5 20 Bonjour Appendix 28 Booklet from Sheets 4 18 Left side 4 18 Right side 4 18 Top binding 4 19 Border Erase Copy 4 16 Send 5 23 Bundled Items 2 2 Buzzer 8 3 C Calibration Cycle 8 50 Cassette Loading Paper 2 21 Paper Size and Media Type 8 5 Cassette 1 1 4 Cassette 2 1 4 Caution Labels ix CD ROM 2 2 Centering 5 6 Changing Language 2 11 8 2 Character Entry Method Appendix 7 Cleaning Dual scanning area 9 3 Glass Platen 9 2 Original Cover 9 2 Separator 9 5 Slit Glass 9 3 Transfer Roller 9 6 Cleaning Brush 1 5 Clip Holder 1 4 Co
375. x Documents can be listed either by name or as thumbnails The list can be used as shown below List Listing the documents by name Listing the documents by time of update in Listing the documents by size in in alphabetical order ascending descending order ascending descending order Selecting more than one document at a time Ur c E SS BG File Name lt Cs t twt yA Date and Time Gs Salactnad ts b 0404200710574501 10 10 2008 09 40 21 MB a eee eee Highlighting a document to electing documents by display its details with Detail 0002 d iE 0404200710574511 10 10 2008 09 50 21 MB checking checkboxes 0003 94 0404200710574521 10 10 2008 10 00 21 MB ee na _ 08 08 2009 10 10 Detail Preview i Previews the selected document Status Thumbnail Switches between list displa Selecting more than one m e e Isplay document at a time OF pn Prints sends joins moves copies or deletes the selected documents Highlighting a document to display its details with Detail Selecting documents by checking checkboxes Saves the document in the open box Move Copy Delete Status 08 08 2009 10 10 Store File l NOTE You can select multiple documents by pressing the respective document checkboxes However note t
376. x printing is not possible for the selected paper size and media type EN NEMENMEKKRAE INNEN Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed Finishing Error Select alternative actions when finishing stapling or offsetting is not available for the selected paper size or media type The setting is ignored and the job is printed Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed No Staple Error Select what to do when staples run out during printing re Printing continues without stapling Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed NOTE The messages are displayed when the optionaldocument finisher or 3 000 sheet document finisher is installed Stapling Limit Error Select what to do when stapling capacity is exceeded during printing E ee ae Printing continues without stapling Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed NOTE The messages are displayed when the optionaldocument finisher or 3 000 sheet document finisher is installed Default Setting System Menu Punch Waste Full Error oelect what to do when the punch waste box becomes full during printing 9L Printing continues without punching Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed NOTE The messages are displayed when the optional 3 000 sheet document finisher and punch unit are installed Paper Mismatch Error Select what to do when th
377. xt of Network and then Next of TCP IP Setting 3 Press Change of TCP IP 4 Press On and then press OK 5 Press Change of Pv4 EE 6 Press DHCP d eomm 7 Press Off of DHCP and then press OK E 8 Press Bonjour mes Jw 9 Press Off of Bonjour and then press OK 10 Press IP Address and enter the address using the on E MPH Lon JM ox 11 Press Subnet Mask and enter the address using aS the numeric keys 12 Press Default Gateway and enter the address using the numeric keys 2 13 Preparation before Use 13 Check if all the address entries are correct and press OK 14 After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 72 DHCP Settings Select whether or not to use the DHCP server The default setting is On Use the procedure below 1 Press the System Menu key 2 Press System Next of Network and then Next of TCP IP Setting 3 Press Change of TCP IP 4 Press On and then press OK 5 Press Change of Pv4 6 Press DHCP 7 Press On or Off of DHCP and then press OK 8 After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 72 Bonjour Settings Select whether or not to use Bonjour The def
378. y Copying begins If all original pages have been scanned press Finish Scan Copying begins Basic Operation Printing Printing from Applications Follow the steps below to print documents from applications NOTE To print the document from applications install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied CD ROM Product Library 1 Create a document using an application 2 Click File and select Print in the application The Print dialog box appears 3 Clickthe W button nextto the Name field and select Printer this machine from the list Name EIS Properties Status Ready Reverse pages Type Kyocera ERR 3 me Print as image Where Print to file Print Range Copies and Adjustments All J Number of copies 1 C Current page Iv Collate C Pages from 1 to 8 Shrink oversized pages to paper size EX Even and Odd Pages E Expand small pages to paper size v Auto rotate and center pages v Comments Preview K 8 26 v ja Color Managed On printer Units Inches Zoom 100 0 Printing Tips Cancel 4 Enterthe desired print quantity in the Number of copies box Enter any number up to 999 When there is more than one document select Collate to print out one by one in the sequence of the page numbers 5 Click Properties button The Properties dialog box appears 3 22 Basic Operation Kyocera Nl Malls Properties 6 Select the Basic tab and click Page Size button to
379. y Send and Document Box Settings 3 48 Using the Internet Browser 1 0 0 0 00 ce eee eee eee 3 49 4 Copying Functions Suse p P 4 2 li OPERATION GUIDE Contents Paper SelecllOlk sse as cheers open E peii Gr Son God Uus 418 d xL 0R rab ar s nah dup om dec Nd ege d eg o 4 3 Mixed Size Originals ce hh rns 4 6 Original Orientation o aa se sei e RP PE du hbase oh ob Rave qai beads hen egi 4 9 Output Destination 0 0 0 0 lille an 4 11 COMBINE MOUE s 644424208 FbIG 3 eea aE E a a a e E EA equ eee PES Ed ne qa 4 12 Margin Centering Mode 0 00 ee eee eee ee eae 4 14 Border Elase 54026 95 TI ee ce one ese ehh eee eee steered eue PPESTESES ee EDINRS TE 4 16 Booklet from Sheets 0 0 0 0 cc eee hrs 4 18 COVEl MOU Oss yc ame ece ceed besuseaews ya gta we VES Ger eS ee Stee eee bees E aS PE 4 21 Fom Overlay 4 22 Page NUOMDCHING sii sasama siase Henge DOCE a 02 DE a Dude Ead E Nee 4 23 Memo Mode cc ee ee hh hh sh 4 24 POSE pe eens sen eae ae he oe ee oe ee eee E E G E 4 26 Image Repeat Double Copy 0 0 0 anaa ee ee ee ees 4 27 zona eaer A bu ned Hea oe Geet esha eee s oe neers hones bene eee euaaees eee 4 29 Single Color COPY anaana ee ee eee ees 4 29 Color Balance Adjust uie c Rr REX see ees Oe TE Lxx 3 Rua bo esteem ad ee Rb ee wn 4 30 Hue Adj
380. y always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine Original Cover Glass Platen Wipe the backside of the original cover the inside of the document processor and the glass platen with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or mild detergent IMPORTANT Do not use thinner or other organic solvents Original Cover Maintenance Slit Glass Dual scanning area Clean the slit glass If black streaks or dirt appears in copies when using the optional document processor clean the slit glass with TOR eevee ee the supplied cleaning cloth The message Clean the slit onthe ef sle wit the speed dry doth glass may be displayed if the slit glass requires Note that dirty glass and sheet may cause cl ean n g black streaks to appear in the output When using the document processor to allow dual scanning clean the dual scanning unit also IMPORTANT Wipe the slit glasses with the dry accessory cloth Do not use water soap or solvents for cleaning 10 10 2008 10 10 1 Remove the cloth from the cleaning cloth compartment 2 Open the document processor and wipe the slit glass a 3 Wipe the white guide b on the document processor j AM 4 When using the document processor to allow dual scanning open the top cover of the document processor Maintenance 5 Wipe the slit glass 6 Wipe the white roller 7 Close the document processor top cover and return the cleaning cloth to the cleaning cloth
381. y to start sending 5 21 Continuous Scan Sending Functions When the multi page originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time the originals can be scanned in separate batches and then sent as one job With this function originals can be scanned one after another until you press Scan Finish Any of the following settings can be changed during scanning Original Size selection Original Orientation e 1 sided 2 sided selection e Scan density e Image quality e Scan resolution Color selection e Sending Size selection e Zoom Border Erase The procedure for using continuous scanning when sending scanned images is explained below Destination Ready to send 4 Place original Continuous Scan Scana large number of originals in separate batches and then produce as one job Settings can be changed during scanning lel e r 08 08 2009 10 10 pr Original Zoom 100 Send D Add Shortcut S 1 2 0 22 Press the Send key Press Advanced Setup and then Continuous Scan Press On Continuous Scan is selected Press OK Specify the destination Place the original and press the Start key When the scanning is completed change the settings as necessary Place the next original and press the Start key ocan the remaining originals by the same procedure When you have scanned all the originals press Finish Scan to start se

KYOCERA TASKalfa 250ci

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents